The Environmental
Protection Agency
SAFETY MANAGEMENT
TRAINING PROGRAM
August 1975
-------
Lesson 1
-------
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
SAFETY MANAGEMENT TRAINING PROGRAM
LESSON: Introduction to the Course
No. 1
Time: 2-1/2 hours
Objectives; Completion of this lesson will enable the trainee to
understand the purpose and.intent of the Occupational
Safety and Health Act, Executive Order 11807, and 29 CFR
1960--0ccupatiorial Safety arid Health Provisions for Federal
Employees and to carry out his responsibilities in accordance
with these directions.
Content: This lesson covers the directives that are contained in the
OSHA Act, Executive Order 11807, and 29 CFR 1960.
Methods:
Lecture, discussion, film.
References; The Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970.
The Executive Order 11807
29 CFR I960—Occupational Safety arid Health Provisions for
Federal Employees
Materials; Slide Projector (35mm) and screen.
Movie Projector (16mm)
Film: Safety in E.P.A.
Slides 1-1 through 1-11.
1-S-l
-------
LESSON: Introduction
The purpose of the course which you are attending is to
provide you with the skills and knowledge which you will
need to carry out your responsibilities in connection with
EPA's Safety and Health Program. The course is divided
into three parts:
• A "core" part which covers administrative
requirements and safety and health standards
which will apply to Laboratory and Field
Sampling personnel.
• A Laboratory part which covers safety and
health standards which apply only to
laboratories.
• A Field Sampling part which covers safety
and health standards which apply only to
field sampling personnel.
Data sources for the course include:
• 29 CFR 1960—Safety and Health Provisions for
Federal Employees
• 29 CFR 1910—General Industry Standards
• 29 CFR 1926—Construction Standards
• EPA Safety and Health Manual
• Various safety texts such as the National Safety
Council's Accident Prevention Manual, Motor Fleet
Safety Manual, Manufacturing Chemists Association
Safety Guides and Safety Data Sheets, and National
Fire Protection Association publications.
This lesson will cover the following:
SLIDE 1-1: CONTENT
• OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ACT
• EXECUTIVE ORDER 11807
• 29 CFR 1960--SAFETY AND HEALTH PROVISIONS
FOR FEDERAL EMPLOYEES
l-S-2
-------
LESSON: Introduction
BACKGROUND
Slide 1-2 shows the relationship of the above documents,
SLIDE 1-2: DOCUMENT RELATIONSHIP
CONGRESS
PASSED THE
OSHA ACT
PRESIDENT
ISSUED
E.O. 11807
SECRETARY
OF LABOR
29 CFR 1910
OCCUPATIONAL
SAFETY & HEALTH
PROVISIONS FOR
FEDERAL EMPLOYEES
The objective of this Lesson is indicated on Slide 1-3.
SLIDE 1-3: OBJECTIVE
TO ENABLE YOU TO APPLY
THE PROVISIONS OF THE
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY &
HEALTH ACT TO YOUR AREA
OF RESPONSIBILITY
THE OSHA ACT OF 1970
A summary of the Act is appended to this lesson. The
Sections of the Act that are of particular interest to
Federal employees are:
l-S-3
-------
LESSON: Introduction
• Section 6 - Standards
• Section 19 - Application to Federal Employees
• Section 24 - Reporting Requirements
• Section 20, 21 and 22 - Involvement of the
Department of Health, Education and Welfare
Section 19 which
SLIDE 1-4: SECTION 19
APPLIES ACT TO FEDERAL EMPLOYEES:
• PROVISION FOR A SAFE AND
HEALTHFUL WORKPLACE
• PROVISION FOR PERSONAL
PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT AND
DEVICES
• REQUIREMENTS FOR RECORD
KEEPING
• REQUIREMENTS FOR REPORTING
Slide 1-5 shows what the other applicable sections cover.
SLIDE 1-5: OTHER SECTIONS
SECTION 6 - REQUIRES ISSUANCE OF
STANDARDS
SECTION 24 - ESTABLISHES REPORTING
REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 20,- INVOLVE DHEW (NIOSH)
21, 22
Section 6 directs the Secretary of Labor to promulgate safety
and health standards and to provide administrative procedures
for modification, supplementation and cancellation of the
standards.
Section 19, you recall, requires the heads of Federal agencies
to adopt/issue standards "consistent" with the standards
issued by the Secretary.
Section 24 establishes reporting requirements. The Secretary
of Labor in consultation with the Secretary of Health, Edu-
cation and Welfare is directed to develop and maintain a
program to collect, compile, and analyze occupational safety
and health statistics. He is empowered to place reporting
requirements on employers for this purpose.
l-S-4
-------
LESSON: Introduction
Sections 20, 21 and 22 bring the Department of Health,
Education and Welfare into the occupational safety and
health program. Section 20 provides for HEW to conduct safe-
ty and health research; Section 21 provides for HEW to con-
duct safety and health training; Section 22 directs the
establishment of the National Institute of Safety and Health
(NIOSH) to perform the HEW functions.
EXECUTIVE ORDER 11807
The second document that is relevant to the establishment
of an occupational safety and health program in Federal
agencies is Executive Order 11807. A copy is appended at
the end of this lesson. It provides general instructions
for establishing a safety and health program to:
• The heads of Federal agencies
• The Secretary of Labor
It supercedes and cancels an older Executive Order 11612.
Section 2 of the Executive Order states the duties of the
heads of Federal agencies with respect to tl"1. establishment
of an occupational safety and health program. In brief,
these are:
• Appoint an Occupational Safety and Health Officer
with sufficient authority and sufficient staff to
establish and maintain an effective program.
• Establish a management information system to main-
tain records of occupational illnesses, injuries,
and accidents and to compile and transmit reports
required by the Secretary of Labor.
• Establish an occupational safety and health program
that will provide for:
- Adoption of occupational safety and health
standards that are consistent with those promul-
gated by the Secretary of Labor for industry.
- The handling of reports from employees on the
existence of unsafe or unhealthful conditions
within the establishment.
- Periodic inspection of the establishment(s) and/
or the facilities within the agency.
- The abatement of hazards that may be created or
that exist within the agency's facilities.
l-S-5
-------
LESSON: Introduction
Provide occupational safety and health training for
agency personnel. The training material will include
information on the agency safety and health programs
as well as the training of employees in the safe and
healthful methods of carrying out their assigned tasks.
(OSHA has listed the training requirements in a docu-
ment which will be covered in detail in a later lesson.)
Employees to be trained are:
- Supervisors at all levels of management.
- Inspectors who will be responsible for conducting
periodic inspections of safety and health conditions
within the agency.
- Other employees who, according to the standards,
must be trained to carry out specific details of
their jobs.
Assist the Secretary of Labor in carrying out his
responsibilities, namely:
- Adhere to the reporting requirements that the
Secretary of Labor issues in carrying out his
responsibilities under Section 24 of the Act.
- Observe the spirit of the guidelines that the
Secretary of Labor issues for the establish-
ment of safety and health programs within Federal
agencies.
- Cooperate with the Secretary of Labor in his
efforts to carry out his responsibilities under
the Act.
In Section 3 of the Executive Order the President directs
the Secretary of Labor to carry out specific duties with
respect to establishing and maintaining a safety and health
program within the Federal government establishment. These
are:
• Issue detailed guidelines to the heads of Federal
agencies to establish the program.
• Prescribe recordkeeping and reporting requirements
that will enable the head of a Federal agency to
provide the information needed by the Secretary of
Labor to carry out the tasks in Section 24 of the
Act.
l-S-6
-------
LESSON: Introduction
• Provide consultation services to the heads of Federal
agencies in such areas as:
- Adoption of agency standards.
- Training of agency personnel
- Other occupational safety and health matters.
• Subject to the request of a Federal agency and on
a reimbursable basis perform such services as:
- Evaluate safety and health conditions within
the facilities of the agency.
- Recommend the adoption of appropriate standards
to regulate safety and health conditions within
the agency's facilities.
- Conduct inspections of safety and health con-
ditions within the facilities.
- Provide training in safety and health matters
for agency personnel.
• Evaluate each Federal agency's program and report
the results to the President. Each agency with
1000 or more employees shall be evaluated annually.
• Report to the President each year on the status of
Federal agency occupational safety and health programs.
Section 4 of the Executive Order continues the Federal Advisory
Council on Occupational Safety and Health. Its duties are to
advise the Secretary of Labor on matters of occupational safe-
ty and health. The Council is composed of 15 members; at
least five are to be Labor representatives.
29 CFR I960
The third document is the guidelines published in 29 CFR I960
for implementing the requirements of the Act in Federal
agencies. They were issued by the Secretary of Labor with
the advice and counsel of interested parties, particularly
members of Federal agencies and of Labor organizations. A
copy is appended to this lesson.
l-S-7
-------
LESSON: Introduction
29 CFR 1960 consists of six subparts:
A - Purpose and Scope
B - Record Keeping and Reporting Requirements
C - Agency Organization
D - Procedures for Inspections and Abatements
E - Agency Occupational Safety and Health Standards
F - Field Federal Safety and Health Council
The purpose and scope of 29 CFR 1960 are given in subpart A.
Important points are indicated on Slide 1-6.
SLIDE 1-6: PURPOSE AND SCOPE
• IMPLEMENTATION OF E.O. 11807
• MANDATORY AND NON-MANDATORY LANGUAGE
t CONSULTATION WITH EMPLOYEES/REPRESENTATIVES
• APPLICABILITY TO PRIVATE CONTRACTORS ON
FEDERAL PROJECTS
• DEFINITIONS
- DESIGNATED SAFETY AND HEALTH OFFICIAL
- SAFETY AND HEALTH SPECIALIST
- SAFETY AND HEALTH INSPECTOR
- OTHERS IN 1960.2
The purpose of the document is to implement the Executive
Order 11807.
Paragraph (c) of Subpart A states that whereas most of
29 CFR 1960 is considered to be "guidelines" for Federal
agencies the record keeping and reporting requirements are
mandatory.
The heads of Federal agencies are also required to consult
with their employees or representatives thereof and to pro-
vide for employee participation in the operation of agency
safety and health programs.
•The agency safety and health program does not apply to employ-
ees of private contractors on Federal property or projects.
These employees are covered by the Secretary of Labor's pro-
gram for private industry.
A list of definitions is included in Subpart A. Those of
"designated safety and health official," "safety and health
specialist" and "safety and health inspector" are important
to this lesson.
l-S-8
-------
LESSON: Introduction
Subpart B sets up record keeping and reporting require-
ments for the heads of Federal agencies so that they may
provide support to the Secretary of Labor in the compila-
tion of occupational illness and injury statistics. The
details of record keeping and reporting requirements will
be amplified in Lesson 2.
Subpart C—Organization. The Executive Order required the
heads of Federal agencies to appoint Safety and Health
Officials with sufficient staff and authority to carry
out their responsibilities.
Slide 1-7 shows the responsibilities as listed in Subpart C.
SLIDE 1-7: THE DESIGNATED AGENCY SAFETY AND HEALTH OFFICIAL
ASSIST THE HEAD OF THE AGENCY IN ESTABLISHING:
• AN OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH POLICY TO
CARRY OUT E. 0. 11807.
• ORGANIZATION AND PROCEDURES TO CARRY OUT POLICY.
• GOALS AND OBJECTIVES FOR ELIMINATION OF
INJURIES/ILLNESSES.
• PLANS AND PROCEDURES FOR SAFETY AND HEALTH
PROGRAM EVALUATION.
• PRIORITIES FOR ABATING HAZARDOUS CONDITIONS.
• ROUTINE FOR BUDGETARY PROCESSES TO OBTAIN
FUNDS FOR THE PROGRAM.
The duties as indicated in the above slide are per-
formed at a high level of management. The Designated
Agency Safety and Health Official is assisted in per-
forming his function by the EPA Safety Management
Systems Staff. Both he and his safety staff fulfill
a staff function. He develops the program and audits
its performance, ^implementation of the EPA Safety and
Health Program is a line function. It is the responsi-
bility of all supervisors within the Agency to im-
plement this program and safeguard their employees.
Official responsibility for safety and health program
implementation is vested in the EPA Administrator. He
carries out this mandate through his Assistant Ad-
ministrator & Regional Administrators and all super-
visors under them.
The Secretary of Labor recommends that Safety and Health
Committees be used to assist in establishing and carrying
out the Safety and Health Program. Slide 1-8 shows the
recommended membership and duties.
l-S-9
-------
LESSON: Introduction
SLIDE 1-8: SAFETY AND HEALTH COMMITTEES
MEMBERSHIP:
MANAGEMENT REPRESENTATIVES
EMPLOYEE REPRESENTATIVES
TECHNICAL PERSONNEL
DUTIES:
ADVISE AND ASSIST OFFICIALS OF THEIR
RESPONSIBILITIES IN THE SAFETY AND
HEALTH PROGRAM
Making Information Available to Employees. The regulations
require that the following information be made available to
employees:
The Act
The Executive Order
Agency Standards
Agency Program Information
POSTER regarding Employee Complaints
The first 4 items are self-explanatory. The fifth
item is a poster that will be furnished by the
Secretary of Labor or may be made up by the head of
the agency. It should contain instructions to employ-
ees regarding their obligation to report unsafe and
unhealthful conditions, the procedures for so doing and
their immunity from harassment for reporting such
conditions.
The duties of agency officials and employees are shown in
Slide 1-9.
SLIDE 1-9: DUTIES OF OFFICIALS AND EMPLOYEES
SUPERVISORS AND COMPLY WITH REGULATIONS AND
EMPLOYEES STANDARDS AND REPORT HAZARDS
LINE OFFICERS IDENTIFY HAZARDS AND TAKE
ACTION FOR ABATEMENT
AGENCY HEADS CONSIDER SAFETY AND HEALTH
FACTORS IN EMPLOYEE EVALUATION
ASSURE THAT NO EMPLOYEE IS
COERCED FOR REPORTING HAZARDS
The duties of supervisors and the employees are to
comply with the agency's safety and health standards
and to report the existence of hazards in the establish-
ment . i
l-S-10
-------
LESSON: Introduction
Line officers are responsible for recognizing the
existence of hazards and taking the necessary action
for abating the hazards.
Hazards should be abated in one of the four ways
given below, in descending order of preference:
Eliminate the source of the hazard by
substitution of materials, processes, etc.
Control the hazard by enclosure, or
guarding.
Reduce the duration of exposure of per-
sonnel to the hazard by administrative
controls.
Use personal protective equipment.
Agency heads should ensure that employee performance
evaluations at all levels of management make notations
as to the excellence or culpable failure of employees
in carrying out their occupational safety and health
responsibilities.
Agency heads should further assure that employees are
not subjected to restraint, interference or coercion
in reporting unsafe or unhealthful conditions.
Subpart D—Procedures for Inspections and Abatements.
The Executive Order requires the head of the agency
to give prompt attention to, and to inspect for, unhealth-
ful and unsafe working conditions. This subpart details
those requirements. Slide 1-10 states the 10 principal
requirements.
SLIDE 1-10: INSPECTION AND ABATEMENT
RESPONSIBILITIES MAY BE DELEGATED, EXCEPT FOR
SPECIAL CASES.
USE QUALIFIED INSPECTORS.
INSPECTIONS CONDUCTED ANNUALLY.
INSPECTION ROUTINE DEFINED.
ADVANCE NOTICE NOT NORMALLY PERMITTED.
EMPLOYER AND EMPLOYEES REPRESENTED.
PROVISIONS FOR EMPLOYEE REPORTS OF HAZARDS.
IMMINENT DANGER DEFINED.
POSTING OF NOTICES OF HAZARDS.
SCHEDULE FOR ABATING HAZARDS.
1-S-ll
-------
LESSON: Introduction
Paragraph (g) of section 1960.25 permits this authority
to be delegated but still recommends that the designated
safety and health official keep direct control and be
in direct contact with the Secretary of Labor as nec-
essary in cases of employee reports of hazardous con-
ditions, imminent danger and in abatement of more
serious hazards. Committees can be useful in carrying
out the inspection/abatement duties.
In workplaces where there is an increased risk of
accident—chemical or machine processes—the inspector
should be a safety and health specialist as defined under
subpart A. Otherwise he need only have the training
necessary to carry out his inspection duties.
The use of consultants is recommended as needed.
All workplaces should be inspected at least once annually.
In those places where risk of accident is higher,inspec-
tions should be conducted more frequently.
Sections 1960.27 through 1960.33 provide guidelines
for the general conduct of inspections. These guide-
lines are based on the experiences of the OSHA -com-
pliance officers. Important points in the routine
are given in the following paragraphs. As discussed
in the 1960 rules, the inspections would be conducted
by inspectors from an upper management level in
facilities under the jurisdiction of that management
level.
When the inspector arrives at the facility he
should be given immediate entry and taken to
the head of the facility.
The inspectors should state the purpose of their
visit.(Is it a routine inspection or in answer
to a complaint or other?)
The inspector should have all of the equipment
that he may need including personal protective
equipment. The inspection should be conducted
with as little disruption of operators as possible.
The inspector should be permitted to take pictures,
samples, etc.
After the introduction the inspector should examine
the injury/illness/accident records. These will
enable him to pinpoint areas needing attention.
l-S-12
-------
LESSON: Introduction
OSHA does not recommend giving advance notice
for inspections except to assure that the cogni-
zant personnel will be present or to call atten-
tion to an Imminent Danger situation. OSHA's
reasoning is to preclude a hurry-up program of
hazard abatement prior to the inspector's arrival.
The inspector should be accompanied by a repre-
sentative of the official-in-charge of the estab-
lishment and by a representative of the employees.
The inspector should consult with employees dur-
ing the course of the inspection. If an employee
wants to report a hazardous condition, he should
be permitted to do so.
If the inspection is made in response to an em-
ployee report of hazardous conditions the inspec-
tor should, on starting the inspection, proceed
directly to the area where the hazard was report-
ed. After inspecting that area, he should then
inspect the remainder of the facility. Handling
of employee reports will be discussed later.
Imminent Danger is defined as a situation
which is likely to cause a fatality or
other serious injury before ordinary abate-
ment measures can take effect.
In the event of an Imminent Danger situation,
the inspector should warn employees in the area
and management personnel of the danger and assist
in abatement as practicable. He should also
take steps to notify the designated safety and
health official who in turn will notify the
Secretary of Labor.
At the conclusion of the inspection, the inspector
should meet with the official-in-charge or his
representative and the employee representative
and discuss the results of the inspection. He
will advise them informally of any hazardous
conditions that he has found.
Each agency should establish a procedure for
issuing notices of hazardous conditions. The
notice should be posted in the area where the
hazardous conditions exist. It should remain
posted for 3 days. If the condition was found
during an inspection in response to an employee
l-S-13
-------
LESSON: Introduction
report of hazards, then a copy should be sent
to the employee. The notice should specify the
period of abatement.
The official-in-charge of the facility is respon-
sible for initiating the abatement procedures.
The procedures should provide for re-inspection.
The plan for abatement, with a schedule, should
be submitted to the designated safety and health
official, if the abatement period will exceed 30
days. If it will exceed 60 days,the Secretary
of Labor should be notified.
Employee reports of hazardous conditions (1960.31).
The guidelines stress this subject so it will be empha-
sized in this lesson. Steps in using the communications
channel that should be established for this purpose
are listed below.
• Employee identifies a hazardous condition.
• Reports to designated safety and health official
or his designee.
• Report reduced to writing.
• Employee's name withheld if desired.
• Report may be made through the employee
representative.
• Designated safety and health official investigates
within 5 days and, if warranted, causes an inspec-
tion to be made.
• Employee may be interviewed to gather
additional information.
• The results of the inspection should be made known
to the employee.
• If the employee is not satisfied,he should
be notified of his right to contact the
Office of Federal Agency Safety Programs
in the Department of Labor and request
further investigation.
l-S-14
-------
LESSON: Introduction
Subpart E—Agency Occupational Safety arid Health Standards.
The heads of Federal agencies are required to adopt safety
and health standards that are consistent with standards that
the Secretary of Labor adopted for private industry under
Section 6 of the Act. OSHA standards were derived from
several sources. The heads of agencies should consult with
employees or their representatives.
Slide 1-11 states some terms that apply to standards
that should be defined.
SLIDE 1-11: STANDARDS
CONSENSUS STANDARDS
PROPRIETARY STANDARDS
PRE-EXISTING STANDARDS
HORIZONTAL STANDARDS
VERTICAL STANDARDS
«
Consensus standards are standards made up and accepted
by industry generally. Standards issued by the American
National Standards Institute are an example.
Proprietary standards are standards that apply to spe-
cific industries and are accepted by those industries.
Compressed Gas Association documents are examples of
proprietary standards.
Pre-existing standards are standards that were already
a part of government regulations in such programs as
the Walsh-Healy Act, Maritime Act, Construction and
others.
Horizontal standards are standards that apply to var-
ious industries. Fire regulations are a good example.
Vertical standards apply to a single industry. The
OSHA standards for special industries, construction,
shipbuilding, laundries, and others are examples.
Vertical standards contain those horizontal standards
which apply to that particular industry.
OSHA has adopted three principal sets of standards:
29 CFR 1910 - General Industry Standards
29 CFR 1915-1918 - Maritime Standards
29 CFR 1926 - Construction Standards
l-S-15
-------
LESSON: Introduction
29 CFR 1960.41 states the recommended procedures for
adopting standards. The procedures shall include pro-
vision for adopting emergency standards and for obtain-
ing written comments from interested parties x^hen
adopting standards. Interested parties would include
employees from other agencies sharing facilities with
the agency. Safety and health committees may play an
active role in the adoption of standards.
OSHA standards as a rule should be adopted and supple-
mented as necessary to cover items not covered by OSHA
standards. The Secretary of Labor may Lc called on
to assist in this area.
The agency should adopt emergency standards adopted
by the Secretary of Labor until it can be determined
that the standard is not needed by the agency.
Quarterly notices should be sent to the Secretary of
Labor listing standards that have been adopted,
revised or cancelled during the reporting period.
Subpart F—Field Federal Safety and Health Councils.
These councils are to be established at local levels. They
will include representatives of local Federal agencies.
They are a source of assistance to the Federal agencies.
l-S-16
-------
SUMMARY OF THE WILLIAMS-STEIGER ACT
Section 1 cites the Act as the "Occupational Safety and Health Act of
1970."
Section 2 gives Congressional findings and purpose of the Act.
Section 3 gives definitions of terms used in the Act.
Section 4 covers the applicability of the Act.
Section 5 sets forth employer and employee duties and responsibilities.
Section 6 authorizes the Secretary of Labor to issue OSHA standards.
Section 7 establishes a National Advisory Committee on Occupational Safety
and Health.
Section 8 sets forth procedures for inspections, investigations, and
recordkeeping.
Section 9 requires the Secretary of Labor to issue a citation to an employ-
er who has violated a provision of the Act.
Section 10 requires the Secretary of Labor to assign a penalty to an employ-
er who receives a citation.
Section 11 provides for judicial review of adverse rulings by the Commission.
Section 12 establishes the Occupational Safety and Health Review Commission.
Section 13 sets forth the procedures to be followed in cases of imminent
danger.
Section 14 provides for court representation by the Solicitor of Labor in
civil litigation.
Section 15 requires confidential treatment of trade secrets obtained by
OSHA personnel and/or the courts.
Section 16 permits the Secretary of Labor to make exceptions to the Act
in the interests of national defense.
Section 17 sets procedures for assessing penalties.
Section 18 sets the procedures for state participation in carrying out
the requirements of the Act.
1-A-l
-------
Section 19 outlines the responsibilities of Federal agencies under the
Act.
"SEC. 19. (a) It shall be the responsibility of the head
of each Federal agency to establish and maintain an effective
and comprehensive occupational safety and health program which
is consistent with the standards promulgated under section 6.
The head of each agency shall (after consultation with repre-
sentatives of the employees thereof)—
(1) provide safe and healthful places and conditions of
employment, consistent with the standards set under section 6;
(2) acquire, maintain, and require the use of safety
equipment, personal protective equipment, and devices reason-
ably necessary to protect employees;
(3) keep adequate records of all occupational accidents
and illnesses for proper evaluation and necessary corrective
action;
(4) consult with the Secretary with regard to the adequacy
as to form and content of records kept pursuant to subsection
(a)(3) of this section; and
(5) make an annual report to the Secretary with respect
to occupational accidents and injuries and the agency's pro-
gram under this section. Such report shall include any report
submitted under section 7902(e)(2) of title 5, United States
Code.
(b) The Secretary shall report to the President a summary
or digest of reports submitted to him under subsection (a)(5)
of this section, together with his evaluations of and recom-
mendations derived from such reports. The President shall
transmit annually to the Senate and the House of Representatives
a report of the activities of Federal agencies under this
section.
(c) Section 7902(c)(1) of title 5, United States Code, is
amended by inserting after "agencies" the following: "and of
labor organizations representing employees".
(d) The Secretary shall have access to records and reports
kept and filed by Federal agencies pursuant to subsections (a)
(3) and (5) of this section unless those records and reports
are specifically required by Executive order to be kept secret
in the interest of the national defense or foreign policy, in
which case the Secretary shall have access to such information
as will not jeopardize national defense or foreign policy."
Section 20 directs the Secretary of HEW to assist the Secretary of Labor
in research and related activities in the field of occupational
safety and health.
Section 21 provides authority for training Department of Labor and HEW
personnel and for employer-employee education.
Section 22 establishes the National Institute for Occupational Safety
and Health, under the Department of HEW.
l-A-2
-------
Section 23 provides for grants to the states for occupational safety and
health programs.
Section 24 provides for the gathering and analysis of statistics on work
injuries and illnesses. Recordkeeping and reporting methods
are worked out by the Secretaries of Labor and HEW.
Section 25 requires that records of grant expenditures be kept and that
such records be available for audit.
Section 26 requires the Secretary of Labor to make an annual report
to the President for transmittal to Congress on activities
carried out under this Act during the previous fiscal year.
Section 27 provides for the establishment of the Workmen's Compensation
Commission.
Section 28 provides for economic assistance to small businesses in bring-
ing their workplaces into compliance with the Act.
Section 29 through Section 34 provide for additional personnel and funds
to administer the Act, as well as several
miscellaneous items.
l-A-3
-------
PRESIDENTIAL DOCUMENTS
Title 3-"The President
EXECUTIVE ORDER 11807
Occupational Safety and Health Programs for Federal Employees
As the Nation's largest employer, the Federal Government has a special
obligation to set an example for all employers by providing a safe and health-
ful working environment for its employees.
For more than three years, the Federal Government has been seeking to
carry out these solemn responsibilities under the terms of Executive Order
No. 11612, issued in 1971 and based upon the authorities granted by the
landmark Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 as well as section 7902
(c) of title 5, United States Code.
Considerable progress has been achieved under the 1971 executive order,
but it is now clear that even greater efforts are needed. It is therefore
necessary that a new order be issued, reflecting this Nation's firm and
renewed commitment to provide exemplary working conditions for those devoted
to public service.
The provisions of this order are intended to ensure that each agency
head is provided with all the guidance necessary to carry out an effective
occupational safety and health program within the agency. Further, to keep
the President abreast of progress, this order provides for detailed evalu-
ations of the agencies' occupational safety and health programs by the
Secretary of Labor and transmittal of those evaluations, together with
agency comments, to the President. In addition, the Federal Safety Advisory
Council on Occupational Safety and Health is continued because of its demon-
strated value as an advisory body to the Secretary of Labor.
Experience has shown that agency heads desire and need more detailed
guidance from the Secretary of Labor to make their occupational safety and
health programs more effective. This order provides that the Secretary of
Labor shall issue detailed guidelines and provide such further assistance
as the agencies may request.
NOW, THEREFORE, by virture of the authority vested in me by section
7902(c)(l) of title 5 of the United States Code, and as President of the
United States, it is hereby ordered as follows:
SCOPE OF THIS ORDER
Section 1. For the purposes of this order, the term "agency" means an
Executive Department, as defined in 5 U.S.C. 101, or any employing unit or
authority of the Government of the United States not within an Executive
Branch of the Government; and by agreement between the Secretary of Labor
(hereinafter referred to as the Secretary) and the head of an agency of the
Legislative or Judicial Branches of the Government, the provisions of this
1-B-l
-------
order may be made applicable to such agencies. In addition, by agreement
between the Secretary of Labor and the head of any agency, and to the ex-
tent permitted by law, the provisions of this order may be extended to em-
ployees of agencies who are employed in geographic locations to which the
Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 is not applicable.
DUTIES OF HEADS OF AGENCIES
Sec. 2. The head of each agency shall, after consultation with rep-
resentatives of the employees thereof, establish and maintain an occupa-
tional safety and health program meeting the requirements of section 19 of
the Occupational Safety and Health Act (hereinafter referred to as the
act). In order to ensure that agency programs are consistent with the
standards prescribed by section 6 of the act, the head of each agency shall:
(1) Designate or appoint, to be responsible for the management and
administration of the agency occupational safety and health program, an
agency official with sufficient authority to represent effectively the
interest and support of the agency head.
(2) Establish an occupational safety and health management informa-
tion system, which shall include the maintenance of such records of occupa-
tional accidents, injuries, illnesses and their causes, and the compilation
and transmittal of such reports based upon this information, as the Secre-
tary may require pursuant to section 3 of this order.
(3) Establish procedures for the adoption of agency occupational safe-
ty and health standards consistent with the standards promulgated by the
Secretary pursuant to section 6 of the act; assure prompt attention to
reports by employees or others of unsafe or unhealthful working conditions;
assure periodic inspections of agency workplaces by personnel with suffi-
cient technical competence to recognize unsafe and unhealthful working
conditions in such workplaces; and assure prompt abatement of unsafe or
unhealthful working conditions, including those involving facilities and/
or equipment furnished by another Government agency, informing the Secre-
tary of significant difficulties encountered in this regard.
(4) Provide adequate safety and health training for officials at the
different management levels, including supervisory employees, employees
responsible for conducting occupational safety and health inspections, and
other employees. Such training shall include dissemination of information
concerning the operation of the agency occupational safety and health pro-
gram and the means fey which each such person may participate and assist in
the operation of that program.
(5) Submit to the Secretary on an annual basis a report containing
such information as the Secretary shall prescribe.
(6) Cooperate with and assist the Secretary of Labor in the perfor-
mance of his duties under Section 19 of the Act and Section 3 of this order.
(7) Observe the guidelines published by the Secretary pursuant to
section 3 of this order, giving due consideration to the mission, size and
organization of the agency.
l-B-2
-------
DUTIES OF THE SECRETARY OF LABOR
SEC. 3. The Secretary shall provide leadership and guidance to the
heads of agencies to assist them in fulfilling their occupational safety
and health responsibilities by, among other means, taking the following
actions:
(1) Issue detailed guidelines to assist agencies in establishing and
operating effective occupational safety and health programs appropriate to
their individual missions, sizes, and organizations. Such guidelines shall
reflect the requirement of section 19 of the Act for consultation with
employee representatives.
(2) Prescribe recordkeeping and reporting requirements to enable
agencies to assist the Secretary in meeting the requirements imposed upon
him by section 24 of the Act.
(3) Provide such consultation to agencies as the Secretary deems
necessary and appropriate to ensure that agency standards adopted pursuant
to section 2 of this order are consistent with the safety and health stan-
dards adopted by the Secretary pursuant to section 6 of the Act; provide
leadership and guidance to agencies in the adequate occupational safety and
health training of agency personnel; and facilitate the exchange of ideas
and information throughout the Government with respect to matters of occu-
pational safety and health through such arrangements as the Secretary deems
appropriate.
(4) Perform for agencies, where deemed necessary and appropriate, the
following services, upon request and reimbursement for the expenses thereof:
(a) Evaluate agency working conditions, and recommend to the agency head
appropriate standards to be adopted pursuant to section 2 of this order to
ensure that such working conditions are safe and healthful; (b) conduct
inspections to identify unsafe or unhealthful working conditions, and pro-
vide assistance to correct such conditions; (c) train appropriate agency
safety and health personnel.
(5) Evaluate the occupational safety and health programs of agencies,
and submit to the President reports of such evaluations, together with agency
responses thereto. These evaluations shall be conducted at least once annual-
ly for agencies employing more than 1,000 persons within the geographic
locations to which the Act applies, and as the Secretary deems appropriate
for all other agencies, through such headquarters or field reviews as the
Secretary deems necessary.
(6) Submit to the President each year a summary report of the status
of the Federal agency occupational safety and health program, as well as
analyses of individual agency progress and problems in correcting unsafe
and unhealthful working conditions, together with recommendations for
improving their performance.
l-B-3
-------
FEDERAL ADVISORY COUNCIL ON OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH
SEC 4. (a) The Federal Advisory Council on Occupational Safety and
Health, established pursuant to Executive Order No. 11612, .is hereby con-
tinued. It shall advise the Secretary in Carrying out responsibilities
under this order. This Council shall consist of fifteen members appointed
by the Secretary and shall include representatives of Federal agencies and
of labor organizations representing employees. At least five members shall
be representatives of such labor organizations. The members shall serve
for three-year terms with the terms of five members expiring each year,
provided that this Council is renewed every two years in accordance with
the Federal Advisory Committee Act. The members of the Federal Advisory
Council on Occupational Safety and Health established pursuant to
Executive Order No. 11612 shall be deemed to be its initial members under
this order, and their terms shall expire in accordance with the terms of
their appointments.
(b) The Secretary, or a designee, shall serve as the Chairman of the
Council, and shall prescribe such rules for the conduct of its business as
he deems necessary and appropriate.
(c) The Secretary shall make available necessary office space and
furnish the Council necessary equipment, supplies, and staff services, and
shall perform such functions with respect to the Council as may be required
by the Federal Advisory Committee Act.
EFFECT ON OTHER POWERS AND DUTIES
SEC. 5. Nothing in this order shall be construed to impair or alter the
powers and duties of the Secretary or the heads of other Federal agencies
pursuant to section 19 of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970,
sections 7901, 7902, and 7903 of title 5 of the United States Code, or any
other provision of law, nor shall it be construed to alter the provisions
of Executive Order No. 11491, as amended, Executive Order No. 11636, or
other provisions of law providing for collective bargaining agreements and
procedures. Matters of official leave for employee representatives involved
in activities pursuant to this order shall be determined between each agency
and these representatives pursuant to the procedures under Executive Order
No. 11491, as amended, Executive Order No. 11636, or applicable collective
bargaining agreements.
TERMINATION OF EXISTING ORDER
SEC. 6. Executive Order No. 11612 of July 26, 1971, is hereby superseded.
THE WHITE HOUSE
September 28, 1974.
l-B-4
-------
Lesson 2
-------
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
SAFETY MANAGEMENT TRAINING PROGRAM
LESSON:
Recordkeeping, Reporting and
Training Requirements
No. 2 Time: 1-1/2 hours
Objectives! Completion of this lesson will enable the trainee
to fulfill his recordkeeping and reporting respon-
sibilities in regard to occupational safety and
health, as required by Federal and EPA regulations.
Content; This lesson covers the occupational safety and
health recordkeeping and reporting responsibilities
of a supervisor. The following reporting forms are
discussed: SF 92; EPA 1440-7; OSHA Forms 100F,
101F, 102F, and 102FF; CA 1&2, reporting forms
for motor vehicle accidents, boating accidents, air-
craft accidents; EPA forms for reporting unsafe con-
ditions; and additional types of records and training
required by OSHA standards.
Methods:
Lecture, discussion, questions.
References; Environmental Protection Agency, Safety and Health
Manual.
U.S. Department of Labor, Recordkeeping and Report-
ing Guidelines for Federal Agencies.
U.S. Department of Labor, Training Requirements
of the Occupational Safety and Health Standards.
2-S-l
-------
LESSON: Recordkeeping, Reporting and Training Requirements
As a supervisor, you are responsible for several types of
records and reports regarding job-connected accidents and
illnesses. This lesson discusses the reporting forms you
must be familiar with and gives the requirements for their
completion and submission.
SUPERVISOR'S REPORT OF ACCIDENT. SF 92
Standard Form 92, "Supervisor's Report of Accident," must
be completed within 48 hours for all job-connected acci-
dents involving Agency personnel, property, or operations
which result in personal injury, fire, potential claim
against the Government, property damage of $50 or more,
or any incident having the potential to cause death or
serious accident.
EPA Safety Management A sample form SF 92 is given in Figure 3-1 of the EPA
Manual, Safety_ Management Manual. Instructions for completing the
Chap. 3. form are contained on the reverse side of the form itself.
Note that SF 92 is not to be used for reporting motor
vehicle or aircraft accidents. Such incidents are to be
reported on other forms to be discussed later.
Submission of SF 92. The original of the SF 92 must be
forwarded to the Agency Safety and Health Officer as
follows:
For field operations, the supervisor forwards SF 92
directly to the Agency Safety and Health Officer.
Copies must be sent to (1) the Officer in Charge of
the Reporting Unit, (2) the Regional and/or Facility
Safety Officer, and (3) the Agency and Local Tort
Claims Officer.
For Washington Metropolitan Area Headquarters Locations,
the supervisor forwards SF 92 directly to the Agency
Safety and Health Officer. A copy must be sent to the
Agency Tort Claims Officer.
SAFETY OFFICER'S ANALYSIS OF ACCIDENT, EPA 1440-7
Upon receipt of the SF 92 from the supervisor, the Regional
or Facility Safety Officer must complete EPA Form 1440-7,
"Safety Officer's Analysis of Accident."
2-S-2
-------
LESSON: Recordkeeping, Reporting and Training Requirements
Environmental Protec-
tion Agency, Safety
and Health Manual,
Chap. 3.
A sample of the form is given in Figure 1-3-2 of the EPA
Safety and Health Manual. The form must be completed accord-
ing to guidelines contained in "Instructions and Coding for
Safety Officer's Analysis of Accident (EPA Form 1440-7),"
Appendix I-3-A of the EPA Safety and Health Manual.
The original EPA Form 1440-7 must be sent to the Agency
Safety and Health Officer within 10 calendar days of the
accident. One copy must be submitted to the "Officer-in-
Charge of the Reporting Unit," and one copy must be retain-
ed by the Regional or Facility Safety Officer.
EPA Form 1440-7 and instructions for its completion consti-
tute a Safety Management Information System as required
under Executive Order 11807.
OTHER REPORTS REQUIRED OF SUPERVISOR
Submission of SF 92 does not relieve you of the responsi-
bility for other reports required under other regulations.
These may include police reports, motor vehicle accident
reports, boating accident reports, or aircraft accident
reports. These specific types of reports will be discussed
later in this lesson.
Since SF 92 is designed for accident prevention only, your
Agency Safety and Health Officer must be notified of a
job-connected accident requiring immediate reporting as
quickly as. possible by telephone, telotype, or some other
means. The following information should be given:
Name(s) of injured person(s)
Cause of accident
Location and brief circumstances
Name(s) and address(es) of next of kin for a work-
connected fatality
Type and extent of property damage
Present status of situation
Telephone number for obtaining additional information
2-S-3
-------
LESSON: Recordkeeping, Reporting and Training Requirements
OSHA ILLNESS. INJURY, AND ACCIDENT REPORTING FORMS
Recordkeeping and Reporting Requirement
Section 19 of the Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and
Health Act of 1970 and Executive Order 11807 require that
all Federal agencies fulfill certain occupational safety
and health recordkeeping and reporting responsibilities.
The purpose of this program is to produce occupational
safety and health statistics from the Federal sector pro-
gram which are comparable to those from the private sector
and which will be useful to Federal agencies in their
occupational safety and health programs. Therefore, all
Federal agencies, including EPA, are required to use the
forms discussed below for the submission of quarterly and
annual reports.
Environmental Protec-
tion Agency, Safety
and Health Manual.
Chap. 3."'
OSHA Forms No. 102F and 102FF
Under Federal regulations, EPA is required to furnish the
U.S. Department of Labor with a quarterly and annual sum-
mary of all occupational injuries, illnesses, and accidents.
OSHA Forms 102F, "Summary Report of Federal Occupational
Injuries and Illnesses," and Form 102FF, "Summary Report
of Federal Occupational Accidents" must be used for these
reports.
Instructions for completion of OSHA Forms 102F and 102FF
are contained on the forms themselves. Sample forms are
given in Figure 3-3 of the EPA Safety and Health Manual.
Separate OSHA Forms 102F and 102FF are required for civil-
ian personnel and military (non-combat) personnel (i.e.,
PHS Commissioned Corps).
Procedures for Submission of OSHA Forms 102F and 102FF.
OSHA Forms 102F and 102FF will be forwarded by the Agency
Safety and Health Officer to each "Officer in Charge of a
Reporting Unit," via the Reviewing Authority on a quarterly
and calendar year basis.
The "Officer in Charge of a Reporting Unit" completes the
report and sends it back to the Reviewing Authority for
summarization. A final report must be sent to the Agency
Safety and Health Officer from the Reviewing Authority no
later than thirty (30) days after the close of each quarter.
An annual report shall be furnished no later than thirty
(30) days after the close of the calendar year.
2-S-4
-------
LESSON: Recordkeeping, Reporting and Training Requirements
Environmental Protec-
tion Agency, Safety
and Health Manual,
Chap. 3
Par. 5.
Officer-in-Charge of a Reporting Unit. For reporting pur-
poses, the senior official at a geographic location is the
"Officer-in-Charge of a Reporting Unit." In locations
where several separate organizations or programs are housed
in a given geographical location, the senior official in
charge of each organization or program is designated an
"Officer-in-Charge of a Reporting Unit," and his program
within a given geographical location constitutes a sepa-
rate Reporting Unit. Each "Officer-in-Charge of a Reporting
Unit" is responsible for compiling occupational illness,
injury, and accident data from his establishment or program
and forwarding the completed OSHA Forms 102F and 102FF to
the Reviewing Authority.
Reviewing Authorities. For reporting purposes, Assistant
Administrators and Regional Administrators are designated
"Reviewing Authorities." Each Reviewing Authority is
responsible for receiving all OSHA Forms 102F and 102FF
from his "Officer(s)-in-Charge of a Reporting Unit," combin-
ing the information contained on these forms into two sum-
marized OSHA Forms 102F and 102FF encompassing civilian and
military (non-combat) personnel, and forwarding the two
forms to the Agency Safety Management Officer on a quarterly
and annual basis.
OSHA Form 101F is not required by EPA. Forms SF 92 and
li|i|.0-7 are used in their place. OSHA Form 100F ijs required to
be maintained at the Reporting Unit as a Log of Federal
Occupational Injuries and Illnesses.
FEDERAL EMPLOYEE'S NOTICE OF INJURY OR OCCUPATIONAL DISEASE-
FORM CA-1&2
Whenever a work-related injury (including occupational dis-
ease) occurs, the injured employee or someone acting in his
behalf should complete Form CA-1&2. This form, along with
others, is required to determine an employee's eligibility
for disability benefits under the Federal Employee's Compen-
sation Act.
Your duties as a supervisor are as follows:
After the employee has completed items 1-16 and
submitted the form to you, sign the "Receipt of
Notice of Injury," tear off the page, and give
it to the employee.
You are responsible for obtaining the statement
of witnesses (items 17-19).
As the employee's immediate supervisor, you are
responsible for filling out the back of the form
(items 20-45).
2-S-5
-------
LESSON: Recordkeeping, Reporting, Training Requirements
The form then should be sent immediately to the
Bureau of Employee's Compensation if it appears
that the injury may result in disability or
medical payments. If it appears unlikely that
any payments will be required, the form should
be filed in the employee's official personnel
file.
MOTOR VEHICLE ACCIDENT REPORTING
Environmental Protec- The reports required in the event of an accident involving
tion Agency, Handbook, a motor vehicle on official business are covered in detail
Motor Vehicle in Lesson 5 of this training course. Briefly, these are
Operations. as follows:
SF 91 —Operator's Report of Motor Vehicle Accident
SF 91A—Investigation Report of Motor Vehicle Accident
SF 94 —Statement of Witness
BOATING ACCIDENT REPORTS
Form CG-3865. The operator of a boat must submit a written
report to the Coast Guard on Form CG-3865 in the event of
a boating accident resulting in any of the following:
Death, serious injury, or incapacitation
of over 72 hours.
Property damage in excess of $100.
2-S-6
-------
LESSON: Recordkeeping, Reporting, Training Requirements
Reports in case of death must be submitted within 48 hours;
reports in other cases are required within five days.
The report is submitted to the QIC, Marine Inspection Office,
U.S. Coast Guard, nearest the place of accident or nearest
the port of first arrival after accident. A copy must be
submitted to the Agency Safety and Health Officer.
AIRCRAFT ACCIDENT REPORTS
Form NTSB 612_0.1,. The pilot/operator of an aircraft must
submit a report of a general aviation aircraft accident on
National Traffic Safety Board Form NTSB 6120.1 when any of the
following occurs as a result of the operation of an aircraft:
Any person is fatally or seriously injured.
Any aircraft receives substantial damage.
Aircraft collide in flight.
An overdue aircraft is still missing after
seven days.
The report must be submitted within 10 days of the accident,
to the National Traffic Safety Board with a copy to the Agency
Safety and Health Officer.
POLICE REPORTS
In most instances of accidents involving motor vehicles,
boats, or aircraft, the local or state police will come to
the scene and make a report. Copies of police reports should
be obtained, if possible, and forwarded along with other
required reports. You should check local and state police
regulations to see if you need to make reports to local or
state authorities.
EPA FORMS FOR REPORTING UNSAFE CONDITIONS
The EPA Safety and Health Program has made provisions for employee
recommendations regarding safe working conditions. The
following forms may be used to report unsafe items or
conditions:
EPA Form 1440-5. This form is a postcard used to identify
troublesome property failure, damage, or a "near-miss" injury.
It is used for an occurrence not required to be reported as
an accident on SF-92.
EPA .Form 1440-6— "Report of Unsafe or Unhealthful Condition". This
form may be used by an employee to report a condition or
item he believes to be hazardous. To the Designated Agency
Safety and Health Official or his designee.
2-S-7
-------
LESSON: Recordkeeping, Reporting, Training Requirements
29 CFR 1910—Occupa-
tional Safety ancl
Health Standards.
1910.96(b)(2)
1910.96(1)
1910.96(m)
1910.96(n)
1910.96(o)
1910.96(r)(3,4)
1910.132(e)(2)
1910.132(f)(2)(iv)
ADDITIONAL RECORDS REQUIRED BY OSHA STANDARDS
The OSHA standards require that employers keep certain
records of inspections and tests. Those with specific
application to operations within an EPA facility are as
follows:
Ionizing Radiation
OSHA standards state that an individual may not receive doses
of radiation greater than the 3 rema per quarter. The employ-
er must maintain adequate past and current exposure records
to insure total accumulation does not exceed 5(H-18) rems,
where H is the age of the individual at his last birthday.
An employer shall notify the Assistant Secretary of Labor
immediately in the event of exposure of any individual to
25 rems or more, release of radioactive material 5,000 times
the limit specified by 10 CFR Part 20, loss of one working
week, or property damage in excess of $100,000.
Such notification shall be within 24 hours in the event of
exposure of any individual to 5 rems. or more, loss of one
working day to the plant, or property damage in excess of
$10,000.
An employer shall report within 30 days to the Assistant
Secretary of Labor each exposure to radiation in excess of
the applicable limit and shall furnish the individual written
notice of the nature and extent of the exposure.
An employer shall maintain records of radiation exposure of
all employees for whom personnel monitoring is required, and
shall advise each employee of his individual exposure at
least on an annual basis.
An employer shall furnish a report of a former employee's
exposure within 30 days of receiving a request from the
individual.
For uranium mines, records of environmental concentrations
and of time spent in each area by each person shall be
maintained and made available to the Assistant Secretary
of Labor and to each individual employee.
Respiratory Protection
Each respirator permanently assigned to an individual shall
be marked to indicate to whom it was assigned, and the date
of issuance should be recorded.
A record shall be kept of inspection dates and findings for
respirators maintained for emergency use.
2-S-8
-------
LESSON: Recordkeeping, Reporting, Training Requirements
1910.157(d)(3)(iv)
Fire Extinguishers
Portable fire extinguishers. Each fire extinguisher shall
have a durable tag securely attached to show the mainte-
nance and recharge date, with signature and/or initials.
When fire extinguishers are required to be subjected to
hydrostatic tests, the test date shall be recorded on a
record tag of metal or equally durable material, along
with the test pressure and name or initials of the person
1910.157(d)(4)(viii) or agency making the test.
1910.160(c)
Fixed dry chemical extinguishing systems. Fixed dry chemi-
cal extinguishing systems shall be inspected at least annu-
ally; the inspector's report, with recommendations, shall
be filed with the owner.
1910.180(d)(6)
1910.180(g)(l)
1910.180(g)(2)
Materials Handling
Cranes used for materials handling require certain inspec-
tions. Records must be kept of these inspections. As an
example, the inspection and reporting requirement for crawl-
er locomotive and truck cranes are given below. You should
make similar records of the results of inspections of other
equipment.
Crawler locomotive and truck cranes. Written, dated, and
signed inspection reports and records sha31 be made monthly
on critical items in use such as brakes, crane hooks, and
ropes. Records shall be kept readily available.
A thorough inspection of all ropes shall be made at least
once a month and a full written, dated, and signed report
of rope condition kept on file where readily available to
appointed personnel.
All rope which has been idle for one month or more shall
be inspected before it is placed in service. A written
and dated report of rope condition shall be available for
inspection.
1910.252(c)(6)
Welding, Cutting and Brazing
Periodic inspections of resistance welding equipment shall
be made and records of the same maintained.
2-S-9
-------
LESSON: Recordkeeping, Reporting, Training Requirements
1926.803(b)
1926.803(b)
1926.803(d)
1926.803(g)
Tunnels, Shafts, Caissons, Cofferdams, Compressed Air
Compressed air. No employee shall be permitted to enter
a compressed air environment until he has been examined by
a physician and found physically qualified to engage in such
work. An employee must be reexamined at least once per
year. The physician shall keep a complete and full record
of examinations made by him. The physician shall also keep
an accurate record of any decompression illness or other
illness or injury incapacitating any employee for work, and
of all loss of life that occurs in the operation of a tun-
nel, caisson or other compartment in which compressed air
is used. Records shall be available for inspection and a
copy thereof shall be forwarded to the Department of
Labor (OSHA) within 48 hours following the occurrence of an
accident, death, injury, or decompression illness that
occurs in the operation of a tunnel, caisson or other
compartment where compressed air is used.
Identification badges shall be issued to all employees,
indicating that the wearer is a compressed air worker. A
permanent record shall be kept of all identification badges
issued.
For each 8-hour shift, a record of employees employed under
air pressure shall be kept by an employee who shall remain
outside the lock near the entrance.
A clock, thermometer, and continuous recording pressure
gauge with a 4-hour graph shall be installed outside of each
man lock and shall be changed prior to each shift's decom-
pression. The chart shall be of sufficient size to register
a legible record of variations in pressure within the man
lock and shall be visible to the lock attendant. A copy of
each graph shall be submitted to the appointed physician
after each shift.
U.S. Dept. of Labor,
Training Requirements
of the Occupational
Safety and Health
Standards.
TRAINING REQUIREMENTS OF THE OSHA STANDARDS
Certain of the OSHA standards require that employers pro-
vide training for their employees. The training should be
based on the actual and potential hazards the employee en-
counters on the job and emphasize the equipment and prac-
tices the employee should use to minimize the risk of
injuring himself or another employee.
The publication, "Training Requirements of the Occupational
Safety and Health Standards," identifies those standards
which require employee training. Examples which apply
specifically to EPA facilities are as follows:
2-S-10
-------
LESSON: Recordkeeping, Reporting, Training Requirements
1910.134(a)(3)
1910.134(b)(l,2,3)
1910.134(e)(2)
Respiratory Protection
The employee shall use the provided respiratory protection
in accordance with instructions and training received.
Requirements for a minimal acceptable program. Written
standard operating procedures governing the selection and
use of respirators shall be established. Respirators shall
be selected on the basis of hazards to which the worker is
exposed. The user shall be instructed and trained in the
proper use of respirators and their limitations.
The correct respirator shall be specified for each job.
The respirator type is usually specified in the work pro-
cedures by a qualified individual supervising the respira-
tory protective program. The individual issuing them shall
be adequately instructed to insure that the correct respi-
rator is issued.
1910.134(e)(3)
1910.134(e)(5)
1910.134(e)(5)(i)
Written procedures shall be prepared covering safe use of
respirators in dangerous atmospheres that might be encounter-
ed in normal operations or in emergencies. Personnel shall
be familiar with these procedures and the available respi-
rators.
For safe use of any respirator, it is essential that the
user be properly instructed in its selection, use, and
maintenance. Both supervisors and workers shall be so
instructed by competent persons. Training shall provide
the men an opportunity to handle the respirator, have it
fitted properly, test its face-piece-to-face seal, wear it
in normal air for a long familiarity period, and finally,
to wear it in a test atmosphere.
Every respirator wearer shall receive fitting instructions
including demonstrations and practice in how to adjust it,
and how to determine if it fits properly. To assure proper
protection, the facepiece fit shall be checked by the wearer
each time he puts on the respirator. This may be done by
following the manufacturer's facepiece fitting instructions.
Accident Prevention Signs and Tags
All employees shall be instructed that danger signs indicate
immediate danger and that special precautions are necessary.
All employees shall be instructed that caution signs indi-
cate a possible hazard against which proper precaution should
be taken.
2-S-ll
-------
LESSON: Recordkeeping, Reporting, Training Requirements
1910.145(c)(3)
Safety instruction signs shall be used where there is a need
for general instructions and suggestions relative to safety
measures.
Welding, Cutting, and Brazing
1910.252(b)(1)(iii) Instruction. Workmen designated to operate arc welding
equipment shall have been properly instructed and qualified
to operate such equipment as specified in subparagraph (4)
of this paragraph.
1910.252(c)(1)(iii) Personnel. Workmen designated to operate resistance weld-
ing equipment shall have been properly instructed and judged
competent to operate such equipment.
1910.252(c)(6)
1910.252(d)(2)(xiii)
(c)
Maintenance. Periodic inspection shall be made by qualified
maintenance personnel, and records of the same maintained.
The operator shall be instructed to report any equipment
defects to his supervisor, and the use of equipment shall
be discontinued until safety repairs have been completed.
Insist that cutters or welders and their supervisors are
suitably trained in the safe operation of their equipment
and the safe use of the process.
1926.800(e)(l)(xii)
Tunnels and Shafts
At tunnel operations employing 25 or more employees at one
time underground at least two rescue crews (10 employees di-
vided between shifts) shall be trained annually in rescue
procedures, in the use, care, and limitations of oxygen
breathing apparatus, and the use and maintenance of fire-
fighting equipment. Not less than one crew (5 employees)
shall be trained at smaller operations.
1926.803(a)(2)
1926.803(b)(10)(xii)
1926.803(e)(l)
Compressed Air
Every employee shall be instructed in the rules and regu-
lations which concern his safety or the safety of others.
Be in constant charge of an attendant under direct control
of the retained physician. The attendant shall be trained
in the use of the lock and suitably instructed regarding
steps to be taken in the treatment of employees exhibiting
symptoms compatible with a diagnosis of decompression
illness.
Every employee going under air pressure for the first time
shall be instructed on how to avoid excessive discomfort.
2-S-12
-------
LESSON: Recordkeeping, Reporting and Training Requirements
QUESTIONS
1. As a supervisor, you are responsible for submitting SF 92. To whom
do you submit it?
2. When must SF 92 be submitted?
3. What is the purpose of EPA Form 1440-7?
4. What must you do after the occurrence of a serious job-connected
accident?
5. What is the purpose of OSHA Forms 102F and 102FF?
6. What is the purpose of Forms CA-1&2?
2-S-13
-------
Lesson 3
-------
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
SAFETY MANAGEMENT TRAINING PROGRAM
LESSON: Safety Programming
No. 3
Time: 1-1/2 hours
Objective; Completion of this lesson will enable the trainee to carry out
his administrative responsibilities in the EPA Safety and
Health Program.
Content; This lesson covers EPA policy for carrying out an Agency safety
and health program. It covers the responsibilities of the
Agency, the Assistant Administrators, Regional Administrators,
and Officers in Charge of Reporting Units. The majority of
the content for this lesson is taken from the new draft of
the EPA Safety and Health Manual.
Methods; Lecture, discussion.
References; 29 CFR 1960—Safety and Health Provisions for Federal Employees
EPA Safety and Health Manual
Materials; Slide projector (35mm) and screen.
Slides: 3-1 through 3-6.
3-S-l
-------
LESSON: Safety Programming
INTRODUCTION
EPA POLICY
SAFETY PROGRAM
OBJECTIVES
Responsibilities for
Carrying Out the
Program
This lesson will enable the trainees to establish and carry
out a safety program in their areas of responsibility that
is in accordance with 29 CFR 1960 and the Environmental Pro-
tection Agency (EPA) directives contained in the Safety
and Health Manual. In the introductory lesson to this course
the detailed requirements of the Act, Executive Order 11807
and 29 CFR 1960 were presented. This lesson will cover the
regulations that EPA has promulgated for implementing these
requirements.
Staff of the Environmental Protection Agency will carry on
their operations in a manner that assures adequate physical
protection for employees and all persons having occasion to
be at EPA facilities. Every manager, supervisor and employee
is responsible for identifying risks, hazards, or unsafe
situations or practices and for taking steps to assure ade-
quate safety in the activities under his supervision or in
which he participates.
The objective of the safety and health program is to provide
safe and healthful working conditions for all of its employees
through
• Control of causes of injuries and occupational
illnesses
• Control of damage to property
• Protection of Agency programs
• Maintenance of adequate data for corrective action.
Responsibilities for carrying out the EPA Safety and Health
Program are given in the following slides.
SLIDE 3-1: MANAGEMENT AND AUDIT RESPONSIBILITIES
ADMINISTRATOR
* ASSISTANT ADMINISTRATOR
FOR PLANNING AND
MANAGEMENT
** CHIEF, OCCUPATIONAL
SAFETY AMD HEALTH STAFF
Program Establishment
and Maintenance
Program Development and
Conduct
Approval of Policy, Stan-
dards and Regulations
Program Management,
Direction and Audit
Development of policy,
Standards and Regulation
* Designated Safety and Health Official.
** Designated Agency Safety and Health Officer.
3-S-2
-------
LESSON: Safety Programming
SLIDE 3-2: IMPLEMENTATION RESPONSIBILITIES
Executive Officer Program implementation
Office of the Administrator within the Administrator's
Office
Regional and Assistant Program implementation
Administrators through the supervisors
within their areas of
responsibility.
Note that the safety and health program management
and audit functions are STAFF.
Implementation functions are LINE.
Safety Inspections The Safety arid Health Manual requires that a safety inspection
be conducted at least a year at every facility. It
will cover operations, structures, grounds, machinery and
equipment.
The safety inspection is defined as an in-depth evaluation
of every aspect of the facility, 'it is to be aimed at:
• assessing the effectiveness of the safety
management program
• identifying hazards and recommending corrective
actions
• determining the adequacy of safety standards
• assuring compliance with appropriate safety
laws, codes and regulations.
29 CFR 1960.26(a) The survey shall be conducted by a person qualified
in accordance with 29 CFR 1960.26(a).The inspector
shall have sufficient technical competence to recog-
nize unsafe or unhealthful conditions in the facility
to be inspected.
If there is a decided risk of accident, illness
or injury in the facility the inspector should
be one of the following:
• Safety Manager/Specialist GS-018
• Safety Engineer GS-803
• Fire Protection Engineer GS-804
3-S-3
-------
LESSON: Safety Programming
• Industrial Hygienist GS-690
• Fire Protection Specialist/Marshal GS-081
• Health Physicist GS-1306
Local Safety The above material covers what the Agency will be responsible
Organization for in carrying out the Safety and Health Program. As stated
earlier, however, the Assistant Administrators and the
Regional Administrators will carry out the program through
supervisors at the various EPA facilities. In this way the
Agency places the Safety and Health Program on the same level
as all other programs. Safety and health of employees are
considered to be as important facets of a supervisor's respon-
sibility as adherence to schedules, keeping within the budget
and producing quality work. This means that safety and
health regulations should be integrated into and made a part
of operating procedures and instructions.
An Officer in Charge of a Reporting Unit may
designate an Official as a Regional or Facility Safety
Officer to assist him in carrying out the implementation
of his Safety and Health responsibilities.
• In addition,the local safety and health functions
are carried out, again through the Officer in
charge of the Reporting Unit, by a committee. The Com-
mittee shall be composed of management and employee
representatives.
Regardless of the composition of the local organization,
its functions are the same, i.e. to advise the Officer
in charge of the Reporting Unit as to the
status of the safety and health program and to make recom-
mendations for improvement. Specific items that should
be covered are:
• Status of compliance to Agency Safety and health
directives.
• Hazards that exist or are alleged to exist within
the facility.
These hazards may have been brought to light by
supervisors on a walk-through, an employee re-
port, a new standard that outlawed a condition
that was previously considered satisfactory, or
the use of a new substance, machine or process.
3-S-4
-------
LESSON: Safety Programming
• Progress in abating hazards that were already
brought to the attention of the Officer IB. Charge*
• Recommendations for improving marginal safety
and health conditions.
• Reports of accidents, injuries and illnesses and
recommendations for precluding a recurrence.
• Organization and conduct of accident investigations.
• The results of job hazard analyses.
• Safety and health considerations that should be
included in the specifications for new facilities
and equipment.
• Changes in safety and health policy directives
from EPA or other authority.
Job Hazard Analysis One of the more effective tools for keeping the workplace
in compliance with safety and health standards is the ,1ob
hazard analysis. It is particularly important that the super-
visor be able to make up a job hazard analysis for his area
of responsibility. Since he should be the person with the
most complete knowledge of the area, the equipment therein,
and the operations that are carried on, it is only logical
that he should make the study upon which safety requirements
will be based. There are four steps to developing a job
hazard analysis. Slide 3-3 lists those steps.
SLIDE 3-3: JOB HAZARD ANALYSIS
MAKE 4 DETERMINATIONS:
t TASKS THAT MAKE UP THE JOB
t MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT USED
t HAZARDS FROM TASKS, MATERIAL
AND EQUIPMENT
t MEANS OF ABATING HAZARDS
Determine the tasks that are performed in doing the job,
Determine the material and equipment that is used in
performing each task.
Determine the hazards that are involved in doing the
tasks,including hazards that may be created by the
materials and/or equipment.
3-S-5
-------
LESSON: Safety Programming
Determine the means of abatement of the hazards. This
will be covered in more detail later.
One output of the analysis is a checklist that can be very
effective as a guide for the supervisor in conducting
inspections in his areas of responsibility.
Example As an example, suppose that one of the jobs in a laboratory
requires you to analyze a sample of material that was col-
lected in the field. The job hazard analysis would look
like this.
Determination of Tasks:
The analysis will involve the use of flammable liquids.
Mixtures will be heated and toxic vapors are given off
in the process. After the sample is analyzed the resi-
due (liquids) will be disposed of.
Materials and Equipment:
Flammable liquids, toxic vapors, hot mixtures and equip-
ment, heating equipment (we will be using natural gas
that is piped into the laboratory from a cylinder out-
side the building), glassware, stands, burners and other
laboratory apparatus.
Hazards:
Fire and respiratory hazards, heat, explosion, cuts.
Abatement measures that will take care of the above
hazards would include the following:
• Good housekeeping - Get rid of all unnecessary
paper, scraps, etc. This will remove fire hazards
as well as tripping hazards and give the operator
more room in which to do his job. Exits and
passageways should be clear of debris and stored
material.
• Fire control - Have fire extinguishing equipment
available and in the right place. The extinguisher
near the flammable liquid storage must be one suit-
able for use on flammable liquids (Class B). If
there are paper boxes, files, etc. in the room,
you should also have a liquid or foam extinguisher
(Class A) near that area. If there is much elec-
trical equipment in the laboratory, the extinguishers
should be of the gas or dry chemical type (Class C).
3-S-6
-------
LESSON: Safety Programming
The extinguishers should be located near the
hazard against which they are most effective,
i.e., the Class B should be mounted near the
flammable liquid storage, the Class C near the
electrical panel or equipment, etc.
Control of toxics - Heating of the mixtures that
give off toxic vapors must be done in a hood that
is properly ventilated. The operator should be
cautioned to check that the ventilation system
is turned on and he should make a rough check to
see that the hood is actually exhausting air.
The system may have a gauge or, by partially
closing the hood opening, air movement should be
detectable without an instrument. A respirator
may be needed for emergency use. The employees
should also be protected from ingestion of toxics.
Therefore, rules against smoking, eating, drink-
ing, and storing food in the lab should be posted
and enforced. Employees should be cautioned to
wash their hands thoroughly after handling toxic
substances and before eating or smoking.
Protection from heat - In the above case the heat
hazard will probably result in nothing more
serious than a burn from a hot surface. Suitable
gloves should be provided and employees trained
to use them when handling hot objects. It is
pretty obvious that an employee's reaction to a
burned finger in this case will cause him to spill
the flammable liquid or cause toxic vapors to
escape. This could turn a slight accident into
a catastrophe.
Explosions - The facility should have a routine
for checking gas piping systems that were not in-
stalled during the construction or modification of
the building. Leaks develop in these systems and,
if not corrected, may result in an explosion.
Cylinders stored outside must be barricaded to
keep them from being struck by vehicles. They
must also be protected from sunlight and other
heat sources. The operating instructions should
include directions to turn off certain valves in
the system to, insofar as practicable, isolate the
gas under high pressure from interior spaces when
the system is not in use. Safety devices should
be installed in the system to prevent excess pres-
sure. Similarly, flammable vapor from a spill or
ventilation system failure can cause the atmosphere
to be an explosive one. Instructions should state
that if either of these situations arise, get rid
of any sources of ignition. Particularly stop
electrical equipment.
3-S-7
-------
LESSON: Safety Programming
• Cuts - Despite all precautions there will be slip-
ups that will result in breakage—probably glass.
Employees should be instructed to use gloves in
picking it up. Also, a dust pan and broom or fox
tail should be handy. If these are immediately
available, the employee will clean up the mess
safely. Otherwise, he will attempt to do it with
bare hands and probably cut himself.
The above is a somewhat over-simplified job hazard
analysis, but it does illustrate steps that must be
taken in making up the analysis.
A job hazard analysis would be performed when the safety
and health program is established and whenever any new
process, equipment or materials are introduced. Acci-
dent, illness and injury records should be reviewed
periodically with a view to improving abatement measures
in areas where accidents, injuries and illnesses are
above the facility average. If the supervisor will
carry out the above analysis and use the results when
conducting periodic walk-through safety and health
inspections, his area of responsibility will be in good
shape when the Agency makes the annual survey.
Hazard Abatement Hazard abatement is the changing of a hazardous situation
into a non-hazardous one. In some cases the supervisor will
need to go to higher authority to abate a hazard in his area.
These abatements may require modification of facilities,
additional personal protective equipment or other changes
beyond his ability or authority to accomplish. There are
some abatements, however, that the supervisor can carry out
on his own. These include: good housekeeping, tagging
machines that are out of order and removing them from ser-
vice, and enforcing safety and health work rules. There are
four ways in which hazards should be abated. They are listed
here in Slide 3-4 in order of priority:
SLIDE 3-4: ABATEMENT METHODS
• SUBSTITUTION OR ELIMINATION
t ENGINEERING CONTROLS
t ADMINISTRATIVE CONTROLS
• PERSONAL PROTECTION
Substitution or Elimination - The process, material or
machine that is creating the hazard can be eliminated
or a substitute that does not create a hazard used instead.
3-S-8
-------
LESSON: Safety Programming
If you substitute a non-toxic or non-flammable clean-
ing solvent in place of a toxic or flammable one, you
are using this abatement method. In the laboratory
example we used earlier, you might have the natural
gas piped into the building in a permanently installed
system rather than through a temporary or portable
arrangement (this is probably beyond the supervisor's
authority, however).
Engineering Controls - Engineering controls are an-
other method of abating hazards. In the above case,
if you cannot find a suitable non-toxic or non-flammable
solvent to substitute, then do the cleaning operations
under a hood with the exhaust ventilation system func-
tioning. The toxic or flammable vapors will be carried
away. The enclosure of the point of operation of a
machine tool or other form of guard is an example of
an engineering control.
Administrative Controls - The third method of abate-
ment is to apply administrative controls. An example
would be to regulate the time that people are exposed
to certain hazards such as noise. There are tables
in the standards that show how many hours per day a
person can be regularly exposed to a certain noise
level without impairment of hearing. Therefore, you
would establish a rule that no one remain in the noisy
area for more than whatever the standard allows. The
"NO SMOKING" rule in the laboratory is another ad-
ministrative control. These rules must be enforced.
Personal Protective Equipment - This method of abate-
ment should always be used if control of the hazard
is not feasible or adequate when the first three con-
trols have been established. Personal protective
equipment must be used in emergency situations and as
a normal precautionary measure associated with certain
operations. For example, in areas where materials
are handled at shoulder height or higher, hard hats
are required. The standards on materials handling
cover these operations and should prevent objects from
falling and striking the employees. The hard hats are
required to allow for the failure of one of the other
safety precautions.
Facility Self- EPA requires that its facilities prepare Facility Self-
Prbtectibri Plans Protection Plans.
3-S-9
-------
LESSON: Safety Programming
EPA identifies two classes of facilities.
• Class A in which EPA is the major or sole Federal
tenant.
• Class B in which EPA is the minor Federal tenant.
Responsibilities for
Development
There are two parts to the self-protection plan:
• A building evacuation plan which provides written
procedures for the protection of life and property
during all types of emergencies.
• An organization of employees in a building who have
been designated to implement the plan.
Officers in charge of reporting units are responsible for
the development and implementation of the plans in Class
A facilities and for assuring cooperation with the major
tenant(s) in the development and implementation of such a
plan in Class B facilities.
Basic Elements of
the Plan
The Agency Safey and Health Officer will provide tech-
nical advice and assistance and monitors the imple-
mentation of plans in the Metropolitan Washington area.
The Facility Self-Protection Plan will consist of the fol-
lowing elements shown on Slide 3-5:
SLIDE 3-5: PLAN ELEMENTS
NAMES, DUTIES, AND STATIONS OF STAFF MEMBERS
FLOOR PLAN WITH EXITS
WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS FOR EMERGENCIES
NOTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS
LIST OF PHYSICALLY HANDICAPPED
EQUIPMENT PROTECTION AND SECURITY
EMERGENCY INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE OFFICIAL IN CHARGE
MEETING AND DRILL SCHEDULES
A list of the Plan's staff members include
• Name of the building warden.
• Duties and emergency duty station of each
member.
A floor plan of the area,with the exits and exit routes
clearly indicated must be provided.
3-S-10
-------
LESSON: Safety Programming
Written instructions to all employees tell what to do
in case of fire, explosion, bomb threat, or other
emergency.
Written procedures(to be used in case of a planned
drill or emergency evacuation) tell how to notify:
• Fire Department
• General Services Administration Field Office
• Police and local officials
• Designated EPA officials
A roster of all physically handicapped persons and
their locations must be on hand.
Written procedures for the protection and security of
equipment during drills and emergencies must be available.
Written emergency instructions are given to the official in
charge of the facility, his alternate and his designee.
A schedule of general meetings to be held and planned
evacuation drills must be prepared.
Personal Protective EPA will provide personal protective equipment where it is
Equipment required because of the presence in the environment of chemi-
cal, biological, or radiological hazards which could cause
inj ury.
• The equipment will be maintained in a sanitary and
reliable condition and used where necessary to protect
employees from illness or injury.
• Supervisors will assure that the personal protective
equipment is used in accordance with EPA and OSHA
standards.
• The 29 CFR 1910 standard, Subpart I specifies the types
of equipment to use and its care and maintenance. Slide
3-6 shows the general type of protection required in
typical areas.
3-S-ll
-------
LESSON: Safety Programming
Safety and Health
Program Activities
SLIDE 3-6:
TYPE
EYE & FACE
RESPIRATORY
HARD HATS
LIFEBELTS
LAB COATS
SAFETY-TOE SHOES
ELECTRICAL PROTECTION
RADIATION FILM BADGES
RUBBER APRONS
EAR PROTECTION
GLOVES
PERSONAL PROTECTION
TYPICAL USE
Laboratory, Welding,
Grinding
Toxics/Oxygen Deficiency
Materials Handled Above
Shoulder Height
Stack Sampling,
Construction
Laboratory
Materials Handling
Electrician Duties
In Radiation Areas
Handling Chemicals
High Noise Areas
Sharp tools, Animals,
Materials Handling
Safety and Health Program Activities — The Occupational
Safety and Health Act requires the head of each agency to
make an annual report to the Secretary of Labor on the
agency's safety and health program. EPA will obtain data
for the report from Oiffleers in Charge of Reporting Units.
Pursuant to the above, each Officer in Charge of a
Reporting Unit will submit, by 30 January of each
year, a comprehensive narrative Safety and Health
Report for the previous calendar year. It will
include the following:
• A summary of program activities and promotional
materials that have been obtained and distributed
in support of Agency safety goals.
• Accident, injury and illness summaries (this was
covered in Lesson 2).
• OSHA Standards compliance
3-S-12
-------
LESSON: Safety Programming
• EPA Standards compliance
• In-house safety surveys conducted
• Safety conferences held
• Safety communications
• New program development
The above report will be submitted to the Agency Safety
Management Officer with a copy to the Reviewing
Authority.
Promotional Responsibilities for conducting Promotional Activities are
Activities as follows:
• Overall responsibility for assuring that an active
and innovative safety and health promotional pro-
gram is being conducted in reporting units rests
with the Assistant and Regional Administrators.
The Executive Officer is responsible within the
Office of the Administrator.
• The forwarding of material pertaining to Government-
wide promotional programs sponsored by the OSHA
Office of Federal Agency Safety Programs is the
responsibility of the agency safety management
officer. Implementation action is the responsi-
bility of the Officer in Charge of the Reporting
Unit.
• Provision of safety and health promotional program
advice and assistance, assessment of the effective-
ness of the program through field visits and com-
prehensive program evaluations is the responsibility
of the Occupational Safety and Health Staff.
• Officers in Charge of Reporting Units are encouraged
to make use of safety program promotional items that
are available for purchase through a number of
government and industry establishments.
3-S-13
-------
Lesson 4
-------
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
SAFETY MANAGEMENT TRAINING PROGRAM
LESSON: Standards Overview No. 4 Time: 2 hours
Objectives: This lesson will enable trainees to identify workplace
safety and health hazards and the OSHA standards that
have been promulgated for their elimination and control.
Content; This lesson deals with the OSHA standards as they apply
to specific workplace safety and health hazards. Empha-
sis is placed on the types of hazards found in occupational
environments, the injuries and illnesses associated with
those hazards, and the relevant OSHA standards for their
control and/or elimination.
Methods: Lecture, discussion.
References; 29 CFR 1910—Occupational Safety and Health Standards.
10 CFR Part 20—Atomic Energy Commission Standards.
(Now called the "Nuclear Regulatory Commission")
National Electrical Contractors Association, National
Electrical Code.
4-S-l
-------
LESSON: Standards Overview
INTRODUCTION
The 29 CFR 1910 OSHA standards are divided into subsections
that contain regulations for preventing various accidents
and illnesses caused by workplace hazards. For example,
Subpart D of the standards deals with walking and working
surfaces. The regulations found therein help prevent
injuries from falls. Subpart I (Personal Protective Equip-
ment) covers requirements for personal protection against
skin, organic, and respiratory damage. Subpart J (Environ-
ment Controls) covers requirements for protection against
infectious disease. Although the standards themselves are
too numerous to remember in detail, the injuries and ill-
nesses caused by workplace hazards and how the standards
help in preventing each are not difficult to understand.
Basically, there are two types of workplace hazards; safety
hazards and health hazards. Safety hazards are those which
can cause bodily injury, such as a fall, an electric shock,
or a cut. Health hazards are those which can cause illness
or biologic damage, such as exposure to carcinogenic chemi-
cals, to ionizing radiation, or to air contaminants. Both
types of hazards are equally serious.
Danger arises when some hazards are considered to be of
relatively minor importance. For example, some people con-
sider that the precautions taken to guard machinery are too
elaborate. They presume that if an employee is skilled
enough to be working on an intricate machine, then he is
skilled enough to keep his fingers and arms out of the
danger zone(s). Statistics show, however, that reliance
upon human skill and awareness is not always adequate. The
number of accidents caused by unguarded machinery far sur-
passes the number caused by machines that are adequately
guarded. People are fallible, vulnerable to stress and
environmental conditions. Any worker, no matter how skilled,
may be distracted, startled, not feeling well, or in some
other way inattentive to the work at hand which could make
him the cause or victim of an accident.
In general, the OSHA standards cover protection against:
Safety Hazards
Electric shock
Burns
Falls
Cuts, bruises, pinches, crushes
4-S-2
\
-------
LESSON: Standards Overview
Health Hazards
Skin disease
Infectious disease
Respiratory damage
Sensory damage
Effects of ionizing radiation exposure
All of these hazards can be controlled by one or more of
the following means:
(1) Elimination of the hazard by substituting a less
hazardous material or process; by isolating the hazard
so that employees are not exposed to it; or by removing
the hazard from the workplace altogether.
(2) Engineering control of the hazard by guarding
machinery; by reducing contaminant exposures to within
permissible limits using mechanical means; by altering
machinery design or operation; or by using less
hazardous methods or processes.
(3) Administrative control of the hazard by arranging
work schedules to reduce exposure; by purchasing safe
equipment; by training employees in safe work practices;
and by administrative procedures and oversight designed
to identify and abate hazards.
(4) Use of personal protective equipment when control
of the hazard is not feasible or adequate by any of the
first three methods, when emergency situations arise,
or as a normal precautionary measure.
It is the responsibility of all EPA employees to make sure
that effective means are taken to keep the workplace free
of hazards that can cause injuries and illnesses. We will
explore each of these hazards, with an eye to understanding
their causes and the relevant OSHA standards that apply in
each case.
SAFETY HAZARDS
Electric Shock
Electric shock usually results from improper installation,
maintenance, and use of electric wiring and equipment.
There are three major causes:
(1) Lack of or inadequate grounding of non-current-
carrying parts for electrical machinery and tools.
4-S-3
-------
LESSON: Standards Overview
(2) Inadequate protection for exposed current-
carrying parts of electrical installations.
(3) Inadequate insulation of electrical conductors.
The National Electrical Code (NEC), which has been adopted
into the OSHA standards, requires that all shock hazards be
eliminated. Specific instructions are given for grounding
non-current-carrying parts of electrical equipment; provi-
ding ample work space around exposed parts; and guarding
exposed current-carrying parts from contact. The NEC also
identifies and explains how to use electrical conductors
that are suitably insulated with material that will with-
stand environmental stresses and the demands of the cir-
cuits in which they are used. Furthermore, employees must
be provided with equipment that will protect them from
shock.
Various subparts of the OSHA standards incorporate electri-
cal safety requirements for specific situations that paral-
lel those of the NEC.
Subpart F — Work Platforms
Subpart H — Hazardous Materials
Subpart I — Personal Protective Equipment
Subpart 0 — Machine Guarding
Subpart P — Power Tools
Subpart Q — Welding, Cutting, and Brazing
Subpart Z — Occupational Health and Environmental
Control
Burns
Burns result from exposure to flame, contact or near con-
tact with hot surfaces, and contact with certain types of
chemicals.
People are exposed to flame when it gets out of control.
The smallest spark can quickly cause a giant conflagration,
especially in combination with highly flammable materials.
If the spark comes in contact with certain volatile gases
and liquids, an explosion will occur. In some cases of
fire, the victims may be trapped, with no means of escape
from the burning area. In other cases, such as explosions,
the victims may have no chance to escape because the spread
of flame is too rapid. The OSHA standards are directed
toward prevention of fire by containing hazardous materials
and spark-producing equipment, by having available adequate
fire extinguishing systems, and by providing adequate means
of escape for personnel.
4-S-4
-------
LESSON: Standards Overview
People can be burned when heat builds up in equipment.
Heat build-up can be caused by (1) poorly lubricated
machinery that overheats from friction; (2) inadequate or
deteriorated insulation on hot machinery or equipment; or
(3) overloaded electrical machinery, electrical machinery
with malfunctioning cooling systems, or electrical machi-
nery with poorly insulated conductors. Skin contact with
any such hot surface will result in a burn. The OSHA stan-
dards are directed toward the prevention of heat build-up
or prevention of worker contact with unavoidably hot sur-
faces .
Splashes of caustics or acids on the skin will cause burns
that are very similar to heat burns.
The following sections of the OSHA standards provide regu-
lations for fire prevention and extinguishment.
Subpart E gives specifications for adequate fire alarms
and the size, number, and location of fire exits and
egress routes.
Subpart L establishes criteria for 6 hazardous locations.
(See table below.) The OSHA standards as a whole require
that ignition sources be kept away from all hazardous
locations.
Hazardous Locations
Division 1 Division 2
Class I Combustible gases/vapors Combustible gases/
are normally present vapors may be present
through an unforeseer
event
Class II Combustible dust is air- Excessive combustible
borne and forms an ex- dust is present
plosive mixture
Class III Materials producing com- Materials producing
bustible fibres are combustible fibres
processed are stored
Subpart L also specifies the size, number and location
of extinguishers of each class. (See table on the
following page). It also sets forth requirements for
standpipe-and-hose systems and sprinkler systems.
4-S-5
-------
LESSON: Standards Overview
Fire Extinguishers
Extinguisher
Class Type of Fire
A For fires fueled by paper,
wood, cloth, rubber, etc.
B For liquid-fueled fires.
C For use around electrical
equipment.
D For metal-fueled fires.
Other subparts of the OSHA standards that contain fire con-
trol requirements are:
Subpart H — Hazardous Materials
Subpart I — Personal Protective Equipment
Subpart N — Materials Handling and Storage
Subpart 0 — Machine Guarding
Subpart Q — Welding, Cutting, and Brazing
Subpart Z — Occupational Health and Environmental
Control
The National Electrical Code also contains regulations for
control of fire from electrical sources.
Falls
Falls are the leading cause of occupational injuries. The
seriousness of an injury due to a fall is largely a matter
of chance. One person may trip in exactly the same place
that his co-worker tripped, yet incur a more serious injury
because he fell against a sharp projection. There are
several causes of falls, most of which are easy to detect
and correct.
• Wet, slippery floors, passageways, and working
surfaces.
• Working surfaces that have protruding nails,
splinters, or loose boards.
• Unguarded floor openings, runways, and stairways.
• Improperly constructed work platforms.
4-S-6
-------
LESSON: Standards Overview
• Overloaded or deteriorated floors.
• Poor lighting in any area of the workplace.
• Poor housekeeping and storage practices.
Falls may also accompany other injuries, such as a blow
to the head or an electric shock.
Subpart D of the standards (Walking/Working Surfaces) covers
most of the requirements for preventing falls. The topics
covered include:
• Workplace housekeeping
• Floor and wall openings and holes
• Floor loading requirements
• Stairs
• Scaffolds
• Ladders (fixed and portable)
Subpart F of the standards covers:
• Mobile work platforms
• Manlifts
Cuts, Bruises, Pinches, Blows, Crushes
Cuts, bruises, pinches, blows, and crushes are common and
severe injuries. Hazards causing these injuries are
numerous and include:
• Unguarded points of operation on tools
• Nip points on gear trains
• Unguarded pinch points on operating machinery
• Falling or flying objects
• Sharp projections
• Poorly controlled vehicles
4-S-7
-------
LESSON: Standards Overview
The common method of preventing most such injuries is to
put a guard around the object that creates the hazard.
Guards are placed on machines and portable tools to enclose
the point of operation and keep the operator's fingers,
hands, arms, etc. away from the danger zone. Guards are
also placed on any ancillary equipment or moving parts of
machinery that present a hazard to the operator or other
workers in the area.
Personal protective equipment (such as gloves, hard hats,
and special shoes) will protect against cuts, bruises,
pinches, crushes, and blows to the head in most materials
handling and storage operations. In some types of work,
special eye protection is needed. Eye protection is
required by the standards for grinding operations and all
operations in which explosive-actuated fasteners are used.
The standards set general guarding requirements for all
machines. Included are proper construction, guarding,
maintenance, and use of controls and equipment for:
Subpart 0 — Machine Guarding
Subpart P — Guarding of portable hand and powered
tools
Subpart N — Materials handling
Subpart M — Safety relief devices for compressed
gas equipment
HEALTH HAZARDS
As you recall, health hazards are those that can cause ill-
ness or biologic damage. Health hazards may be chemical
or physical in nature, depending upon their action on the
human body. Poisoning is an example of a chemical hazard.
Deafness due to excessive noise exposure is an example of
a physical hazard.
At present, the OSHA standards contain regulations governing
employee exposure to:
Chemical hazards:
Workplace air contaminants
Asbestos
Various carcinogenic agents
Vinyl chloride
4-S-8
-------
LESSON: Standards Overview
Physical hazards:
Noise
Ionizing radiation
Non-ionizing radiation
Exposure to these hazards can have a variety of adverse
effects on the human system, including:
Skin disease
Infectious disease
Respiratory damage and illness
Sensory damage
Damage due to radiation exposure
The Nature of Health Hazards
These health hazards, in contrast to safety hazards, are
the result of extended exposure to certain contaminants
and physical stresses in the workplace environment. Fac-
tors that determine the degree of hazard are (1) the con-
centration of any contaminant or the degree of any physi-
cal stress in the workplace environment; and (2) the length
of time workers are exposed to the contaminant or the
stress. The OSHA standards for employee exposure to any
workplace contaminant or physical stress are based on those
two factors.
In most cases, duration of exposure is calculated on the
basis of an 8-hour workday or a 40-hour work week. The
permissible limits stated in the OSHA standards are the
maximum contaminant concentrations or maximum degrees of
stress that will allow an employee to be exposed for a
working lifetime without developing a disease or disability.
Let's investigate each of the health hazards to determine
their causes, the best methods of control, and the OSHA
standards that apply.
Skin Disease
Occupational dermatitis is the most frequently encountered
job-related disease. One out of every four workers is
exposed to some form of skin irritant; and about one per-
cent of those exposed develop skin disorders. Occupational
dermatitis may be caused by primary irritants, allergic
sensitizers, mechanical trauma, plant poisons, and biologic
agents.
4-S-9
-------
LESSON: Standards Overview
Primary Irritants affect anyone who comes into direct
skin contact with them. They produce skin irritation
at the point of contact. Solvents, lubricants, acids,
and caustics are common primary irritants.
Allergic sensitizers can, after a period of time,
cause an allergic-type of skin irritation in sus-
ceptible people. Typical sensitizers are epoxy resin
hardeners, coal tar derivatives, and some spices and
antibiotics.
Mechanical trauma is simply skin irritation from
friction, pressure, or other mechanical means.
Plant poisons include poison ivy and poison oak, which
produce irritation of the skin. Biologic agents
include bacteria, fungi, and parasites which attack
the skin and produce irritation.
Skin cancer is in a category by itself. It may be
occupationally caused by worker contact with known or
suspected carcinogenic agents, or it may be caused by
excessive exposure to ultraviolet radiation or to
ionizing radiation.
The OSHA standards contain no sections devoted specifically
to skin disease. The general standards for workplace sani-
tation in Subpart J are primarily concerned with control of
infectious disease, but are equally applicable to skin
diseases.
The permissible concentrations for various workplace contam-
inants are listed in Tables Z-l, Z-2, and Z-3 of the Air
Contaminants section in Subpart Z. Those contaminants that
are primary skin irritants are indicated by the word "skin"
printed after the name of the substance.
In Subpart G is a section covering workplace ventilation
requirements. Local exhaust ventilation is one of the best
methods for controlling most air contaminants, including
those that are harmful to the skin.
Subpart H deals with the use and handling of hazardous
materials, such as compressed gases, flammable/combustible
liquids, anhydrous ammonia, nitrous oxide, etc. The control
measures required for these substances include protection
against skin contact.
4-S-10
-------
LESSON: Standards Overview
Infectious Disease
The occurrence of infectious disease in the workplace is
usually the result of poor sanitation. Some of the most
common causes are:
(1) Drinking water that has become contaminated.
(2) Unsanitary and/or inadequate toilet facilities.
(3) Improper waste disposal.
(4) Food that is improperly stored, prepared, or
served.
(5) Insects, rodents, and vermin on the premises.
(6) Substandard workplace housekeeping.
Infectious disease can be easily controlled by keeping work-
places clean. Subpart J of the OSHA standards sets forth
the requirements for sanitation and general environmental
controls.
Subpart I of the standards specifies the maintenance and
hygienic requirements for various types of personal pro-
tective equipment which must be sterilized before reissue.
Respiratory Damage and Disease
In our earlier discussion, we stated that the OSHA permis-
sible concentrations are those maximum concentrations of
contaminants to which an employee may be exposed during a
working lifetime without developing a disease or disability.
If the permissible concentrations for air contaminants are
regularly exceeded due to lack of adequate controls, workers
may experience respiratory damage or disease.
Air contaminants that affect health may be either partic-
ulate or gaseous in nature.
Dusts and fumes are particulates. Dusts are tiny
solid particles suspended in the atmosphere. Fumes
are tiny particles resulting from condensation of
volatilized metal, such as iron or lead.
Gaseous contaminants may be true gases (such as carbon
monoxide) or they may be vapors. Vapors are the gaseous
forms of substances that are liquid at normal tempera-
tures .
4-S-ll
-------
LESSON: Standards Overview
The type of effect caused by particulate and gaseous con-
taminants may be acute or chronic. An acute effect occurs
when the concentration of contaminant is so great that
some system within the body is completely overwhelmed and
can no longer perform its vital function. A chronic effect
results from exposure to lower contaminant concentrations
over long time periods. Such continuous exposure could
ultimately lead to disability or death.
The OSHA permissible concentrations for air contaminants
must be strictly adhered to. Exposure of employees to con-
taminant concentrations greater than those allowed by the
standards will be ruinous to employee health. Therefore,
the standards require that the workplace air be regularly
monitored to assure that contaminant concentrations are
well within the permissible limits. Workplace monitoring
for air contaminants should be done by trained, qualified
personnel who know how to use the measuring instruments
and how to interpret the values obtained from sampling the
air.
Each type of exposure must be considered separately when
deciding on abatement measures. Some controls, as stated
in the standards, are mandatory, while others must be
adapted to the situation at hand. Any abatement measures
used, including the use of personal protective equipment,
must be approved by an industrial hygienist or equally
competent person.
In Subpart G of the OSHA standards, detailed instruc-
tions and specifications are given for selecting,
installing, and maintaining ventilation equipment
used for control of air contaminants.
Subpart H of the OSHA standards presents requirements
for respiratory protection against certain hazardous
materials, such as nitrous oxide, various compressed
gases, flammable and combustible liquids, and so on.
Subpart I of the OSHA standards covers respirators
for particular hazards, including regulations as to
adequate fit, maintenance, and proper use.
Subpart Q of the standards provides regulations for
respiratory protection during welding, cutting, and
brazing operations.
Subpart Z of the OSHA standards specifies the permis-
sible concentrations for the whole range of air contam-
inants. It also explains how exposures must be calcu-
lated and the kinds of abatement measures that must be
undertaken.
4-S-12
-------
LESSON: Standards Overview
Sensory Damage
Sensory damage involves injury to one or more of the five
senses. At the present time, the OSHA standards cover pro-
tection only against eye and ear injury.
NOISE
Excessive workplace noise is the most common cause of
hearing damage. The hazards of occupational noise exposure
include:
(1) Temporary and permanent losses of hearing or
of aural sensitivity to certain sounds.
(2) Psychological disorders may result from excessive
noise exposure. Prolonged exposure to some types of
noise may cause workers to become nervous, "jumpy,"
short-tempered, or fearful.
(3) Excessive workplace noise interferes with speech
communication and the reception of other essential
sounds .6
(A) Excessive noise disrupts job performance.
Subpart G of the OSHA standards stipulates permissible
noise exposure in terms of decibel levels.
Workplace noise levels must be monitored and measured
on the "A" scale of a standard sound level meter. If
the level of workplace noise exceeds 90 decibels,
employers are required to undertake an effective
hearing conservation program for employees. This
program includes regular audiometric testing of indi-
viduals exposed to high noise levels.
EYE DAMAGE
Eye damage can be caused by the eyes being struck by flying
particles or fragments. Eyes may also be damaged by inade-
quate lighting or exposure to radiation (especially ultra-
violet and laser hazards).
Subparts 0 and P of the standards set forth the regulations
for guarding machines and hand-held equipment in such a way
as to prevent flying material from injuring the eyes. These
regulations require employers to eliminate all mechanical
hazards from the workplace. Special eye protection is
required for any operation in which one object strikes
4-S-13
-------
LESSON: Standards Overview
against another and where there is a danger of flying parti-
cles as a result.
Eye injury from radiation exposure can result when an
employee's eyes are exposed to a laser beam or to intense
ultraviolet light. Lasers are used in cutting and welding
processes. Just as a laser cuts the material being pro-
cessed, so it can cut into and permanently damage a person's
eye; Electric arcs and gas flames produce ultraviolet
radiation which can permanently harm the eyes, the usual
effect being to "sunburn" the surface of the eye.
Subparts G and Q of the standards cover protection against
non-ionizing radiation and welding, cutting, and brazing
hazards respectively.
Eye injury, in the form of eye strain and reduced visual
acuity, can be caused by insufficient workplace lighting.
The OSHA standards for general industry do not contain speci-
fic regulations for workplace illumination, but the standards
for the construction industry do (Subpart D of 29 CFR 1926).
Exposure to Ionizing Radiation
X-ray machines and some high-voltage devices generate
ionizing radiation in the form of X-rays. Radioactive sub-
stances also emit ionizing radiation in the form of gamma
rays, neutrons, alpha particles, and beta particles. Radio-
active materials and X-ray machines are finding ever greater
use, which means that more and more workers are in a position
to be exposed to ionizing radiation.
Ionizing radiation is used to check the level and flow of
liquids in pipes and tanks. In quality control, it is used
to test the thickness and texture of fluids, mixes, films,
and sheets. Pipes and other metal structures are X-rayed
to inspect welds and check for holes and cracks. Uranium
and other materials are sources of nuclear energy. Workers
may be exposed to the radiation from radioactive materials
associated with the mining, processing, shipping, and dis-
posal of these materials. Radioactive materials are also
used in medicine, and workers involved in the manufacture
and administering of such medicines arexexposed to radiation.
In short, ionizing radiation constitutes a serious occupa-
tional health hazard. Since you cannot feel ionizing radia-
tion, you may not know when you are exposed to it. Depending
on the degree of a person's exposure, ionizing radiation
can:
(1) Damage body cells.
4-S-14
-------
LESSON: Standards Overview
(2) Lead to a variety of illnesses, notably cancer.
(3) Cause genetic damage.
(4) Be fatal in large doses.
(5) Decrease the life expectancy of an exposed
worker. (For reasons not yet understood,
ionizing radiation causes the body to age
more rapidly.)
How ionizing radiation causes the end effects of cancer,
decreased life expectancy, etc. is not yet well understood,
but the results of exposure are well documented. Indepen-
dent researchers have never been able to find a level of
radiation that did not produce some biologic damage.
In Subpart G of the OSHA standards (Section 1910.96) there
are numerous regulations set forth for control of workers'
exposure to ionizing radiation. The whole objective of
these control procedures is to reduce employee radiation
exposure to a minimum by preventing contamination of the
workplace. In the last analysis, use of ionizing radiation
and radioactive materials must be in accordance with the
regulations and procedures established by the Nuclear
Regulatory Commission (formerly the Atomic Energy Commission)
All employers who make use of ionizing radiation or radio-
active materials must be thoroughly familiar with the NRC
standards as set forth in 10 CFR Part 20.
In addition to the NRC regulations, the OSHA standards
require the following control measures, among others:
• Employers must conduct workplace.surveys to determine
the radiation hazards connected with the production,
use, release, disposal, storage, and presence of radia-
tion sources. These surveys must include continuous
monitoring of workplace radiation levels or concen-
trations of radioactive materials present, as well as
monitoring devices to measure individual worker
exposure.
• The OSHA standards have established certain maximum
exposure limits measured in reins per calender quarter.
These limits must never be exceeded except under cer-
tain, very limited conditions.
• Restricted areas must be established where radiation
or radioactive materials are used, handled, or stored.
4-S-15
-------
LESSON: Standards Overview
• Warning signs must.be posted in and around areas where
ionizing radiation or radioactive materials are located.
• In areas where radioactive materials exist or radiation
is present, and immediate evacuation may be necessary
in emergencies, an audible warning signal must be installed.
• Employers must give special safety instruction to radia-
tion workers.
Should accidents occur involving ionizing radiation or radio-
active materials, the employer must notify the Secretary of
Labor immediately, within 24 hours, or within 30 days,
depending on the degree of radiation exposure and/or the
amount of damage done.
The OSHA standards stipulate the kind and number of ionizing
radiation records that must be kept, how long such records
must be maintained, and who may have access to them.
Control of ionizing radiation hazards is best accomplished
by:
(1) Limiting the duration of an employee's exposure.
(2) Maintaining adequate distance between the worker
and a radiation source.
(3) Using sufficient shielding to attenuate the
radiation.
(4) Positive containment of radioactive materials to
prevent workplace contamination. Contamination
of air, water, or food by alpha or beta emitters
cannot ever be tolerated. For this reason, the
maximum permissible levels for these substances
in air and water are set at extremely low concen-
trations .
(5) In establishments where radiation and radioactive
materials are in regular use, NIOSH recommends
that health physics (radiation protection) units
be established to administer radiation control
programs and procedures.
4-S-16
-------
Lesson 5
-------
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
SAFETY MANAGEMENT TRAINING PROGRAM
LESSON: Motor Vehicles
No. 5
Time:
hour
Objectives; Completion of this lesson will enable the trainee to carry
out the duties of a supervisor in the motor vehicle safety
program.
Content; This lesson covers the EPA Handbook entitled
"Motor Vehicle Operations."
Since there are no OSHA general industry standards for
motor vehicles, the generally accepted requirements for
use and maintenance of government-owned motor vehicles
also are presented. Emphasis is placed on the driver's and
the mechanic's responsibilities for safety on the road.
In addition, applicable safe practices from the OSHA
general requirements for off-highway vehicles, as found in
the Construction standards, are discussed.
Methods:
Lecture, questions, discussion.
References; Environmental Protection Agency, Handbook, Motor Vehicle
Operations.
National Safety Council, Motor Fleet Safety Manual.
29 CFR 1926.601—Safety and Health Regulations for
Construction.
Materials; Slide projector (35 mm) and screen
Slides: 5-1, 5-2
5-S-l
-------
LESSON: Motor Vehicles
MOTOR VEHICLE HAZARDS
Good vehicle maintenance is one of the two essentials in
motor vehicle safety. The other is good driving habits.
But even a safe driver cannot avoid an accident if the
brakes on his vehicle cease to function or the steering
mechanism goes awry.
The hazards associated with motor vehicles on official busi-
ness are the same as those for personal and privately-owned
cars, trucks, and buses. A motor vehicle out of control
(for whatever reason) can cause severe injury or death to
the driver, passengers, and bystanders. Property damage
from motor vehicle accidents can soar into the thousands
of dollars; while the financial burdens of suits from peo-
ple injured can rise into the millions of dollars.
When a driver is out on the road, his supervisor cannot
monitor his work consistently. If he drives dangerously,
no one will know unless he is caught by the police or has
an accident. The Agency is responsible, however, for en-
suring that drivers are properly licensed and trained and
that motor vehicles are well-maintained and kept in safe
working condition.
The OSHA standards for general industry do not contain
specific regulations for motor vehicles. However, the
Agency must conform to all state laws governing the use,
ownership, and inspection/repair of motor vehicles.
Applicable regulations promulgated by the U. S. Department
of Transportation also must be obeyed.
EPA Handbook
Motor Vehicle
Operations, Par.
RESPONSIBILITIES
The Director, Facilities and Support Services Division
is responsible for assuring compliance with the provisions
of the Handbook, Motor Vehicle Operations by Headquarters
staff.
Regional Administrators and Assistant Administrators are
responsible for developing and implementing motor vehicle
safety programs within their jurisdictions which conform
with the Handbook. They also must maintain documentation
of compliance.
The motor vehicle operator is responsible for safe operation
in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations.
5-S-2
-------
LESSON: Motor Vehicles
EPA Handbook
Motor Vehicle
Operations
Par. 3
Adm. Services
Manual, Chap. 7
LICENSING REQUIREMENTS
Licensing requirements as given in the Handbook are as follows:
SLIDE 5-1; LICENSING REQUIREMENTS
VALID STATE LICENSE
IDENTIFICATION CARD SF-46
USCSC ROAD TEST 544 OR EQUIVALENT
NATIONAL DRIVER REGISTER SEARCH (FORM 1047)
PHYSICAL EXAMINATION
DEFENSIVE DRIVER TRAINING
State License. Every operator of a motor vehicle on official
business must have an operator's license valid for operation
of the type of vehicle he is to use from the state in which
he is domiciled or principally employed.
Identification Card (SF 46). Every employee who operates any
Government-owned vehicle on official duty shall have a United
States Government Motor Vehicle Operator's Identification Card,
Standard Form 46 (SF 46), issued in accordance with Agency and
Civil Service Commission regulations. Applicants for the
SF 46 shall complete a Physical Fitness Inquiry for Motor
Vehicle Operators, Standard Form 47.
Operator's Practical Road Test. The U.S. Civil Service Commis-
sion's (USCSC) Road Test No. 544 shall be given to every opera-
tor by an EPA USCSC-approved road test examiner before issuance
or reissuance of the SF 46. Other Government agency USCSC-
certified examiners may administer this test on a reimbursable
basis. This test may be waived by Regional Administrators
and Assistant Administrators when in their opinion the
applicable State or D.C. road test is comparable to USCSC
Road Test No. 544.
National Driver Register (NDR). Each applicant for a new or
renewal SF 46 shall complete a Request for Search of National
Driver Register, HS Form 1047. Completed HS Forms 1047 are
to be sent to the Officer in Charge of Reporting Units, or
to the Chief, General Services Branch for Headquarters
employees. The Officer in Charge of the Reporting Unit or
Chief, General Services Branch, FSSD, will log the name
and address of the applicant and forward it to the National
Driver Register. If a negative response is not received
within seven days, the SF 46 may be issued. If negative
information is received, the decision governing issuance of
SF 46 is made by the appropriate Regional Administrator or
Assistant Administrator. In case of emergency, an SF 46 may
be issued prior to the seven-day waiting period. All nega-
tive responses will be sent by the National Driver Register
to the Chief, Occupational Safety and Health Staff, who will
In turn forward them immediately to the appropriate Regional
Administrator or Assistant Administrator.
5-S-3
-------
LESSON: Motor Vehicles
Physical Requirements. The issuing official may require a
physical examination at Agency expense of an applicant for
SF 46 if the applicant's ability to operate a Government
motor vehicle safely is questionable.
Limitations. An incidental operator who infrequently requires
a sedan or station wagon for official business while away from
his official duty station may be authorized to operate the
vehicle without a SF 46. The employee's travel authorization
must contain a statement to this effect.
EPA Handbook
Motor Vehicle
Operations Par. I).
TRAINING REQUIREMENTS
An EPA employee must participate in defensive driver training
within six months after issuance or reissuance of SF 46. This
training may be conducted by the Federal Safety Council, the
National Safety Council, or Federal, State, and local agencies,
and private industry.
National Safety
Council, Motor
Fleet Safety
Manual, Chap. 13.
DRIVER RESPONSIBILITY
The driver of a vehicle is responsible for pretrip and en
route vehicle inspections and for reporting any defects
promptly. He should be trained to notice even slight defects
in any of the following vehicle components:
Brakes
Directional signals
Instruments
Lights
Horn
Mirrors
Windows and windshields
Seat belts
Windshield wipers/washers
Tires/wheels
Steering
Suspension
Defroster/heater
Battery
Fire extinguisher
Before operating a vehicle, the driver should make a quick
check to assure that all of these components are functioning
properly. Drivers should be provided with a checklist to use
when making this inspection. In this way they can note down
defective items so that they can be repaired immediately. A
sample checklist is provided on the following page.
Should the driver detect any idiosyncrasies in the functioning
of any of the above components while he is operating the vehicle,
he should report these to the maintenance organization when he
returns. If the situation is bad enough (the windshield wipers
stop, for example), the driver should pull off the road as soon
as is safely possible and call in for repairs.
5-S-4
-------
LESSON: Motor Vehicles
TRUCK DRIVER'S PRETRIP CHECKLIST
INSIDE
Parking brake (apply)
Start Engine
Oil pressure (light/gauge)
Air pressure (gauge)
Low air or vacuum warning device
(Air pressure below 40 psi check
on pressure build-up. Air pres-
sure above 60 psi deplete air
until warning device works. For
vacuum below 8 inches Hg. check
on build-up. Above 8 inches Hg.
deplete vacuum until device works.)
Instrument panel (Check all
lights, buzzers, dials, etc.)
Horn
Windshield wipers/washers
Heater/defroster
Mirrors
Steering wheel (excess play)
Trailer brakes (apply)
Lights (Turn on all lights and
leave them on. Check interior
cabin lights, dashboard lights,
map light.)
Fire extinguisher and warning
devices.
Rear
Tires/wheels (lugs)
Cargo tie-downs or doors
Tail lights
Stop lights
Turn signals/4-way flasher
Clearance lights
Identification lights
Reflectors
Tires/wheels (lugs)
Rear-end protection (bumper)
Cargo tie-downs or doors
Mud guards
Right side
Fuel tank and cap
Sidemarker lights
Reflectors
Tires/wheels (lugs)
Cargo tie-downs or doors
On combinations
Hoses and couplers
Electrical connectors
Front
OUTSIDE
Headlights
Clearance lights
Identification lights
Turn signals/4-way flasher
Tires/wheels (lugs)
Couplings (Fifth wheel, tow bar,
safety chains, locking devices.)
On vehicles transporting hazardous
materials
Marking or placards
Proper shipping papers
Left Side
Fuel tank and cap
Sidemarker lights
Reflectors
INSIDE
Stop engine
Release trailer emergency brakes
Apply service brakes (Air loss
should not exceed 3 psi/minute
on single vehicles or 4 psi/minute
on combinations.)
FASTEN SEAT BELT
5-S-5
-------
LESSON: Motor Vehicles
There are other items whose condition indirectly contributes
to overall safe driving. For example, the ease of driving is
affected by the condition of the drive train, engine, transmis-
sion, and differential. If these are not functioning properly,
the driver must give his attention to keeping the vehicle in
motion. Thus attention is diverted from that which he can
give to safe driving.
Good body condition of the vehicle (comfortable seats, tight
doors, clear glass, lack of noise and vibration) all allow the
driver to concentrate on driving without distraction.
Additionally, a good general appearance of the vehicle will
help motivate the driver to keep it that way.
MOTOR VEHICLE SERVICING AND REPAIR
The driver cannot be completely responsible for the correct
operation of all the features affecting safety. Others are
also involved.
The people who service the vehicle are responsible for cor-
recting minor deficiencies in the vehicle's safety system.
Service functions include the following:
Putting in gas and oil
Lubricating
Checking the battery
Checking air pressure in the tires
Checking water/antifreeze in the radiator
Replacing light bulbs and fixtures
Replacing spark plugs/fuses
Cleaning filters
Other minor maintenance tasks
The people who repair the vehicle are responsible for correct-
ing the major deficiencies in the vehicle's safety system.
Repair functions include the following:
Replacing brake linings, cylinders, and shoes
Changing and aligning wheels/tires
Overhauling engines
Repairing transmissions
Repairing steering apparatus
Repairing/replacing vehicle body parts
5-S-6
-------
LESSON: Motor Vehicles
29CFR1926.601—
Safety and Health
Regulations for
Construction.
OSHA STANDARDS FOR OFF-HIGHWAY VEHICLES
The OSHA standards for construction specify certain require-
ments for motor vehicles used at off-highway job sites where
public traffic is not allowed. These standards provide
additional guidelines for the driver to follow. Applicable
excerpts from these general requirements are as follows:
Vehicles in which the driver's view to the rear is obstructed
are not allowed unless the vehicle has a reverse alarm audible
above the surrounding noise level or the vehicle is backed up
only when an observer signals that it is safe to do so.
Tools or other materials that are transported in a vehicle
must be fastened down or enclosed.
Seat belts and anchorages meeting DOT requirements must be
installed in all motor vehicles.
Operating levers that control hoisting or dumping devices
must be equipped with a latch or other mechanism that will
prevent accidental starting or tripping of the lever.
Trip handles for tailgates must be positioned so that the
operator is in the clear while a load is being dumped.
All rubber-tired motor vehicles must be equipped with fenders.
Mud flaps may be used in place of fenders if the equipment is
not designed for fenders.
ACCIDENT REPORTING
EPA Handbook
Motor Vehicle
Operations
Par. 5
An efficient accident reporting system helps form the basis
for a safety program directed toward preventing future acci-
dents. A good safety program must be based on solid informa-
tion about the accidents which occur: their number, the kinds,
and their causes.
An envelope containing the following forms must be kept in
the glove compartment of each Government motor vehicle used
by EPA and should be provided by the supervisor to each
employee who operates a leased or personally-owned vehicle
on government business. This includes personally-owned auto-
mobiles used for incidental transportation subject to
government reimbursement to and from airports or railroad
stations in conjunction with a government authorized trip.
The operator must ascertain that these forms are in place
before using the vehicle.
5-S-7
-------
LESSON: Motor Vehicles
SLIDE 5-2: ACCIDENT REPORTS
FORM 91 - OPERATOR'S REPORT OF ACCIDENT
FORM 94 - STATEMENT OF WITNESS
GSA OPTIONAL FORM 26 - EMPLOYMENT SCOPE
Operator's Responsibility. In the event of an accident
involving a Government-owned motor vehicle or a leased or
personal car being used on official business, the operator
shall, unless prevented by serious injury to himself:
Arrange for necessary emergency treatment.
Contact appropriate authorities and report the accident
as required by State and local law.
Before leaving the scene, fill out SF 91 in full.
Fill out any accident reports as required by a leasing
and/or insurance company, or local law enforcement
agency.
Obtain a signed statement of all witnesses on Statement
of Witness forms, SF 94.
Submit all forms to his supervisor as soon as possible,
within 24 hours.
Supervisor's Responsibility. The supervisor must take the
following steps:
1. Arrange immediately for an investigation of the
accident, and assure that an Investigation Report
of Motor Vehicle Accident Form, SF 91A, is completed.
2. Report the accident, using the SF 91, SF 91A, and
SF 94 and any related documents as follows:
Field Operations
From the supervisor within 48 hours directly to
the Agency Safety and Health Officer. A copy
shall be sent to (1) The Officer-in-Charge of
the Reporting Unit, (2) The Regional and/or Facility
Safety Officers for use in completing a Safety
Officer's Analysis of Accident (EPA Form 1440-7),
(3) The Agency and Local Tort Claims Officer.
Washington Metropolitan Area Headquarters Locations
From the supervisor directly to the Agency Safety
and Health Officer. A copy of all documents shall
be sent to the Agency Tort Claim Officer.
5-S-8
-------
LESSON: Motor Vehicles
QUESTIONS
1. What are the two essentials for motor vehicle safety?
2. Who should make the routine safety check each time a vehicle is used?
3. Which of these maintenance tasks are major, and which are minor?
Suspension alignment Lubrication
Filter cleaning Engine overhaul
Headlamp replacement Spark plug replacement
Battery replacement Steering repairs
Body repairs Transmission repair
A. If a vehicle breaks down, who is responsible for getting it back to
the agency?
5. List the required licenses, identification, tests, etc. for a regular
operator of motor vehicles on official business.
6. Who is responsible for ensuring that the required accident reporting
forms are in place in a Government-owned vehicle used by EPA?
7. As a supervisor, list the three procedures you must follow in case
of an accident involving a vehicle used on official business under
your jurisdiction.
5-S-9
-------
Lesson 6
-------
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
SAFETY MANAGEMENT TRAINING PROGRAM
LESSON: Facility Standards
No. 6
Time: 3 hours
Objectives; Completion of this lesson will enable the trainee to identify
hazards that are created by violations of OSHA standards and
accepted safety and health practices that apply to all
facilities, and to abate those hazards and to take such abatement
action as is within his authority.
Content; This lesson covers the standards and practices that apply to:
Good Housekeeping
Aisle Clearance
Guardrails
Stairways
Ladders
Fire Exits
Fire Protection and Control
Materials Handling
Methods:
Lecture, Discussion, Questions
References: 29 CFR 1910.22 thru 29 CFR 1910.25
29 CFR 1910.35 thru 29 CFR 1910.37
29 CFR 1910.176
29 CFR 1910.178
Accident Prevention Manual, Chapter 36
Materials; Slide Projector (35 mm) and screen
Slides 6-1 thru 6-20.
6-S-l
-------
LESSON: Facility Standards
INTRODUCTION
This lesson covers safety and health standards that apply
to the work facilities. Although you, as a supervisor,
will probably not have an opportunity to get in on the
design of your facility to assure that it meets standards,
you do have the authority and responsibility to see that
good housekeeping is practiced, aisles and passageways are
kept clear, and that the surfaces are in a good state of
repair. You are also in a position to assure that fire
protection equipment and other safety items are maintained
in an operable condition. Here are some of the OSHA stan-
dards you will be required to enforce.
WALKING AND WORKING SURFACES
Slips, trips, and falls constitute the majority of indus-
trial accidents. They are caused by unsafe walking and
working surfaces. The OSHA standards for walking and work-
ing surfaces apply to all permanent places of employment,
except where domestic, mining, or agricultural work is
performed.
Standards 1910.22 Slide 6-1 is an example of a "safe" work area.
6-S-2
-------
LESSON: Facility Standards
OSHA standards require the following:
• Walking and working surfaces must be uncluttered, free
of tripping hazards, clean, and dry.
• Floors shall be free of splinters, projections, pro-
truding nails, holes, or loose boards.
• If floors cannot be kept dry, gratings, mats, or
raised platforms shall be provided.
• Aisles and passageways must be appropriately marked.
They must also be wide enough for mobile equipment to
maneuver and to allow the equipment to pass workers
with safe clearance.
• Guardrails or covers shall be provided for open pits,
tanks, vats, ditches, and the like.
• The approved floor load of a structure shall be clear-
ly and conspicuously posted. This floor load must
never be exceeded.
FLOOR AND WALL OPENINGS AND HOLES
Floor openings and holes, wall openings and holes, and the
sides of platforms create hazards.
• People may fall through the openings or over the sides
to the level below.
• Objects, such as tools or parts, may fall through the
holes and strike people or damage machinery on lower
levels.
Definitions: 1910.21 OSHA standards for guarding openings and holes use the
following definitions. The illustrations in Slide 6-2 show
examples.
6-S-3
-------
LESSON: Facility Standards
Floor
Hole
DIMENSIONS FOR
FLOOR/WALL OPENINGS/HOLES
Floor
Opening
•« ^\i ~
\
\
Wall
Opening
>30"
T
Standards: 1910.23
(b)
Wall
Hole
. Any
Width
T
H
30" > H > V
• Floor openings have a dimension of 12 inches or
more, through which persons.may fall.
* Floor holes have a maximum dimension of less than
12 inches, and a minimum dimension of one inch,
through which materials (but not persons) may fall.
• Wall openings are 30 inches or more high, and 18
inches or more wide.
• Wall holes are from one inch to 30 inches high, and
can be of any width.
If the level below a wall hole, a wall opening, or an
open-sided platform, floor, or runway is at least 4 feet,
a guardrail or cover shall be provided, or an attendant
shall be stationed nearby to warn personnel.
Guardrails
Guardrails must be able to withstand 200 pounds side
thrust and be constructed as follows:
Slide 6-3 shows a typical guardrail:
6-S-4
-------
LESSON: Facility Standards
SLIDE 6-3
Typical Guardrail
Height of top rail — 42 inches
Height of mid rail — 21 inches (approximately)
Height of tow board — 4 inches
• Top and mid rails must not protrude into the passageway.
Floor Opening Cover
Floor openings may be covered rather than guarded with
rails. The cover may protrude 1 inch above the floor,
provided it is beveled no more than 30 degrees to the
horizontal.
6-S-5
-------
LESSON: Facility Standards
When the floor opening cover is removed, a temporary
guardrail must be in place, or an attendant must be
stationed at the opening to warn personnel.
Special-Purpose Runways
Runways that are 18 inches or more wide may have just
one side guarded, as shown in Slide 6-4.
SLIDE 6-4
Guardrail for Runways
1910.23(1)(8)
Skylights
Skylights must be guarded by guardrails or by screens
capable of withstanding 200 pounds applied perpendicular
to the screen.
1910.24
Stairway strength
Minimum strength
Stairway width
FIXED INDUSTRIAL STAIRS
Fixed industrial stairs provide access to and from places
of work
• Fixed industrial stairs must be strong enough to
carry five times their anticipated normal load.
• At the very minimum, any stairway must be able
to carry at least 1000 pounds of moving concentrated
load at any one time.
• All stairways must have a minimum width of 22 inches.
6-S-6
-------
LESSON: Facility Standards
Stairway length
Door or gate openings
onto stairways
1910.23(a)(10)
Angle of rise
1910.24(e)
The length of a staircase is important. Long flights
of steps without landings must be avoided whenever
possible.
Intermediate landings and platforms must be provided
on stairways where practicable. Landings or plat-
forms must be no less than the stair width and a
minimum of 30 inches in length.
The OSHA standards do not specify any exact
number or placement of landings. The National
Safety Council, however, recommends landings
at every tenth or twelfth tread. Some state
regulations for factory stairs require landings
at intervals of 12.5 vertical feet.
Where doors or gates open directly onto a
stairway, the OSHA standards require that a
platform must be provided. The swing of the
door must not reduce the stair width to less
than 20 inches.
For safe climbing and descending, stairway slope
must be 30 degrees to 50 degrees from the horizon-
tal. Any uniform combination of tread and riser
dimensions may be used to achieve this angle.
1910.23(d)(l)
Handrails and Stair Rails
Every flight of stairs with four or more steps must
have standard stair railings or standard handrails as
shown in the chart.
Width
< 44"
> 44" < 88"
> 88"
Closed
1 Handrail
2 Handrails
2 Handrails
1 Stair Rail
1 Open Side
1 Stair Rail
1 Handrail
1 Stair Rail
1 Handrail
2 Stair Rails
2 Open Sides
2 Stair Rails
2 Stair Rails
3 Stair Rails
(Stair width is measured clear of all obstructions except
handrails.)
-------
LESSON: Facility Standards
On stairways less than 44 inches wide with both sides
enclosed, there must be at least one handrail, prefer-
ably on the right side descending.
On stairways less than 44 inches wide with one open
side, at least one stair rail must be affixed on the
open side.
On stairways less than 44 inches wide having both sides
open, two stair rails must be provided, one for each
side.
On stairways more than 44 inches but less than 88 inches
wide, one handrail must be provided on each enclosed
side and one stair rail on each open side.
On stairways 88 inches or more in width, one handrail
must be provided on each enclosed side, one stair rail
on each open side, and one intermediate stair rail
placed approximately in the middle of the stairs.
All circular or winding stairs must have a handrail
that is offset to prevent people from walking on any
portion of the treads where the width is less than
6 inches.
Construction of stair
rails
1910.23(e)(2)
A stair rail is constructed like a standard guardrail, ex-
cept that the vertical height must be not more than 34 in-
ches nor less than 30 inches from the upper surface of the
top rail to the surface of the tread in line with the face
of the riser at the forward edge of that tread.
Specifications
OSHA specifications for stair rails are as follows:
Parts
Load:
Height :
Size of wood:
Size of pipe:
Size of angle
brace :
Toprai 1
200 Ibs.
30" to 34"
2" x 4"
1.5"
2" x 2"
Midrail
15" to 17"
2" x 4"
1.5"
2" x 2"
Toe-
Board
4"
Posts
2" x 4"
1.5"
2" x 2"
6-S-8
-------
Construction • A handrail must consist of a lengthwise member mounted
of handrails directly on a wall or partition by means of brackets.
The brackets are attached to the lower side of
the handrail in order to keep a smooth, unobstruc-
ted surface along the top and both sides of the
handrail. They must hold the rail 3" from the
wall and be no more than 8 feet apart.
1910.24(f) • All grasping surfaces on handrails or stair rails must
be smooth, continuous, and free of rough places that
would make people wary of holding onto them.
1910.22 Section 1910.22 of the OSHA standards lays out the general
requirements for safe walking/working surfaces. Some of
these requirements bear repeating in terms of fixed stair-
ways .
General condition • All stairways must be kept in a clean, dry, orderly,
of stairs and sanitary condition. Stairs must be kept free of
1910.22(a)(1) protruding nails, splinters, holes, loose boards, and
1910.22(b)(2) other obstructions. Permanent stairways must be
appropriately marked.
Periodic inspection Since staircases are one of the most likely
of stairways places for an accident to occur, it is very
1910.22(a)(3) important that they be checked periodically
for such obstructions as protruding nails,
loose boards, holes in the treads, and splinters
in handrails and stair rails.
Rubber and other types of matting used on treads
should be inspected regularly to make sure they
are firmly attached with no loose edges.
Railings should be tested to insure that they
are firm and able to withstand the required
stresses.
Use of stairs for • Stairways should never be used for storage of mater-
storage ials, not even for momentary or temporary storage.
1910.22(b)(i) The risk of someone tripping over an object or losing
his balance trying to skirt around an object stored
on the stairs is too great.
Stairway illumination • Although lighting is not specifically mentioned in
the housekeeping requirements of Section 1910.22, pro-
per illumination is essential for stairways. Construc-
tion standards 1926.56 say that illumination for in-
door areas shall be at least 5 foot candles.
6-S-9
-------
Clean treads • Naturally, staircases should be kept clean and free
1910.22(a) of moisture or any material on the treads that might
cause people to lose their footing.
An outside stairway that is exposed to the
elements should be covered by a roof to keep
rain, snow, and ice off the treads. If instal-
ling a roof is not feasible, the stairway should
be checked at frequent intervals to be sure it
is clear and does not present a hazard.
Treads made of open grating are especially good
on outdoor stairs, since water cannot accumulate
on them, and snow will work its way through the
holes in the grating.
Stairway inspection • When inspecting the condition of stairways in your
checklist place of work, here are some items to watch out for.
Accident Prevention Handrails and stair rails:
Manual.
(a) Lack of
(b) Placement of
(c) Roughness of
(d) Strength of
(e) Clearance between rail and
wall or other object
Treads:
(a) Strength of
(b) Slipperiness of
(c) Dimensions of
(d) Evenness of surfaces
(e) Visibility of leading edge
Improper/inadequate design, construction or
location of staircases
Wet, slippery, or damaged walking or grasping
surfaces
Improper illumination
Poor housekeeping
6-S-10
-------
LESSON: Facility Standards
Slide 6-5 shows good protection for a stairway
entrance hole in the floor.
Guardrails at stair-
way openings
1910.23(a)(l)
Floor opening covers
Every stairway floor opening shall be guarded by a stan-
dard railing constructed in accordance with OSHA specifi-
cations .
• These specifications were discussed earlier.
• The railing must be provided on all exposed sides,
except the stairway entrance.
For infrequently used stairways, where
traffic across the opening prevents the use
of a fixed standard railing, the guard must con-
sist of a hinged floor opening cover of standard
strength and construction along with removable
standard railings on all exposed sides, except
at the stairway entrance.
LADDERS
Employees are required to use a ladder for access to
raised work areas. Occasionally, particularly in con-
struction and maintenance, employees may use the stand-
ing surface of a ladder as a work platform. The chief
hazard is falling. A poorly designed or maintained, or
improperly used ladder may collapse under the load placed
upon it and cause the employee to fall.
6-S-ll
-------
LESSON: Facility Standards
Definitions
1910.21
The OSHA standards for portable ladders contain definitions,
some of which are given below:
• Ladder—an appliance consisting of two side rails
joined at regular intervals by crosspieces
on which a person may step to ascend or
descend.
• Stepladder—a self-supporting portable ladder,
non-adjustable in length, having flat steps
and hinged back. Slide 6-6 shows a step-
ladder.
SLIDE 6-6
STEP LADDER
-------
LESSON: Facility Standards
1910.21
• Single ladder—a non-self-supporting portable ladder,
non-adjustable in length, having but one
section. Slide 6-7 shows a single ladder.
Slide 6-7
Single Udder
Slide 6-7
Extension
MAXIMUM LENGTH
2 SECTIONS = 60'
6UIDE IRONS
LOCKS
Overlap
Slide 6-8
o Extension ladder—Slide 6-8 shows a non-self-supporting
portable ladder, adjustable in length, having
two or more sections fitted in guides or
brackets so as to permit length adjustment.
• Extension ladders shall overlap as follows:
Ladder Size
36 feet or less
36+ to 48 feet
48+ to 60 feet
Overlap (feet)
3
4
5
Ladder maintenance
requirements
OSHA standards
1910.25(d)(l)
Good ladder maintenance is extremely important to the
safety of workers. Ladders that are not regularly in-
spected and allowed to deteriorate can cause employees to
seriously injur themselves in a fall.
OSHA standards prescribe the following maintenance require-
ments for portable wood ladders.
6-S-13
-------
LESSON: Facility Standards
• Ladders and all their components must be kept in good
condition and well lubricated. This means joints must
be tight, hardware securely fitted, and movable parts
easy to operate without binding or undue play.
• Wood ladders should be stored so as to prevent exposure
to the weather and provide adequate ventilation. They
must never be stored in places close to heat, flames,
or dampness.
Ladders should be sufficiently supported to pre-
vent sag and permanent warp.
• Ladders carried on vehicles should be secured and
fastened to minimize rubbing and bumping.
• Ladders should be kept coated with protective material.
If the ladder is to be painted, inspect it care-
fully before applying the paint.
• Ladders must be inspected frequently.
Defective ladders must be removed and tagged
with the warning: "Dangerous. Do Not Use."
• Rungs must be kept free of grease and oil.
Proper use of ladders Proper use of ladders is essential in preventing accidents.
A good ladder is still a serious safety hazard when used by
workers in a dangerous way.
OSHA standards OSHA standards prescribe the following safety precautions
1910.25(d)(2) for ladder use.
• The foot of a ladder should always be 1/4 of the length
of the ladder from the wall it leans against.
• The worker should always face the ladder when climb-
ing up or down.
• Short ladders must not be spliced together to make
long ladders.
• The top of a regular stepladder must not be used as
a step.
6-S-14
-------
LESSON: Facility Standards
Great care should be taken when using these
ladders near electrical conductors, since the
reinforcement itself is a good conductor.
Never use metal ladders near electrical con-
ductors.
• Ladders for access to roofs must extend at least
three feet beyond the support point at roofline.
• Ah extension ladder should not be adjusted while any-
one is standing on the ladder.
Adjustment of ladders from the top or above
the locking device is extremely dangerous,
as the worker cannot see if the locks are
properly engaged.
Extension ladders should always be erected
so the upper section rests on the bottom
section.
1910.25(d)(2)(xx) • Workers should never climb on the back bracing of
stepladders.
1910.25(d)(2)(xxi) • When conditions require it, hooks may be attached
at or near the tops of portable ladders to give
added security.
Metal ladders Metal ladders from the standpoint of safety are similar
1910.26 in most ways to wooden ladders. OSHA standards do not
specify design and construction requirements for metal
ladders because of the great variety of metals and design
possibilities. The "care and use" standards for wood
ladders apply here. DO NOT USE metal ladders near
electrical equipment.
FIRE PROTECTION
Fire protection and control are vital factors in a safety
program. There are two basic requirements for fire safety.
• Get the people out of the burning area. This comes first.
• Get the fire out.
Definitions First we will discuss getting the people clear through
1910.35 means of egress. OSHA has these definitions:
6-S-15
-------
LESSON: Facility Standards
• Means of egress—a continuous ar.d unobstructed way
out of a building or open work area to a
public way.
• Exit access—that part of the means of egress from
the work area to the exit.
• Exit—a protected way of travel out of the building
to the exit discharge.
• Exit discharge—the portion of the means of egress
from the end of the exit to the public way.
• Exit capacity—For Level Egress Components (includ-
ing Class A ramps), the capacity per unit of
exit width is 100 persons. (A "unit" is 22"
wide.)
For Inclined Egress Components (including
Class B ramps) and where the height between
landings is 12 feet or less, the capacity is
60 persons per unit of exit width.
• A ramp is designated as Class A or B as follows:
Exit Dimensions
Class A
Class B
Width
Slope
Maximum height
between landings
44" or more
1" to 1-3/16" in 12"
No limit
30" to 44"
1-3/16" to 2" in 12"
12 feet
• Non-combustible material is that which may be heated
to 1380 F. for a period of 5 minutes without
bursting into flame or giving off flammable
gases.
• Firewall—a wall that can remain standing with no
support while being heated up to 2000°F.
over a 4-hour period in accordance with the
Standard Time-Temperature Curve.
6-S-16
-------
LESSON: Facility Standards
A firewall must not have any unprotected
openings that will allow smoke, gases, or
flames to communicate between the two areas
that the firewall separates.
Units of Egress • One unit of egress is a path at least 22 inches in
width. Two units is a path at least 44 inches in
width.
If the path exceeds one or more units by at
least 12 inches in width, the additional
shall count as half a unit.
If a handrail or other fixed item projects
further than 5 inches into the exit, the exit
must be widened appropriately.
Hazard content Hazards may be classified, by content, as shown below.
classification
• Low Hazard Contents. Items of materials of such low
combusibility that they will only smoke and
give off fumes, unless there is fire from an
external source.
• High Hazard Contents. Items of materials that burn
with extreme rapidity, give off toxic fumes,
or are liable to explode. Exit requirements
are doubled in an area containg high hazard
contents.
• Ordinary Hazard Contents. Items of materials that burn
with moderate rapidity and neither explode
nor give off toxic fumes.
Stairs Stairs in exits shall be at least 36 inches wide and of
standard construction for occupancy of less than 50, and
44 inches wide for occupancy of 50 or more.
Exit Distance Distance to an exit shall be as follows:
• For industrial buildings, the maximum allowable
distance to an exit from the worksite is 100 feet.
This distance is increased to 150 feet if the
building is equipped with an automatic sprinkler system.
• For office buildings, the maximum distance to an
exit is 200 feet. The distance is increased to 300
feet for buildings with automatic sprinkler systems.
6-S-17
-------
LESSON: Facility Standards
• If the building contains high hazard contents, the
maximum allowable distance to a place of safety is
75 feet.
Fundamental require- Every building or work area must be provided with suffic-
ments ient exits so that the area may be evacuated in a minimum
1910.36 amount of time.
• When a building is occupied, exits must not be locked,
unless panic hardware is installed.
• The exit access and exit must be clearly and visibly
marked so that employees cannot mistakenly be led to
dead-ends, locked doors, etc. The path from the work
area to the exit should also be plainly marked.
• Exit facilities must be illuminated.
• Exit facilities must never be blocked by stored
material or furniture, nor shall they be hidden by
draperies or decorative items.
• Exits must not lead through bathrooms or other areas
where free access may temporarily be denied.
• If there is a probability of an exit being blocked
by smoke, heat, or other hazard, at least two exits
shall be provided for the area. This requirement would
apply, for example, if the only exit leads past a
flammable liquid storage area.
Buildings under Personnel in buildings under construction or repair must
repair/construction be provided adequate egress.
• A building shall not be used by more people than
the existing and operable exit facilities will
accomodate.
• If high hazard contents are brought into a low or
ordinary hazard building, temporary safeguards must
be taken to keep the egress facilities in compli-
ance. The best solution would be to reduce the
normal occupancy.
Protective enclos- If exits are closed off from other parts of the building,
ures for exits the enclosure shall meet the following requirements:
1910.37
6-S-18
-------
LESSON: Facility Standards
• In a building of three stories or less, the enclosure
must be of one-hour fire resistance construction.
• In a building of four or more stories, the enclosure
must be of two-hour fire resistance construction.
• All openings in the enclosure must have approved self-
closing fire doors.
• Exit doors from a room must swing in the exit direc-
tion if. 50 or more people occupy the room.
• Mirrors must never be hung on exit doors.
• Exits must be smooth, unobstructed, and kept clear
of snow and ice.
• Ample space must be provided in the exit discharge
area to permit people to get clear of the exit door.
• The ceiling of a means of exit must be at least 7"6"
above the walking surface. Projections coming down
from the ceiling must never exceed 10 inches.
• Doors to rooms or closed spaces leading off exit
ways shall be marked "NOT AN EXIT."
Exit signs Exit signs shall be constructed as follows:
• Signs must be illuminated by a light source of at
least 5 footcandles.
• The word EXIT must be painted in letters at least
6 inches high and 3/4 inches wide.
Slide 6-9 on the following page shows the basic exit
safety requirements.
6-S-19
-------
LESSON: Facility Standards
Slide 6-9
PRINCIPLES OF EXIT
SAFETY
MARKED
UNOBSTRUCTED
WEIL LIGHTED
FIRE CONTROL
Most fires start small, but when no one takes positive
action to put out a fire while it is still controllable,
it quickly builds up into a major disaster. Portable fire
extinguishers provide a very effective means of killing a
fire at an early stage before it gets out of control. In
order to do this job, however, fire extinguishers must be:
(1) of the right class and type.
(2) of adequate size for the job.
(3) fully charged, in operable condition,
and readily available for quick use.
6-S-20
-------
LESSON: Facility Standards
Background data and
selected definitions:
Fire
• Fire is combustion; that is, the rapid combination of
one or more elements with oxygen. Slide 6-10 illus-
trates these elements.
SLIDE 6-10
Chemistry of Fire
Chemistry of fire
In order to burn, fire requires these four compon-
ents:
6-S-21
-------
LESSON: Facility Standards
Fuel—the element that will combine with
oxygen.
Oxygen (or air).
Heat—sufficient to raise the temperature
of the fuel to its ignition point and
to maintain the fuel at its flash point.
A newer theory lists a fourth element required
for fire, i.e., uninhibited chain
reactions. Some new extinguishing sys-
tems, such as Halon 1301 and 1211 and
some dry chemical systems, suppress fires
in this fourth way by inhibiting the
flame chain reactions.
Flash point • Flash point is the lowest temperature at which a
material will give off sufficient flammable vapor to
form an ignitable mixture with air.
Ignition temperature • Ignition temperature is the lowest temperature to
which the fuel must be heated in order to initiate
self-sustained combustion, independent of the source
of heat.
Classification of Fires may be classified in the following manner:
fires
1910.156(a)-(d) • "Class A fires" are fires in ordinary combustible
materials, such as wood, cloth, paper, and rubber.
• "Class B fires" are fires in flammable liquids, gases,
and greases.
• "Class C fires" are fires which involve energized
electrical equipment where the electrical non-
conductivity of extinguishing media is of importance.
(When electrical equipment is de-energized, extin-
guishers for Class A or B fires may be used safely.)
• "Class D fires" are fires in combustible metals, such
as magnesium, titanium, zirconium, sodium, and potasium.
NOTE; Certain combustible metals and reactive
chemicals require special extinguishing agents
and techniques. In case of doubt, see "NFPA-
No. 49, Hazardous Chemical Data."
6-S-22
-------
LESSON: Facility Standards
Classification of Extinguishers are classified for the type(s) of fires against
extinguishers by which they are effective. They are given a letter classifi-
hazard. cation appropriate to the type of fire.
Extinguishers shall be selected for the specific class or
classes of hazards to be protected in accordance with the
following requirements:
Class A hazards • Extinguishers for protecting Class A hazards shall
1910.147(c)(2)(ii) be selected from among the following: foam, loaded
stream, multi-purpose dry chemical, and water types.
NOTE (1): Certain smaller extinguishers which
are charged with multi-purpose dry chemical
are rated on Class B and Class C fires, but
have insufficient effectiveness to earn the
minimum 1-A rating even though they have value
in extinguishing smaller Class A fires.
NOTE (2); Such smaller extinguishers shall
not be used to meet the requirements for min-
imum sizes of fire extinguishers.
Class B hazards • Extinguishers for protection of Class B hazards shall
1910.157(b)(2) be selected from the following: bromotrifluoromethane,
(iii) carbon dioxide, dry chemical, foam, loaded stream,
and multipurpose dry chemical.
NOTE; Extinguishers with ratings less than
1-B shall not be considered in determining
suitability. See Note (2) above.
Class C hazards • Extinguishers for protection of Class C hazards shall
1910.157(b)(2)(iv) be selected from the following: bromotrifluoromethane,
carbon dioxide, dry chemical, and multi-purpose dry
chemical.
NOTE; Carbon dioxide extinguishers equipped
with metal horns are not considered safe for
use on fires in energized electrical equip-
ment and, therefore, are not classified for
use on Class C hazards.
Class D hazards • Extinguishers and extinguishing agents for the protec-
1910.157(b)(2)(v) tion of Class D hazards shall be of types approved for
use on the specific combustible-metal hazard.
6-S-23
-------
LESSON: Facility Standards
NOTE; Certain combustible metals and reactive
chemicals require special extinguishing agents
and techniques. For additional information,
see NFPA No. 49—Hazardous Chemical Data, or
NFPA No. 325M—Fire Hazard Properties of
Flammable Liquids, Gases and Volatile Solids.
Slide 6-11 shows accepted markings for extinguishers.
Slide 6-11
ORDINARY
A
COMBUSTIBLES
1. Extinguishers suitable
for Class A fires should be
identified by a triangle con-
taining the letter "A." If
colored, the triangle shall be
colored green."
FLAMMABLE
LIQUIDS
2. Extinguishers suitable
for Class B fires should be
identified by a square con-
taining the letter "B." If
colored, the square shall be
colored red."
ELECTRICAL .3. Extinguishers suitable
for Class C fires should be
identified by a circle con-
taining the letter "C." If
colored, the circle shall be
EQUIPMENT colored blue.0
COMBUSTIBLE
METALS
4. Extinguishers suitable
for fires involving metals
should be identified by a
five-pointed star containing
the letter "D." If colored, '
the star shall be colored
yellow.0
0 NOTE: Recommended colors as described in
the Federal Color Standard Number 595 are:
Green - No. 14260
Red - No. 11105
Blue - No. 15102
Yellow - No. 13655
6-S-24
-------
LESSON: Facility Standards
Rating of portable Portable fire extinguishers are rated for their relative
fire extinguishers extinguishing effectiveness for a specific class of fire.
1910.156(e) and Rating is based upon the preceding classification of fires.
NFPA No. 10-2100
EXAMPLE: One extinguisher is rated 4-A, and another
is rated 20-B:C. This indicates the following:
The 4-A extinguisher should extinguish approxi-
mately twice as much Class A fire as a 2-A
(2-1/2 gallon) water rated extinguisher. (See Note 1.)
The 20-B:C extinguisher should extinguish approxi-
mately twenty times as much Class B fire as a 1-B
rated extinguisher, and it is suitable for use on
energized electrical equipment. (See Note 2.)
NOTE (1); No NUMERAL rating is assigned for
extinguishers classified for use Class C
fires, since Class C fires are essentially
Class A or B fires involving energized elec-
trical wiring and equipment.
NOTE (2) : Extinguishers which are effective
on more than one Class of fires have multiple
LETTER and NUMERAL-LETTER classifications
and ratings.
Approved and/or "Approved" means listed or approved by:
tested equipment
1910.156(s) • At least one of the following nationally recognized
testing laboratories: Factory Mutual Engineering Corp.;
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.; or
• Federal agencies such as Bureau of Mines, Department
of the Interior; Department of Transportation; or
U.S. Coast Guard which issues approvals for such
equipment.
General requirements General requirements for portable extinguishers are:
1910.157
Operable condition • Portable extinguishers shall be maintained in a fully
1910.157(a)(1) charged and operable condition, and kept in their
designated places at all times when they are not being
used.
6-S-25
-------
LESSON: Facility Standards
Location
1910.157(a((2)
Marking of
location
1910.157(a)(3)
Extinguishers shall be conspicuously located where
they will be readily accessible and immediately
available in the event of fire. They shall be loc-
ated along normal paths of travel.
Extinguishers shall not be obstructed or obscured
from :view. In large rooms, and in certain locations
where visual obstruction cannot be completely avoid-
ed , means shall be provided to indicate the location
and intended use of extinguishers conspicuously.
Slide 6-12 shows a good extinguisher mounting.
Slide 6-12
Extinguisher Located on a Stanchion
Marking of
extinguishers
If extinguishers intended for different classes of fire
are grouped, their intended use shall be marked conspi-
cuously to insure choice of the proper extinguisher at
the time of a fire.
For extinguishers weighing 40 Ibs. or more the top
of the extinguisher shall be no more than 42" off
the floor.
6-S-26
-------
LESSON: Facility Standards
If the extinguisher weighs less than 40 pounds the
top shall be no more than five feet off the floor.
Inspection, maintenance, The employer shall be responsible for such inspection,
and hydrostatic tests maintenance, and testing.
1910.157(d)
NOTE (1): For details of conducting needed
inspections, proper maintenance operations, and
required tests, see NFPA No. 10A-1970, Maintenance
and Use of Portable Fire Extinguishers.
NOTE (2): Some of the maintenance requirements
for specific type extinguishers will be pre-
sented along with the later slide discussion
on the various types of extinguishers. For addi-
tional details refer to NFPA No. 10-A-1970.
Inspection
1910.157(d)(2)
Frequency/condition Extinguishers shall be inspected monthly, or at more
frequent intervals when circumstances require, to insure
they are in their designated places, to insure they have
not been actuated or tampered with, and to detect any
obvious physical damage, corrosion, or other impairments.
Signs of defect Any extinguishers showing defects shall be given a
complete maintenance check.
Maintenance
1910.157(d)(3)
Frequency/condition At regular intervals, not more than 1 year apart, or when
1910.157(d)(3)(i) specifically indicated by an inspection, extinguishers
shall be thoroughly examined and/or recharged or repaired
to insure operability and safety; or replaced as needed.
Replacements Extinguishers removed from the premises to be
recharged shall be replaced by spare extinguishers
during the period they are gone.
Pails and drums Pails or drums of powder-extinguishing agents for
scoop or shovel application to metal fires shall
be kept full at all times.
6-S-27
-------
LESSON: Facility Standards
Tag data
1910.157(d)(3)(iv)
Hydrostatic tests
1910.157(d)(4)
Each extinguisher shall have a durable tag
securely attached to show the maintenance or
recharge data and the initials or signature
of the person who performs this service.
If, at any time, an extinguisher shows evidence of
corrosion or mechanical injury, it shall be subjected
to a hydrostatic .pressure test, or replaced.
TYPES OF EXTINGUISHERS
The following slides show some of the types of portable
fire extinguishers in general use.
Slide 6-13 shows three types of Class A extinguishers.
CONSTANT-READING
AIR PRESSURE OAUOE
CAP AND CARRYING HANDLE
Gas Cartridge
Water Extinguisher
CAP AND CARRT1MO HANDLE
Soda-Acid
Fire Extinguisher
Stored Pressure
Water Fire Extinguisher
In the left hand type the water is forced out of
the cylinder by the pressure of CC^.
In the middle type the acid reacts with the soda
solution to generate gas that forces the liquid
out of the cylinder.
6-S-28
-------
LESSON: Facility Standards
In the right hand type the stored air pressure
forces the liquid out.
The monthly check for these extinguishers
is to weigh them. For the stored pressure
extinguishers you must also read the pressure
gauge to be sure that there is sufficient
air pressure.
A similar extinguisher uses a hand pump to pump
the liquid out of the cylinder.
All of these extinguishers must use anti-
freeze if exposed to low temperatures.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions on
the type of anti-freeze.
Foam extinguishers
Slide 6-14 shows a foam extinguisher.
either an A or B Class extinguisher.
It may be
Foam Fire Extinguisher
Inverting the extinguisher allows the liquid in the
inner and outer chambers to mix and generate foam
and CC>2. The C02 forces the foam out through the
hose.
6-S-29
-------
LESSON: Facility Standards
Carbon dioxide and
other gas
extinguishers
Maintenance—the extinguisher should be weighed
and inspected periodically. It should also be
charged and recharged annually and protected from
freezing.
Two liquified gas extinguishers are shown in Slide
6-15. They are suitable for A, B and C fires.
• CAMMING MAHOIC
In both of these extinguishers, the discharge lever
allows the liquified gas to vaporize and escape to
the fire through the hose. In confined areas, the
C02 or Halon extinguishers can cause the atmosphere
to become toxic.
Maintenance—weigh the extinguishers periodically.
NOTE; (X>2 extinguishers with metal discharge
horns are not considered safe for use on fires
in energized electrical equipment and, there-
fore not classified for use on Class C hazards.
6-S-30
-------
LESSON: Facility Standards
Dry chemical
extinguishers
Slide 6>-16 shows two types of dry chemical extinguishers.
They may be Class A, B, or C extinguishers, or a combi-
nation.
Dry-Chemical Fire Extinguisher,
Cartridge Operated
Dry-Chemical Fire Extinguisher,
Stored Pressure Type
Cartridge
In the cartridge-type extinguisher, the stopper to
the C02 cartridge is pierced and the C02 forces the
dry chemical out of the cylinder.
Maintenance—weigh the CC>2 cartridge periodically
and replace it if it has lost a half ounce or more.
Be sure the dry chemical is not caking, and check
the operating mechanism annually.
General requirements
1910.157(c)(l)
DISTRIBUTION OF PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
The number of fire extinguishers needed to protect
a property, shall be determined as prescribed below,
considering the area and arrangement of the building
or occupancy, the severity of the hazard, the anti-
cipated classes of fires, and the distances to be
traveled to reach extinguishers.
-------
LESSON: Facility Standards
Building protection
Occupancy hazard
protection
Class A requirements
Fire extinguishers shall be provided for the
protection of both the building structure, if
combustible and the occupancy hazards contained
therein.
Required building protection shall be provided by
fire extinguishers suitable for Class A fires.
Occupancy hazard protection shall be provided by
fire extinguishers suitable for such Class A, B, C,
or D fire potentials as may be present.
Slide 6-17 shows the requirements for class A fire
extinguishers.
EXTINGUISHERS SUITABLE FOR CLASS A FIRES
H a a i c
Minimum
,. . . i
r^xt i tif^tt (Stic r
Rating
for Area
Specified
1A
2A
3A
4A
6A
Maximum
Travel
Distances
to
Extinguishers
75ft
75 ft
75ft
75 ft
75ft
Areas To Be Protected per Extinguisher
Litiht
Hazard
Occupancy
3,000 sq ft
6,000 sq ft
9,000 sq ft
1 1 ,250 sq ft
1 1 ,250 sq ft
Ordinary
Hazard
Occupancy
Not Permitted
Except as
Specified*
3,000 sq ft
4,500 sq ft
6,000 sq ft
9,000 sq ft
Extra
Hazard
Occupancy
Not Permitted
Except as
Specified*
Not Permitted
Except as
Specified*
3,000 sq ft
4,000 sq ft
6,000 sq ft
'The protection requirements specified in this table may be fulfilled by several extinguishers of lower ratings for ordinary
or extra hazard occupancies, subject to the approval of the authority having jurisdiction. Consideration should be given
to the number of persons available to operate the extinguishers, the degree of training provided, and the possibility of
use by women.
From National Fire Protection Association Standard No. 10, Tahle 4110.
Higher rated
extinguishers
may be used
1910.157(c)(2)(iv)
The protection requirements may be fulfilled with
extinguishers of higher rating provided the travel
distance to such larger extinguishers shall not
exceed 75 feet.
6-S-32
-------
LESSON: Facility Standards
Class B extinguisher Fire extinguisher size and placement for Class B fires
requirements other than for fires in flammable liquids of appreciable
1910.157(c)(3) depth shall be as shown in Table L-2.
NOTE; Appreciable depth is defined as greater
than 1/4".
TABLE L-2
Basic Maximum travel
Type of minimum distance to
hazard extinguisher extinguishers
rating (feet)
Light 4B 50
Ordinary 8B 50
Extra 12B 50
NOTE: Where these requirements call for minimum
extinguisher ratings of 4-B, 8-B, or 12-B, the
requirements may be met by existing extinguishers
or multiple foam extinguishers of higher rating
provided that the distance of travel to the larger
extinguishers does not exceed 50 feet. However,
if a single extinguisher must be purchased to ful-
fill such requirements, the next higher rating
shall be used.
For flammable liquid hazards of appreciable depth
(Class B), such as dip tanks or quench tanks, Class B
fire extinguishers must be supplied on the basis of one
numerical unit of Class B extinguishing potential per
square foot of flammable liquid surface of the largest
tank hazard in the area.
Slide 6-18 summarizes fire extinguisher characteristics.
6-S-33
-------
LESSON: Facility Standards
SUMMARY OF FIRE EXTINGUISHER CHARACTERISTICS
Type
Water Solution
Pump tank
Cartridge actuated...
Soda acid
Stored pressure .. .
Loaded stream...
Foam
Wetting agent
Carbon Dioxide
Dry Chemical
Dry Powder
(Metal fires)
Liquefied Gas
Class of Fire
A B C D
^
*
^
^
^ h
* >**
^,
» * *
* I* I*
b ^ ^
h „ ^
11 jX (X
b.l ^ if
b.f i0 ^
b.f jx ^x
K
b jx »X
e
|»
1 *
2'/2 gal
2'/2 gal
2'/2 gal
2'/2 gal
2'/2 gal
2'/2 gal
2Vj gal
2'/2 Ib
5lb
15 Ib
2'/2 Ib
5lb
10 Ib
20 Ib
30 Ib
30 Ib
2'/2 Ib
I
al
40
35
35
40
40
35
40
12
20
48
7
12
22
38
55
55
6
"3
c *
8=§
1Efe
a
30-40
30-40
30-40
35-40
30-40
30-40
30-40
3-4
6-8
8-10
8-11
10-12
15-20
20-25
20-25
6-8
3-5
"S-i 'z
£$l
ves
JWO
yes
ves
7 w"
ves
7 ****
ves
/****
ves
7 v"
ves
/****
no
no
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
3*
a a
111
1^
*
(none)
5
5
5
5
5
5
5"
5d
5d
12"
12'
12'
12'
12'
12
12
4, ~.
(J 4)
Q **
60°
60
60
60
60
90
60
8-30°
8-30°
8-30°
8-20°
8-20°
10-25"
10-25°
10-25°
28°
10°
o
' I
V)
V)
<3
O
2-A
2-A
2-A
2-A
2-A:1-B
2-A;4-B
1 to 4-B:C
1 to4-B:C
12-B:C
1-4-B:C
4-B:C
8-B:C
16-B:C
20-B:C
4-B;C
NOTES:
•May be operated intermittently.
"Limited to small fires; for best results follow up with water.
'Not satisfactory for fires of water-miscible solvents, such as alcohol and acetone, unless foam is of polar type.
"U.S. Dept. of Transportation or Board of Transport Commissioners of Canada may require testing at more frequent
intervals.
'Models using factory-sealed disposable (nonrefillable) containers are not subject to hydrostatic testing.
'Models using multipurpose dry chemical are effective on Class A fires.
•Several different dry powders may be used; their effectiveness depends on material that is burning.
"Limited to small fires.
'Dry chemical extinguishers with stainless steel, aluminum, or soldered-brass shells should be tested at 5 year intervals.
Source: National Fire Protection Association.
This chart is taken from the National Safety
Council's Accident Prevention Manual.
Materials Handling
The next part of this lesson will cover hazards related
to the physical handling and storage of materials. In
everyday operations, workers handle, transport, and
store materials. They may do it by hand, by manually
operated materials handling equipment, or by power operated
equipment. In all three instances the hazards are usually
created in the same way, i.e., by overloading the equip-
ment. The next few paragraphs will discuss the hazards
involved and how to identify and. abate them.
6-S-34
-------
LESSON: Facility Standards
Manual Materials
Handling
Proper way to lift
The OSHA standards do not cover manual materials handling.
There are however, good safety practices that will prevent
accidents and resulting injuries when handling materials
manually. It should be noted that the Postal Service
claims that 14% of its accidents are related to manual
lifting.
Here are eight steps to follow when lifting objects
that will reduce the risk of strain on the employee's
back.
(1) Size up the load first—do not attempt
to lift it alone if there is any doubt
in your mind about your ability to do so.
(2) Make sure that your footing is secure.
Get a good balance by placing your feet
about 8 to 12 inches apart.
(3) Place your feet close to the base of
the object to be lifted. This is impor-
tant because it prevents the back muscles
from taking all the load.
(4) Bend your knees and squat (don't bend
your body at the waist), keeping your back
straight and as nearly vertical as possi-
ble. If necessary, spread your knees or
lower one knee to get closer to the object.
(5) Now start pushing up with your legs,
thereby using your strongest set of
muscles. Keep the load close to your
body as you come up.
(6) Lift the object to the carrying position.
If it is necessary to change direction
when in the upright position, be careful
not to twist your body. Turn your body
by changing your foot position.
(7) If you deposit the load on a bench or
table, place it on the edge to make the
table take part of the load. Then push
it forward with your arms or, if necessary,
with part of your body.
6-S-35
-------
LESSON: Facility Standards
(8) To put the load on the floor from a
waist-high carrying position, bend your
knees and, with a straight back and load
close to your body, lower the load using
your arm and leg muscles.
Slide 4-19 illustrates the- above method.
Lifting limits There are limits to the weight a person can lift safely.
The physical condition, build and stature of the individual
has a lot to do with a person's ability to lift heavy
objects or to work on a repetitive lifting job. The U. S.
Postal Service has set these limits for lifting:
Periodic lifting—75 Ibs. maximum.
Carrying—35 Ibs. maximum.
Lifting with Much of the strain can be avoided by using manually operated
manually operated equipment. Hand trucks are a common form of such equipment.
equipment Here are a few simple rules to follow to eliminate hazards
when using hand trucks.
Rules for Hand Trucks • Keep the load's center of gravity as low as
possible.
• Place the load well forward so the weight will
be carried by the axle, not by the handles.
• Place the load so it will not slip, shift, or
fall. Load only to a height that will allow a
clear view ahead.
• Let the truck carry the load. The operator
should only balance and push.
• Never walk backwards with a hand truck.
• When going down an incline, keep the truck
ahead of you. When going up, keep the truck
behind.
• Move all hand trucks at a safe speed. Do not
run. Keep the truck constantly under control.
• Use the truck only for the purpose for which
it was designed.
6-S-36
-------
LESSON: Facility Standards
• While brakes are not required on hand trucks,
provision should be made to hold them securely
in place when being stored, loaded, or unloaded.
Handles or tongues of idle railroad trucks,
"baggage trucks," "high-boys," and other types
of two axle wagons should be kept chained up or
tucked under the truck.
Hand trucks should be equipped with knuckle guards to
protect the worker's hands from scraping on posts,
walls, or other objects. An example is shown in
Slide 6-20.
KNUCKLE GUMPS
CANVAS, LEATHER
RU00ER PELTING
WOOD BLOCK
FENPER TW
GUARD
METAL FENPER
TrPE GUARP
CANVAS, LEATHER
OR RUBBER BELTING
PLUS WOOD BLOCK
Personal Protective
Equipment
Persons doing manual lifting should have ample personal
protective equipment. Detailed descriptions of such
equipment will be covered in Lesson 10. The items below
are normally required.
• Gloves
• Aprons/jackets
• Safety shoes
• Possibly head and face protection.
6-S-37
-------
LESSON: Facility Standards
Hoists Manually operated hoists such as jacks, chain hoists,
block and tackle, and others are often used. They
too much not be overloaded. A good rule to follow is
to use only the operating handle that was provided by
the manufacturer and have only one man operate the
mechanism at a time.
Most manual hoisting machines are designed for
one man's strength on the operating handle. If
lengthening the handle or using two or more men
is necessary it probably means that the load is
too great.
Powered Materials Fork lift trucks and electric hoists are probably the most
Handling Equipment common powered materials handling equipment. The rules
about no overloads are in the OSHA Standards. In addition
OSHA requires a regular check-up and maintenance schedule.
Tests are required as follows:
• An operational check of all functions at the
start of each shift or day's operation.
• A thorough examination at least every 30 days.
The results of this examination shall be recorded
and filed.
• An overhaul type of examination at least annually.
• Alterations to hoisting equipment shall only be
made subject to the manufacturer's approval.
Operator Protection The moving parts of hoists and trucks shall be
1910.178 guarded as necessary to prevent injury to the
operator from pinch,and nip points.
If loads are carried above shoulder height
the operators should have overhead protection
on trucks and hard hats may be required.
Operators and other personnel shall stay out
from under loads.
Hazardous Locations The National Electric Code covers the use of industrial
trucks in hazardous locations and also the safety precautions
for changing the storage batteries that operate the trucks.
These will be covered in Lesson 7.
6-S-38
-------
LESSON: Facility Standards
Truck Operators The OSHA standards state that only trained and authorized
1910.178 personnel shall operated powered industrial trucks. The.
standards go on to state a number of precautions that must
be taken when operating the trucks. These include the
following:
• Keep the load as low as possible and secure
against the mast or rest. Go uphill with the
load forward, downhill with it aft.
• Keep the speed of the truck low enouph to
maintain firm control. Horseplay is not
permitted.
• Bridgeplates and dockboards shall be secured
in place.
• The driver shall have a clear view in the direction
of travel.
• Keep the forks lowered when not in use.
6-S-39
-------
LESSON: Facility Standards
QUESTIONS
1. What action can you as a supervisor take to prevent slips, trips,
and falls?
/ / Keep floors in good repair.
/ / Provide gratings on wet surfaces.
/ / Install guard rails around floor openings.
/ / Good housekeeping.
2. When must a toe board be provided as a part of the guardrail for an
open-sided work platform 12 feet above ground?
3. A flooring opening is fitted with a cover that is 3/4" above the
floor. What must be done to the edge?
4. What safety factor is required for stairways?
5. A stairway is 8 feet wide. It was fitted with a center stair rail
which broke. Would you have it repaired or removed?
You are the supervisor of a laboratory located in an old 2-story wooden
building with a stairway. Your boss mentions at a staff meeting that
an EPA safety inspector is due within the next few weeks and asks for
work orders for the facility maintenance carpenter to bring stairways
into compliance with standards. Make up an inspection checklist for
the stairway in your lab.
6-S-40
-------
LESSON: Facility Standards
6. (cont'd)
7. A single ladder 12 feet long is leaning against a wall and is being
used as a platform to paint the wall. It's foot should be
feet from the base of the wall.
8. A single ladder is used as access to a raised work platform. It
should extend above the platform.
9. In order to preserve a wooden ladder would you varnish or paint it?
10. Your laboratory has only one door. What is the preferable location
for a flammable liquid storage cabinet?
/ / As near to the door as possible.
/ / As far from the door as possible.
/ / In between.
11. What type of fire extinguisher should be very close to the flammable
liquid storage?
12. You use an electric arcing process in your laboratory. What type of
extinguisher should you have near it?
6-S-41
-------
LESSON: Facility Standards
13. You have a very complex electronic machine in your laboratory. Should
you have a C02 extinguisher or a dry chemical one near it?
14. What is the monthly maintenance check for the dry chemical extinguisher?
15. Your employees use a small 4-wheeled hand truck to bring supplies into
the laboratory. They have to bring the load up_ a ramp. Should they
pull it or push it up?
6-S-42
-------
Lesson 7
-------
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
SAFETY MANAGEMENT TRAINING PROGRAM
LESSON:
Electrical
No. 7
Time: 2 hours
Objectives; This lesson will enable the trainee to recognize electrical
hazards in his work area and to take the action required to
prevent accidents and injuries to personnal.
Content: This lesson covers the general requirements of the National
Electrical Code (NEC) of 1971. This document has been adopted
by OSHA as the source of standard for electrical installation.
Methods:
Lecture, Discussion, Questions.
References: National Electrical Code, 1971 Edition.
7-S-l
-------
LESSON: Electrical
Introduction Electricity is a convenient source of energy. Unlike steam
and other sources, use of electricity allows equipment to
be arranged to improve efficiency and safety without the
restraints imposed by complex and hazardous mechanical
power transmission systems. Of course, electricity has a
number of other advantages, but in this course we are pri-
marily concerned with the safety of electricity and its
use.
Hazards Despite its advantages over other power sources, elec-
tricity can create serious hazards. The supervisor must
be able to identify conditions and work practices which
are potential sources of electrical hazards.
Electrical energy can cause personal injury or fires.
Personal injuries— The most common injury is shock. A very small
Shock amount of electricity passing through your body
will give you a shock. If enough electricity
passes through a person's heart, he or she will
be killed. Even ordinary household power and
light circuits carry enough electricity to kill
a person.
A mild shock is not usually fatal but it can
cause muscle contractions which may cause a
person to lose his balance and fall, or react
in a manner that could cause serious Injury.
Being struck Switches and overcurrent protection devices for
heavy machinery operate suddenly, often unex-
pectedly, and with great force. If an employee
in the vicinity gets hit by the operating handle
of one of these devices, he will receive a hard,
severe blow.
Fire Overloaded electrical equipment, including wiring,
gets very hot and may start a fire. Sparks from
equipment operating near combustibles can also
start fires.
Hazard control— Electrical hazards can be readily.controlled and abated
National Electrical if the equipment installation, design, and operating
Code procedures for your establishment adhere to the standards
set forth in the National Electrical Code (NEC). These
NEC standards have been adopted by OSHA. Buildings in
most locations will conform to this code. You, as super-
visor, will have to enforce safe practices.
7-S-2
-------
LESSON: Electrical
Voltage, current, The important characteristics of all electrical circuits
power, and are (1) voltage, (2) amperes or current, (3) watts or
resistance power, and (4) ohms or resistance. In circuits which use
alternating current (AC), another characteristic of im-
portance is Hertz (Hz), which is the frequency in cycles
per second.
Voltage is the "pressure" which causes electricity
to flow through a circuit.
Every electrical circuit requires an electrical
path from one terminal of the power source to
the load (the device that uses the power) and
a return path from the load to the other ter-
minal of the power source or to ground. The
voltage is the difference in "electrical pres-
sure) between the two power source terminals.
The "ground" is literally the earth and is
always at 0 voltage.
Current or amperage is the rate of flow of elec-
tricity through a circuit.
Ohmage is the resistance or impedance to the flow
of electricity through a circuit.
The Power that flows through a circuit is equal to
the product of the voltage and the amperage, and
is measured in watts. One horsepower equals about
750 watts.
Most electrical circuits that you will see will be 60
hertz alternating current at 110 or 220 volts. A 100-watt
light bulb draws about one amp. One-tenth ampere
passing through your body can be fatal.
Avoiding shock A person receives an electrical shock if his (her) body
becomes a part of an electrical circuit. To do this,
one part of the body must be touching an exposed live
electrical conductor and another part of the body touching
an exposed conductor at a different voltage. The second
conductor may be a piece of metal that is grounded, or
it can be the earth itself. If the person's skin is
wet, the shock will be more severe.
Exposed parts One way of preventing shock, then, is to have all
out of reach live electrical parts or conductors covered with
non-conducting {insulation) material.
The NEC requires that live parts within 7 feet
vertically and 5 feet horizontally of a work
7-S-3
-------
LESSON: Electrical
area be insulated or enclosed.
Report exposed AS a supervisor, then, you should report exposed live
live parts electrical parts that your employees can readily
touch inadvertently or otherwise in the course of
their work.
Even if the exposed parts are out of reach,
caution the employees about using metal rods
and the like that can accidentally reach these
parts.
Do not enter If there is an enclosure around the parts (fuse
enclosures box, junction box, or fence) do not permit an
employee to open the enclosure unless he is a
trained electrician.
Use protective The trained electrician will take some additional
equipment precautions when working around exposed live parts.
He may use rubber gloves to insulate his hands
from the parts. He may also use an insulating
mat or wear insulated shoes to prevent body
contact with the ground, or a piece of metal
connected to ground.
Non-grounded parts Defective insulation of conductors inside of an elec-
trical machine can allow the current to flow to the
normally non-current carrying parts of the machine
such as the case or handle. These parts then become
exposed live parts and are as dangerous as bare
conductors. The NEC requires that exposed non-
current carrying parts of electrical machines be
electrically connected to the ground.
When this is done, if there is an insulation
failure, the stray current will flow to the
ground through the electrical connection. The
ground connection must be of such little
resistance that it will permit enough current
to flow to cause the circuit overcurrent pro-
tection device (which we will discuss later) to
open a switch and cut the power to the circuit.
Equipment grounds Electrical equipment non-current carrying parts may
be grounded in several ways.
• The case of the machine may be connected
to a grounding terminal. The grounding ter-
minal may be a metal stake driven deep into
the ground or it may be a cold water pipe.
7-S-4
-------
LESSON: Electrical
A third wire may be connected to the case
and run alongside the conductors to the
ground wire at the receptacle. Equipments
that have three-pronged plugs use this
method. DO NOT USE EQUIPMENT WITH THE THIRD
PRONG BROKEN OFF. The receptacle looks like
this.
Neutral , ,
Ground
The right hand slot is the terminal from
which the current flows. The left hand slot
is the terminal for the return path. It is
also grounded. The circular hole is the
grounding terminal. Your electrician should
check the receptacles to be sure that they
are wired as shown. There is a handy
receptacle tester for doing this.
For some older buildings, an adapter that
will take a three-pronged plug and permit it
to be used in a two-pronged receptacle is
used. The adapter must be connected to the
face plate of the receptacle by a small wire.
The face plate must be grounded.
Another permissible method of avoiding shock
from non-current carrying exposed parts is
to use double insulated equipment. The
equipment nameplate will clearly show this.
Ground Fault Another safety device that is used is the
Interrupter Ground Fault Interrupter (GFI). If a very small
amount of current leaks from the internal con-
ductors to the grounding conductor, the GFI will
cut. off the power to the machine. Check with the
facilities management branch to determine if your
worksite requires such protection and if it is
so protected.
When to call for As supervisor, you should immediately call an
help electrician if any of the following occur:
7-S-5
-------
LESSON: Electrical
• You touch the case of an appliance or machine
and get even a slight shock.
• The circuit breaker or fuse often opens the
circuit when you use a certain machine.
• A GFI often opens the circuit.
Protection against The handles of circuit breakers and automatic switches
being struck usually move with considerable force. They should be
enclosed or guarded in some manner so that a passerby
or worker does not get hit by the handle when the switch
or breaker opens.
Another reason to protect the handles is to prevent
someone from inadvertently opening the switch or
breaker. If this is done with considerable power
flowing through the circuit, a bad arc that could
burn the individual or start a fire would be formed.
Therefore, keep combustibles clear of switches, etc.
Do not store combustibles within the enclosures.
As supervisor, you should try to have guards installed
around such switches or circuit breakers. If this
cannot be done, then take steps to keep your people
clear of them and also keep combustibles well clear.
Overcurrent Electrical conductors and machinery are designed to carry
protection a rated load. If a 1/4 horsepower motor, for example, is
given a load of 1 horsepower, it will try to carry that
load but will probably burn itself up in the process. It
will draw more current, since the voltage is constant and
the excess current will only heat the electrical con-
ductors to the point where they will break.
Fire hazard This causes quite a fire hazard. You often hear of
a fire starting because electrical conductors within
a wall raised a combustible material to its ignition
temperature and the material started burning.
Fuse A fuse is a part of a conductor in a
circuit. When too much current flows through
the fuse, the fuse heats up quickly and the
conductor breaks. By quickly, this means
within a fraction of a second.
Circuit breaker A circuit breaker is a switch that is placed in
a circuit that will open automatically if too
much current flows through the switch.
7-S-6
-------
LESSON: Electrical
NEC permits a
25% overload
Conductors must be
able to carry the
overload.
Supervisor's means
of detecting
overloads
The NEC requires that all circuits be equipped
with fuses or circuit breakers that will open if
the actual current flow in a circuit exceeds the
expected current flow by 25%.
Thus, if a circuit is expected to carry a normal
load of 16 amperes, the fuse or circuit breaker
must be rated at 20 amperes.
Further, the conductors in the circuit must be
able to carry the 25% excess load without
overheating.
As a supervisor, you should caution your people to
avoid overloading circuits. Even if the overcurrent
protection devices function properly and prevent the
fire or heat hazard being created, there is still
the inconvenience caused by power interruption and
resetting the breaker or replacing the fuse. Here
are some of the ways of detecting circuit overloads.
Hot running
machines
Frequent
functioning of
overcurrent pro-
tection devices
Do not install
a bigger fuse
Warm extension
cord
Other signs of
abnormal heat
Poor insulation
If. an electrical machine (othe.r t^an a heating
device) is so hot that you cannot hold your
hand on it, have an electrician check it.
If a circuit breaker or fuse interrupts the
circuit very often, you are probably over-
loading it. In such a case, try to determine
if a particular machine is the one that is
causing the interruption. It might be that
you have too many appliances or other machines
plugged in to that particular circuit.
Under no circumstances is the practice of
using a larger fuse or circuit breaker to
prevent interruption acceptable.
If an extension cord gets warm while it is being
used, it may be overloaded.
If you notice evidence of abnormal heat in a cable
bank, junction box, or fuse box or on any con-
ductor, there may be an overload or bad connection
somewhere. Report such an occurrence to the
maintenance electrician.
Poor insulation can contribute to circuit overloads.
If the insulation of a conductor is worn or frayed,
it can provide a path for current to another con-
ductor. This flow of current can be great enough to
overload the circuit. The attendant sparks in such
cases can also be sources of ignition.
7-S-7
-------
LESSON: Electrical
Report these Signs of worn or frayed insulation or conductors
conditions should be reported. Do not use extension cords
in this condition.
Extension cords Extension cords are a form of temporary wiring and are not
a substitute for permanent wiring. You should request to
have a permanent receptacle installed in an area rather
than always resorting to the use of an extension cord.
If this is not practicable, keep the following in mind:
Capacity Be sure that the extension cord has sufficient
capacity to carry the load. The nameplate of
the machine should give the rated load and the
cord should give its own capacity.
Plugs fit Be sure that the plugs fit into the receptacle
securely securely. When detaching the cord from the
receptacle, pull on the plug, not on the cord.
Prevent damage Keep the cord clear so that people do not trip
to the cord over it or that carts, etc., do not roll over
it or that the cord insulation is not abraded
on rough surfaces or sharp corners.
Hazardous locations The National Electrical Code identifies six specific
hazardous locations. The locations are hazardous by
virtue of the fact that flammable gases, vapors, dusts,
or fibers are present.
An ignition source in such areas could cause a disaster.
Division 1 Division 2
Class I Hazardous concentrations Hazardous concen-
of gases/vapors exist trations of gases/
normally. vapors may exist
accidentally.
Class II Hazardous concentrations Excessive amounts
of flammable dusts are of flammable
airborne. dusts are present.
Class III Materials producing Materials pro-
ignitable fibers are ducing ignitable
processed. fibers are
stored.
Hazards and the In Class I, Divisions 1 and 2; and in Classes II and
general NEC III, Division 1, the hazard is the likelihood of
requirement the gases, vapors, dusts, or fibers creating an
7-S-8
-------
LESSON: Electrical
explosive atmosphere. Ignition sources must not be
present in these areas.
In Classes II and III, Division 2, the hazard is the
likelihood of fire. Sources of ignition must not be
present, and all electrical machinery must be ven-
tilated to prevent the operating temperature from
exceeding 248° F.
Possible hazardous It is possible for two EPA facilities to be Class I,
locations Division 2 hazardous locations.
A volatile flammable liquid spilled (1) in a
flammable liquid handling or storage area or (2) in
a battery charging area.
General Here are the general characteristics of electrical equip-
characteristics ment used in hazardous locations.
Electrical machinery including motors and switches
must be enclosed so that sparks cannot reach the
atmosphere.
Wiring should be housed in conduit.
Extension cords must be positively held in place
in the receptacle. The connection must be in a
sealed box.
An adequate cooling system must be provided for
electrical machinery to keep temperatures low. The
system must be isolated from the hazardous location
atmosphere.
Static For a variety of reasons, static electrical charges build
electricity UP on objects. When the object is placed near another
object (or vice versa) that does not have approximately the
same amount of charges built up, a spark will jump. This
spark is a source of ignition and can ignite a combustible
atmosphere.
You have experienced receiving a shock indoors on
a cold day when you have walked across a rug, then
touched a door knob or other metal object. The
shock comes from static electricity.
In Class I hazardous locations, it is necessary to
have all metal objects grounded so that static elec-
trical charges cannot accumulate.
7-S-9
-------
LESSON: Electrical
Bonding
When transferring flammable liquids from one container
to another, it is a good practice to "bond" the two
containers together. Bonding means that the two containers
are connected together electrically. Thus, static
electricity that might build up on one container will
flow to the other container and eliminate the possibility
of the creation of a spark. Slide 7-1 shows typical
methods of bonding.
BOND WIRE NECESSARY EXCEPT WHERE CONTAINERS ARE
INHERENTLY BONDED TOGETHER, - OR ARRANGEMENT IS
SUCH THAT FILL STEM IS ALWAYS IN METALLIC CONTACT
WITH RECEIVING CONTAINER DURING TRANSFER.
METAL STRIPS
FASTENED TO
FLOOR "^V
\
\
Bonding during container filling permits safe discharge of any static
electricity generated. Courtesy Notional Fire Protection Association
7-S-10
-------
LESSON: Electrical
Fueling vehicles When fueling vehicles with gasoline (aircraft,
for example) the aircraft shall be grounded,
the fuel truck shall be grounded, and a bonding
connection between the aircraft and the fueling
vehicle provided. This assures that there is
no difference in the charge on the aircraft and
on the fueling vehicle.
Supervisor's In the event of a spill of a volatile flammable liquid,
responsibilities get rid of all sources of ignition immediately until the
spill can be cleaned up.
In a laboratory, heaters, burners, any arcing equip-
ment, should be turned off.
If a motor or other electrical machinery is running
that is not explosion-proof, turn it off.
It would be preferable if you could cut off the
power to all receptacles from a switch outside
of the laboratory.
If you store flammable liquids in a refrigerator,
you must be sure that the refrigerator is ex-
plosion-proof. This would include the switch
that operates the inner light.
In a battery charging area, the most likely area for
hydrogen to be present in explosive quantities is in
the immediate area of the battery, particularly while
it is being charged. Therefore, it would be better
to disconnect the charging cables from the receptacles
rather than at the battery. If you have to disconnect
at the battery, wait until a few minutes after the
charge is completed before disconnecting the cables.
Electric heaters Electric heaters should have tip-over protection. The
face of the heater should be protected with a screen so
that persons cannot put their fingers into it.
7-S-ll
-------
LESSON: Electrical
QUESTIONS
1. You will get a shock if electricity can through your body.
2. Why can a bird sit on a bare high voltage power line without injury?
3. You should exercise special care in working with electrical equipment
in areas.
4. Electrical personal protective equipment is usually made of ,
It provides .
5. Name two ways in which electrical machinery may be grounded.
6. You suspect that a wall receptacle in the laboratory is not wired
correctly. How would you have it checked?
7. Where would you look to find out if a piece of equipment is double
insulated?
8. What will a Ground Fault Interrupter do if there is a break in
insulation to the case of a grounded machine?
9. Electrical equipment enclosures shall not be used for
7-S-12
-------
LESSON: Electrical
10. An overloaded circuit or machine generates
11. What do you do if a circuit breaker or fuse frequently cuts off the
power?
12. How much overload should a fuse permit in a circuit?
13. Give two indications of overloaded circuits.
14. What two things should you look for when inspecting conductors?
15. What should you consider in using extension cords (two items)?
16. Remove a plug from a receptacle by pulling on the not on
the . .
17. The hazards for hazardous locations are and
18. Laboratory electrical fixtures should be
if volatile flammable liquids are
19. When fueling aircraft the aircraft and the fueling vehicle should be
connected together .
20. When you are finished charging batteries disconnect the cables at the
not at the •
7-S-13
-------
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
SAFETY MANAGEMENT TRAINING PROGRAM
LESSON: Occupational Noise No. 8 Time: 1/2 hour
Objective; Completion of this lesson will enable the trainee to identify
the existence of noise levels near or above the permissible
exposures and to take the necessary action to reduce the
exposure to an acceptable level.
Content; This lesson discusses the effect on personnel of exposure to
noise levels in excess of that considered to be safe. The
characteristics of sound which affect the exposure, the noise
levels of known sounds, permissible noise levels, personnel
protective equipment and general noise controls are covered.
Methods; Lecture, discussion, questions.
References: 29 CFR 1910.95—Occupational Safety and Health Standards.
National Safety Council, Accident Prevention Manual.
National Safety Council, Fundamentals of Industrial Hygiene.
Materials; Slide Projector (35 mm) and screen.
Slides: 8-1 thru 8-3
8-S-l
-------
LESSON: Occupational Noise
OCCUPATIONAL NOISE EXPOSURES
Noise Noise is unwanted sound. It is caused by vibration conducted
through solids, liquids, and gases.
Hearing When a sound wave enters the ear, your mechanisms of
hearing pick it up and transform it into signals that
the auditory nerve carries to the brain. Your brain
interprets the signal as a sensation of sound.
Reactions to noise Sounds affect people differently. One person may con-
sider a particular sound pleasant, while another may
consider it irritating. One person may consider the
same sound pleasant at one time and annoying at another
time.
Occupational noises Noise in the workplace comes from many sources. Poorly
maintained or adjusted machinery may be noisy—a
bearing that needs lubrication, an unbalanced rotating
part, or a worn out muffler are examples of noise
sources that can be avoided. A jack hammer or jet
engine will be noisy regardless of their condition.
Hazards of noise The effects, or hazards, of occupational noise exposure
exposure include:
SLIDE 8-1: EFFECTS OF NOISE EXPOSURE
• TEMPORARY/PERMANENT HEARING LOSS
• PSYCHOLOGICAL DISORDERS
• INTERFERENCE WITH COMMUNICATIONS
• JOB PERFORMANCE DISRUPTION
Exposure to noise at excessive levels for prolonged
periods will reduce your ability to hear.
Exposure to noise may cause workers to become nervous,
jumpy or fearful.
Excessive noise interferes with normal and necessary
communications.
The overall effect of noise is to distract the worker
from doing his job the best he can.
The basic characteristics of sound that cause adverse
effects are intensity, frequency, and duration.
8-S-2
-------
LESSON: Occupational Noise
Intensity of sound
Inverse square law
Decibels
Sound level meter
Sound intensity is the "loudness" or "softness" of a
noise. This is also called "sound pressure" or "sound
level."
Sound intensity increases or decreases by the
square of the distance from the source. If the
distance to the same sound source is doubled the
loudness or intensity will be only 1/4 as much.
The intensity of sound is measured in decibel
(dB) units.
On the decibel scale, zero dB is the
least sound that one can hear. Sounds
of 120 dB or greater cause physical pain.
OSHA permits a maximum exposure of 90 dBA
for an 8-hour day, 40-hour week. EPA plans
to reduce this to 85 dBA.
The sound level meter is the basic instrument
used for measuring noise intensity. A trained
safety and health official should be used to
determine noise levels in the workplace.
This chart gives the intensities in decibels of common
noises.
Equipment
20-ton truck
Conveyor belt for mining
Wood router
Paper cutter
Newspaper press
Tractor for farming
Corrugated band saw
Blast furnace
Furnace pump for
petroleum refining
Drop hammer
Textile loom
Bulldozer
Riveting machine
Cut-off saw
150-ton electric furnace
Jackhammer drill
Oxygen torch
dBA
92
93
93
96
97
98
99
100
103
105
106
110
110
112
112
113
120
8-S-3
-------
LESSON: Occupational Noise
If you can carry on a conversation in a normal tone
of voice the noise is acceptable. If you have to
shout a few inches from someone's ear the noise is
too loud.
Frequency of sound The second basic characteristic of sound is its pitch
or tone which depends on the frequency of the sound.
Frequency is the number of vibrations per second that
generate the sound, and is measured in cycles per
second or Hertz.
The human ear is more sensitive to sounds of certain
frequencies. The intensity of a sound or noise is
measured for our purpose at those frequencies to
which the ear is more sensitive.
8-S-4
-------
LESSON: Occupational Noise
Duration of sound The third characteristic of sound that cases adverse
effects is its duration. The longer the duration of
the sound the worse the effect.
There are two types of noise, classified according to
their duration: impact (or impulse) noise, and con-
tinuous noise.
Impact noise (1) Impact noise consists of single sounds, called
pulses. These pulses of sound can be repetitive
or non repetitive.
Repetitive impact noise occurs in the
operation of a rivet gun or a pneumatic
hammer. The impact of a drop hammer
or the firing of a gun are examples of
non-repetitive impact noise.
Continuous noise (2) Continuous or steady-state noise consists of
sound that continues without breaking. It may
have variations in intensity providing the peaks
are at intervals of 1 second or less.
OSHA standards: OSHA standards are geared to the prevention of occupationally
1910.95 induced hearing loss. The standards require that exposures
shall not exceed the values in Slide 8-2 (Table G-16):
SLIDE 8-2; PERMISSIBLE NOISE EXPOSURES
Sound Level
Duration per dBA*
day (hours) (slow response)
8 90
6 92
4 95
3 97
2 100
1-1/2 102
1 105
1/2 110
1/4 or less 115
* Sound level in decibels as measured on a
standard level meter operating on the A-
weighted network with slow meter responses.
8-S-5
-------
LESSON: Occupational Noise
When the daily noise exposure is composed of two or
more periods of noise exposure of different levels,
their combined effect must be considered. If the
sum of the following fractions
c, c c
1 , £ . n
T T T T
Ll A2 n
is greater than 1, then the mixed exposure is consi-
dered to be excessive.
Cn = the time of each exposure.
T = the time for that exposure level from
n table G-16.
Exposure to impulsive or impact noise should not exceed
140 dB peak level.
If it is not practicable to reduce the noise levels below
the values in Table G-16, personnel protective equipment.
shall be used. It is of two types:
National Safety Ear plugs which may reduce the noise level by as much
Council, Accident as 30 dB and ear muffs which may reduce the noise
Prevention Manual, level by as much as 40 dB. The specific reduction
Chap. 38. depends on the frequency of the noise.
In addition, if the sound levels exceed 90 dBA, a continuing,
effective hearing conservation program shall be conducted.
The program should include periodic monitoring of
the hearing ability of exposed personnel.
National Safety Noise can be controlled at three places. Slide 8-3
Council, Accident illustrates where and how".
Prevention Manual,
Chap. 45.
8-S-6
-------
LESSON: Occupational Noise
SLIDE 8-3
NOISE SOURCE
I ENCLOSURE \-%k
I RESILIENT |
VIBRATION Hi
I MOUNTING I
I J
•> 1 • DATIJ
/T
REFLECTED
FROM
CEILING
| 1
| ACOUSTICAL 1
I TILE N,
1 J\
DIRECT AIR PATH
REFLECTED
FROM
FLOOR
[ FLOOR
1 TILE
i 1
/
: KEV.EIVEK »-
I
V00Z0Z00%V0V00%00W,
\{ PERSONAL | \\
H PROTECTION: , KV ^
1 PLUGS, MUFFS | \l I
' 1 _] 1 V ^
\\ *™
1 1 x^
-~\ ENCLOSURE 1 ^
l_ j
REDUCTION OF NOISE
AT SOURCE BY:
1. Acoustical design
a. Decrease energy for driving vi-
brating system.
b. Change coupling between this
energy and acoustical radiating
system.
c. Change structure so leu sound is
radiated.
2. Substitution with less noisy equip-
ment.
3. Change in method of processing.
REDUCTION OF NOISE
BY CHANGES IN PATH:
1. Increase distance between source
and receiver.
2. Acoustical treatment of ceiling.walli
and floor to absorb sound and re-
duce reverberation.
3. Enclosure of noise source.
REDUCTION OF NOISE
AT RECEIVER BY:
1. Personal protection.
2. Enclosures — isolating the worker.
3. Rotation of personnel to reduce ex-
posure time.
4. Changing job schedules.
8-S-7
-------
LESSON: Occupational Noise
QUESTIONS
1. Name the three basic characteristics of noise.
2. Sound intensity is measured in
3. Two sound sources give off noise of 80 dB each. What is their
combined noise level?
4. You are working 4 feet from a noise source and the intensity is 93 dBA.
What is the intensity 8 feet away? 16 feet away?
5. You are exposed to 92 dBA for 2 hours and 97 dB for 1 hour. Is this
permissible?
6. A noise source varies in intensity. The peaks occur every 0.8 second.
What kind of noise is it?
7. The noise level is 125 dBA. How long can a worker be there with ear
muffs? ' Ear plugs?
8-S-8
-------
Lesson 9
-------
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
SAFETY MANAGEMENT TRAINING PROGRAM
Sanitation and Sanitary Laboratory
LESSON: Practices
No. 9 Time: x/2 hour
Objectives; Completion of this lesson will enable the trainee to identify
proper sanitation procedures for agency laboratory and person-
al service rooms and to recognize whether or not procedures
being used represent a hazard to employees.
Content; This lesson covers standards for workplace sanitation,
and additional material covering safety showers, waste disposal,
cleaning of laboratory equipment, and employee education.
Emphasis is placed on the supervisor's responsibility for
proper maintenance and use of facilities by employees.
Methods:
Lecture, discussion, questions.
References; 29 CFR 1910.141—Occupational Safety and Health Standards.
The Chemical Rubber Co., Handbook of Laboratory Safety.
National Safety Council, Fundamentals of Industrial Hygiene.
National Safety Council, Accident Prevention Manual, Chap. 3.9.
9-S-l
-------
LESSON: Sanitation
IMPORTANCE OF SANITATION
Proper sanitary procedures must be followed in the labora-
tory to ensure that employee health is not endangered.
These procedures include the following:
Storing and eating food and beverages in areas free of
unsanitary conditions or toxic contaminants.
Use of showers and change rooms after working in a
contaminated area.
Washing of protective clothing in a controlled area.
Disposal of laboratory wastes in the prescribed manner.
Thorough cleaning of laboratory equipment; not using
it for food/drink service.
Frequent washing of hands, particularly before eating,
drinking, or smoking.
SUPERVISOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
National Safety The OSHA standards cover the type and number of sanitary
Council, Fundamen- facilities that must be provided in your facility. As a
tals of Industrial supervisor, you are responsible for making sure that these
Hygiene, pp. 668- sanitary facilities are well-maintained and properly used.
669. Your responsibilities include the following:
To instruct employees periodically on precautions,
procedures, and practices to follow to prevent acci-
dental exposure to harmful agents.
To make sure that meticulous housekeeping practices
are developed and employed at all times. Good house-
keeping is essential to laboratory sanitation.
To make sure that food, candy, beverages, other
edibles and tobacco are not stored or consumed
in work areas where toxic materials may be present.
To administer appropriate disciplinary action when
regulations are violated.
To inform promptly the appropriate official in
your agency of any operation or condition for
which existing sanitary facilities seem inadequate.
9-S-2
-------
LESSON: Sanitation
29 CFR 1910.141—
Occupational Safety
and Health Standards.
OSHA STANDARDS
The OSHA standards which give certain basic requirements for
sanitation in the workplace are found in 29 CFR 1910.141.
As a supervisor, you should be aware of these requirements,
keeping in mind that it is your responsibility to ensure
that these facilities are well-maintained and properly used.
Toilet Facilities
The OSHA standards require adequate toilet facilities,
separate for each sex, according to the following table:
Number of
Employees
1-15
16 - 35
36 - 55
56 - 80
81 - 110
111 - 150
Over 150
Number of
Water Closets
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 for each addit-
ional 40 employees
Lavatories. At least one lavatory is required for each
three toilet facilities. The number of lavatories required
per number of employees is shown in the following table:
Type of Employment
Non-industrial—office,
public, similar buildings
Industrial—factories,
warehouses, loft build-
ings, etc.
Number of
Employees
1-15
16 - 35
36 - 60
61 - 90
91 - 125
Over 125
1 - 100
Over 100
Number of
Lavatories
for each addition-
al 45 employees
1 for each 10
employees
1 for each 15
additional
employees
Toilet and lavatory facilities must be easy to clean. Adequate
supplies of toilet paper, soap, and clean towels must be
provided.
9-S-3
-------
LESSON: Sanitation
Showers
It may be necessary to provide facilities for workers to
shower and change clothes before going home. If so, one
shower is required for each 10 employees of each sex using
showers during the same shift. Hot and cold running water,
soap, and clean towels must be provided.
Change Rooms
Where employees must wear protective clothing to prevent
contamination from toxic or infectious materials, change
rooms must be provided. Provision must be made for separ-
age storage of street clothes and protective clothing and
for proper disposal or cleaning of protective clothing to
limit the spread of the toxic contaminant.
Food Consumption
OSHA standards forbid the consumption of food or beverages
in a toilet room or in any area exposed to toxic materials.
Provision must be made for keeping food out of the labora-
tory and change rooms. Suitable storage facilities for
lunches and coffee facilities should be provided.
The Chemical Rubber
Co., Handbook of
Laboratory Safety,
Sec. 2.7.
EYE WASH AND SAFETY SHOWERS
Eye wash and safety showers are required where there are
hazards from acids, caustics, cryogenic fluids, clothing
fires, or other emergencies where volumes of water are
needed for diluting, warming or cooling, flushing off
chemicals, or putting out clothing fires.
Safety showers should be easily accessible and conspicuously
located. They should be tested at least every six months.
Laboratory personnel must be notified in advance at any
time when the safety showers must be turned off for mainten-
ance on the building water supply. You will probably be
responsible for informing your people.
WASTE DISPOSAL
Wastes in the laboratory are a source of a number of hazards,
particularly if they are simply poured into the regular
sewage system. In addition to the hazards from toxic and/or
infectious materials, the following must be considered:
9-S-4
-------
LESSON: Sanitation
Fire and explosive hazards of flammable and
combustible liquids and vapors.
Severe corrosion to drainage piping.
Severe reactions of chemicals with water
or when mixed with other chemicals.
Effects on public health.
The Chemical Rubber A "Waste Disposal Index" should be maintained that
Co., Handbook of would quickly provide a guide for the disposal of various
Laboratory Safety, chemicals. It could be in the form of a card file of
Sec. 1.10. materials commonly used in the laboratory. It should give
the hazards of each material plus the proper method of
disposal. This reference makes it possible for the super-
visor to know immediately how to handle any type of material
or situation.
A laboratory waste disposal manual lists 1171 chemicals with
instructions for their disposal. It is available from the
Manufacturing Chemists Association. This manual will pro-
vide a good basis for your Waste Disposal Index.
This subject will be covered in more detail in Lesson 16.
CLEANING OF LABORATORY EQUIPMENT
Established procedures exist within your laboratory for
the cleaning and sterilizing of laboratory equipment. As
a supervisor, you must be familiar with these procedures.
You also must be sure that your employees understand the
importance of such procedures and follow the prescribed
rules at all times.
EMPLOYEE EDUCATION IN SAFETY PROCEDURES
The Chemical Rubber The need for sound sanitary practices in the laboratory
Co., Handbook of must be well-understood by employees. They must be aware
Laboratory Safety, of the dangers and realize the importance of rules aimed
Sec. 10.2. at preventing direct contact with harmful materials.
Standard basic procedural rules include the following:
Never do direct mouth pipetting of infectious
or toxic materials; use a pipettor.
Never use laboratory glassware for drinking glasses.
Keep hands away from mouth, nose, eyes, and face.
9-S-5
-------
LESSON: Sanitation
Sterilize discarded pipettes and syringes in the pan
where they were first placed after use.
Never leave a discarded tray of infected material
unattended.
Sterilize all contaminated discarded material.
Before and after injecting an animal, swab the site
of injection with a disinfectant.
Avoid filling centrifuge tubes to the point that the
rim becomes wet with culture.
Shake broth cultures in a manner that avoids wetting
the plug or cap.
Equally important, although not so obvious, are rules design-
ed to prevent contaminants from becoming airborne. Sanitation
techniques, as well as containment devices, are necessary to
control the release of toxic gases or vapors or microbial
aerosols into the laboratory atmosphere.
9-S-6
-------
LESSON: Sanitation
QUESTIONS
1. As a supervisor, what are your major responsibilities in regard to
laboratory sanitary facilities?
2. According to OSHA standards, a laboratory employing 25 women and 50
men must have how many toilet facilities?
3. OSHA standards require one lavatory for each toilet facilities,
4. What is the purpose of a Waste Disposal Index?
5. Why should employees never use laboratory glassware for drinking glasses?
6. As a supervisor, you must enforce the rules regarding safe areas for
food consumption in your facility. Name three areas where employees
must not eat or drink.
9-S-7
-------
Lesson 1O
-------
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
SAFETY MANAGEMENT TRAINING PROGRAM
LESSON: Handling, Storage and Transportation of
Hazardous Materials
No. 10
Time: 1 hour
Objective; On completion of this lesson the trainee will be able
to determine how to handle, store and ship quantities
of hazardous materials in accordance with regulations
that govern the specific type of carrier that is being
used.
Content: This lesson will cover the rules and regulations laid
down by the Postal Service, Federal Aviation Administra-
tion, Federal Highway Administration, Federal Railroad
Administration and the U. S. Coast Guard.
Methods: Lecture, discussion, questions.
References: 49 CFR 172 and 173—Transportation.
Dangerous Properties of Industrial Materials—Irving Sax.
Materials: Slide Projector (35mm) and screen.
Slides 10-1, 10-2.
10-S-l
-------
Handling, Storage and Transportation
r it 1 «* . ..
of Hazardous Materials
Introduction Federal agencies, principally those in the Department
of Transportation, are responsible for regulating the
packaging, labelling, and shipping of Hazardous Materials.
If you are required to ship such materials you must
comply with the appropriate regulations. If at all
practicable, you must check with an EPA transportation
officer or you might call the Department of Transportation,
Office of Hazardous Materials, Regulations Division,
(202-426-2075) to assure that you are in compliance.
It is not possible in a one-hour lesson to go through
shipping regulations for all of the hazardous materials
that you might handle. We have presented the general
requirements for packaging, marking and labelling of
various classes of hazardous materials.
For each class of hazardous material we have given
the designation of the DOT specification for specific
types of containers. Therefore, if you need to ship
a corrosive liquid you may refer to this text and,
knowing the amount that you want to ship, pick
the outside container that most closely fits your
needs and the DOT specification that covers the
container. Then you order a container that complies
with that specification and follow the manufacturer's
instructions for filling, sealing, etc.
In addition, we have prepared a list of frequently
used hazardous materials and appended the list to this
lesson. It gives the name, the class of material,
whether or not the material can be exempt from com-
pliance with DOT specifications and regulations, the
maximum capacity that can be carried in a passenger
aircraft and in a freight aircraft, highway truck
or by railway express.
We have also presented a set of definitions of the
hazardous materials with an illustration of the type
of label required for each one.
Subpart A of Subpart A of 49 CFR 173 covers the preparation of articles
49 CFR 173 for transportation by carriers by rail freight, rail
express, highway, or water.
Prohibited This article lists situations under which hazardous
packaging materials cannot be shipped on the above carriers.
49 CFR 173.21
Two or more hazardous materials in the same
outside container which, if mixed, would be
liable to cause the dangerous evolution of
heat, gas, or corrosive materials.
10-S-2
-------
LESSON- Handlin8» Storage and Transportation
of Hazardous Materials
Any material which under conditions of trans-
portation would become unstable or decompose
to cause dangerous evolution of heat or gas.
If the material can be stabilized or
inhibited (refrigeration is an acceptable
stabilizer) it may be shipped.
A cigarette lighter charged with fuel and
equipped with the ignition element or any
other similar heating, lighting or ignition
device.
Article This article gives standard requirements for
49 CFR 173.24 packaging. In brief, it covers the items listed in
Slide 10-1. .
Slide 10-1 Slide 10-1: PACKAGING SPECIFICATIONS
• No Reduction in Effectiveness
During Shipment
• Proper Markings
• Acceptable Grade of Steel or Lumber
• Fabrication in a Workmanlike Manner
• Fastener^, Gaskets, and Materials
Will Hold Up During Shipment
Under environmental conditions of transportation
there will be no reduction of the effectiveness
of the packaging from mixing of vapors or gases
or otherwise, nor any release of the contents of
the packaging.
Containers shall be clearly marked as follows:
Identification of the specification
(if any).
Name and address of the manufacturer or
user.
The marking shall be permanent in 1/2 inch
letters.
10-S-3
-------
LESSON- Handlin8» Storage and Transportation
of Hazardous Materials
Container construction is specified as
follows :
Steel used shall be low carbon,
commercial quality steel, stainless,
open hearth, electric, basic oxygen, or
similar quality.
Lumber shall be well seasoned,
commercially dry, free from decay, loose
knots, knots that would interfere with
nailing and other defects that would
materially lessen the strength.
Welding and brazing will be of good
workmanship .
Packaging materials and contents shall
not be of a type to start galvanic action.
Gaskets, fasteners and the materials in
general shall be such as to remain intact.
Re-use of Article 173.28 discusses the re-use of containers. The
containers gist of this article is that when re-using a container
49 CFR 173.28 you must be absolutely sure of these things:
The container meets the container specifications
for the material that you want to ship .
The container is in useable condition.
All residue from previous use of the container
has been removed.
The container is suitably marked.
Dfinitions For shipping purposes the Department of Transportation has
491 CFR 172.4 defined various classes of hazardous materials. The
materials that you are likely to ship are defined below.
The type of label required is shown. These labels are
4 inches on a side.
Flammable Liquid — a liquid whose flash point is at
or below 80° F.
10-S-4
-------
LESSON: Handling, Storage and Transportation
of Hazardous Materials
Black on Red
From FIRE.
HEAT >nd OPEN-ftam*
LIGHTS
LEAKING P«clug«t Mu«t b« Removed to • Stf» PlM*
Rail/Truck
Air
Flammable Solids—a solid material that is liable to
cause fires which burn so vigorously and persistently
as to create a transportation hazard. The labelling
is the same as for oxidizing materials.
Oxidizing material—a substance that yields oxygen
readily to stimulate the combustion of organic matter.
Black on Yellow
•/" / ANA/AY \ \
Rail/Truck
Air
10-S-5
-------
LESSON:
Handling, Storage and Transportation
of Hazardous Materials
Corrosive material—a material, liquid or solid that
causes visible destruction or invisible alterations
in human skin tissue at the site of contact; or a
liquid that has a high corrosion rate on materials
such as steel or aluminum. The label for RAIL/TRUCK
will state whether the material is acid, caustic,
or a corrosive liquid.
Black on White
Rail/Truck
Air
Compressed Gas—any material in a container at any
of the following pressures at the respective
temperatures:
Pressure(PSIA)
40
104
Temp. F
70
130
10-S-6
-------
LESSON:
Handling, Storage and Transportation
of Hazardous Materials
Green and Black
A
KEEP COOL
CAUTION
Rail/Truck
Air
Flammable compressed gas—a compressed gas which meets
criteria established by the Bureau of Explosives. In
general, it is a compressed gas which, if mixed with
air and once raised to its ignition temperature, will
ignite and burn or explode.
Black on Red
\
KEEP COOL "
CAUTION
Rail/Truck
Air
10-S-7
-------
LESSON: Handling, Storage and Transportation
of Hazardous Materials
Poison A—an extremely dangerous poison gas or
liquid. A very small amount of the gas or liquid
vapor mixed with air is dangerous to life.
Red printing on white
f
/ / WARNING! \\
/ / BEWARE OF FUMES \ \
< /POISON GAS >>
v
Poison B—a less dangerous poison in liquid or solid
form. They are known to be so toxic to man as to
afford a hazard to health during transportation.
The reaction may be caused if they are taken orally,
through inhalation, or absorption of the skin.
10-S-8
-------
LESSON:
Handling, Storage and Transportation
of Hazardous Materials
Red printing on White
.Rail/Truck
Air
Radioactive materials—the following materials fit
in this category:
Plutonium
Plutonium
Plutonium
Uranium
Uranium
238
239
241
233
235
These materials are further classified as FISSILE I,
II, or III depending upon the controls needed to
provide nuclear criticality safety during transporta-
tion. Labels are as follows:
10-S-9
-------
LESSON: Handling, Storage and Transportation
of Hazardous Materials
Black on white
red bars
Top half yellow
bottom half white
red bars
Shipping
Regulations
If you ship any of the hazardous materials defined above
they must be properly labelled and packaged in accordance
with shipping regulations. Further, you are only allowed
to ship certain quantities. Table 10-1 lists 36 chemical
materials which are used with some frequency in EPA. The
Table gives the class of the material in accordance with
the definitions above and the amount that can be shipped
by air in a passenger carrying aircraft and the amount
that can be carried by truck, railway express, or air
freight. The packaging regulations for each class of the
materials defined above are given below.
Containers shall not be filled completely with
flammable liquids. If they were, an increase in
temperature would cause the liquids to expand and
either burst the container or cause it to leak.
Slide 10-2 shows how you can determine what percentage
of the container must not be filled (the outage).
. Table 10-1 may be found at the end of this lesson.
10-S-10
-------
LESSON: Handling, Storage and Transportation
of Hazardous Materials
Coodlnq
temperature. ^*
:
— TS'P- iffU
~
^,TO>
j
-------
LESSON- Handlin8» Storage and Transportation
of Hazardous Materials
Those not exempt have the notation NO EX. in
the packaging column in Table 10-1.
Flammable liquids The flammable liquids with a flash point at or below
Flash Point 20° F shall be packed in containers that are of con-
20° F or below struction and design that will not react with or be
decomposed by the contents. Types of containers
permitted are:
Glass carboys up to 6.5 gallons.
DOT SPECIFICATION 1A, 1C, ID.
Kegs or barrels up to 5 gallons.
Metal barrels or drums with a 2.3 inch opening.
Drums of over 5 gallons capacity cannot be
shipped by rail express.
DOT SPECIFICATION 5,5A, 5B, 5C, 5M, 17C and 17E.
Wooden barrels or kegs with inside containers of
glass or earthenware of no more than 1 gallon
capacity or of metal pails, cans, etc., of not
over 2 gallons capacity.
DOT SPECIFICATION 10A, 11A or 11B.
Fiberboard boxes with inside containers of glass
or earthenware of not over 1 quart, or metal
cans of not over 1 gallon capacity. Wooden
boxes with inside metal containers of not over
10 gallons capacity or glass or earthenware
containers of not over one gallon capacity.
If there is only one inside glass/earthenware
container it may be of not more than 3 gallons
capacity.
DOT SPECIFICATION 15A, 15B, 15C, 16A, 19A, 19B.
Fiber and plywood drums may have a single inside
glass/earthenware container, suitably cushioned,
of up to 1 gallon capacity.
DOT SPECIFICATION 12B.
Rectangular metal cans with screwcap closure of
not over 1/2 gallon capacity may be used to ship
gasoline samples to state laboratories in
20 gage or heavier metal boxes. The containers
may be packed no more than 5 per box.
Flammable The liquids with flash points between 20° and 80° F
liquids. Flash shall be packed in containers that will not react with
point between the contents. Types of containers permitted are
20° and 80° F as follows:
10-S-12
-------
LESSON: Handling, Storage and Transportation
of Hazardous Materials
In fiberboard boxes with inside containers of no
more than one gallon capacity of glass, earthen-
ware, polyethelene or metal. The box shall
contain no more than 4 glass and earthenware
inside containers of over 5 pints capacity.
DOT SPECIFICATION 12B.
In fiberboard boxes with 1 or 2 inside rectangu-
lar metal containers of not over 5 gallons each.
DOT SPECIFICATION 12E.
In metal barrels or drums of Type 304 stainless
steel.
DOT SPECIFICATION 6K.
In steel drums with a polyethelene liner.
DOT SPECIFICATION 37P.
In non-reuseable steel drums authorized for a
commodity weighing not more than 10 pounds per
gallon.
DOT SPECIFICATION 37D.
Flammable solids
and oxidizing
material packing
173.152
Flammable solids and oxidizing materials must not
be packed in the same outside container with
corrosive liquids unless the corrosive liquids
are in bottles cushioned by incombustible
absorbant material in tightly closed metal
containers.
Exemptions
173.153
Inside containers must be cushioned to
prevent breakage.
Flammable solids and oxidizing materials of no
more than 1 pound in inside packaging and 25
pounds in outside packaging unless marked "NO
EXEMPTION" are exempt from packaging and
labelling requirements.
Liquid or solid organic peroxides except
acetyl benzoyl peroxide, solid and
benzoyl peroxide are exempt.
Strong outside containers having not over
1 pint or 1 pound net weight of material
in any one outside package and cushioned
with incombustible cushioning material.
If the material is in securely closed
plastic containers, not over one ounce
capacity, the cushioning material may be
omitted.
10-S-13
-------
LESSON- Handling. Storage and Transportation
of Hazardous Materials
Strong outside containers having not more
than 24 inside fiberboard containers, each
one having not more than 70 chemically
treated plastic tubes of not over 1/6 ounce
capacity and packed in incombustible cushion-
ing material. No fiberboard container shall
have more than 1 pint of liquid.
Flammable Here are some of the containers that may be used for
solids and flammable and solids and oxidizing materials.
oxidizing
materials Metal barrels or drums.
173.154 DOT SPECIFICATION 6A, 6B, 6C, 17G, 17E, 17H,
37A, 37B.
Wooden barrels or kegs.
DOT SPECIFICATIONS IDA, 10B, IOC, 11A or 11B.
Fiberboard outside containers with metal cans,
sliding lid wooden boxes, or fiber cans or boxes
of 5 pounds or less capacity, or glass bottles
of 1 pound or less capacity. Gross weight shall
not exceed 65 pounds.
DOT SPECIFICATION 12B.
Lined wooden boxes.
DOT SPECIFICATION ISA or 15B.
Wooden boxes with inside containers.
DOT SPECIFICATIONS 15A, 15B, 15C, 16A, 19A.
Fiber drums with authorized net weight of
225 pounds or less.
DOT SPECIFICATIONS 21C.
Plywood drums.
DOT SPECIFICATION 22A.
Plywood drums with inside metal drums.
DOT SPECIFICATION 22B.
Fiberboard boxes constructed of 275 pound test
double faced fiberboard with a perimeter liner
and bottom pad of 200 pound fiberboard; or
constructed of 350 pound fiberboard with top and
bottom pads. The product must be sealed in a
polyethylene or equivalent wrapping and not
exceed 25 pounds.
DOT SPECIFICATION 12B.
10-S-14
-------
LESSON: Handling, Storage and Transportation
of Hazardous Materials
Fiberboard boxes with inside glass bottles
of not over 5 pounds capacity each. Only 20
pounds permitted per outside container.
DOT SPECIFICATION 12A.
Fiberboard boxes with inside polyethylene bottles
not over 1 gallon capacity each. Only 4 gallons
permitted per outside container. Material must
not react with polyethylene.
Corrosive Material This section covers the packaging and shipment of corrosive
49 CFR 173.240 material.
Outage The requirement is not specific for outage. It simply
173.241 states that enough space will be left vacant to pre-
vent leakage or distortion due to increase in
temperature.
Bottles contain- This section lists corrosive liquids which must not
ing corrosive be packed with other articles. These are:
liquids
173.242 Nitric acid exceeding 40% concentration.
Hydrogen peroxide and perchloric exceeding
52% concentration.
Nitrohydrochloric acid.
Hydrofluoric acid.
Other corrosive liquids may be packed with other
articles if in suitably cushioned bottles in
sealed metal containers.
Photographic materials may be packed with re-
quired amounts of dry processing chemicals.
The container shall be cushioned.
Exemptions Here are the exemptions from marking corrosive
173.244 materials:
Corrosive liquids in bottles in sealed metal
cans, 1 bottle per can, with a capacity of
not more than 1 pint or 1 pound.
10-S-15
-------
LESSON- Handling, Storage and Transportation
of Hazardous Materials
Corrosive solids are exempt as follows:
Maximum
Amount
Type of Inside
Container
5 Ibs.
10 Ibs.
25 Ibs.
Earthenware, Glass
or Paper
Metal, Rigid Fiber
Composition cans
* Metal, Wood or
Fiberboard
Corrosive liquids
not specifically
provided for
* Outside container
Here are the general packaging specifications for
corrosive liquids:
Glass carboys in boxes, kegs, or plywood drums.
DOT SPECIFICATION 1A, IB, 1C, IE.
Boxed glass carboys of not over 6.5 gallons.
DOT SPECIFICATION ID.
Metal barrels or drums.
DOT SPECIFICATION 5A, 5C, 5M.
Wooden barrels or kegs lined with asphalt,
parafin or wax impervious to the lading.
DOT SPECIFICATION 10A.
Wooden barrels or kegs with inside containers
of glass, or earthenware, not over 2 gallons
each.
DOT SPECIFICATION 11A or 11B.
Wooden boxes with glass, earthenware or
polyethylene inside containers of no more than
1 gallon each. If packed with just 1 inside
container the amount can be raised to 3 gallons,
DOT SPECIFICATION ISA, 15B, 15C, 16A, 19A.
Metal jacketed lead carboys.
DOT SPECIFICATION 28.
Rubber lined metal barrels or drums.
DOT SPECIFICATION 5D, 5H.
Rubber drums.
DOT SPECIFICATION 43A.
10-S-16
-------
LESSON: Handling, Storage and Transportation
of Hazardous Materials
Fiberboard boxes with polyethylene or similar
inside containers, resistant to the contents
and with a screw cap or similar closure and not
more than 1 gallon capacity. Maximum weight
must be less than 65 pounds.
DOT SPECIFICATION 12B.
Glued plywood or wooden box or plywood drum.
DOT SPECIFICATION 15P or 22C.
Metal drums with openings not more than 2.3 inches
in diameter.
DOT SPECIFICATION 17C, 17E, 17F.
Metal drums for viscous cleaning compounds.
DOT SPECIFICATIONS 17H.
Cylindrical steel overpacks.
DOT SPECIFICATION 6D or 37M.
Lined metal drums with welded side seams not
over 5 gallons capacity each.
DOT SPECIFICATION 17H, 37A, 37B.
Fiberboard boxes with inside glass, polyethylene
or other non-fragile plastic container of not
over 1 gallon capacity each. The outside con-
tainer shall have no more than 2.5 gallons.
DOT SPECIFICATION 12A.
Steel drums with polyethylene liner.
DOT SPECIFICATION 37P.
Wirebound wooden overwrap with inside poly-
ethylene container.
DOT SPECIFICATION 16D.
Fiberboard boxes with inside polyethylene con-
tainer of not over 5 gallons capacity. Fastener
shall not damage the inside container.
DOT SPECIFICATION 12P.
Wirebound wooden box with inside polyethylene
container cushioned against contact with the
box.
DOT SPECIFICATION 16A.
Polyethylene container without overpack not
over 30 gallons capacity.
DOT SPECIFICATION 34.
10-S-17
-------
LESSON: Handling, Storage and Transportation
of Hazardous Materials
Corrosive solids
173.245b
Corrosive solids may be shipped as follows:
Packing
Outside
Inside
Maximum
Weight
Metal, wooden, Glass, earthenware, 10 Ibs. per
or fiberboard box metal, plastic fiber, inside
composition board container
Fiberboard box
Fiberboard box
Metal drum
Fiber drum
Plastic drum/pail
Paper bag (1 only) 50 Ibs.
Plastic bag (1 only) 120 Ibs.
55 gals.
550 lbs./55 gals.
80 lbs./6 gals.
Multi. wall paper
bag, 4 ply construction
with moisture barrier
Burlap bag, 7-1/2 oz. burlap
Plastic bag; must withstand
4 four-foot drops to hard
surface
Metal portable tank
110 Ibs.
110 Ibs.
110 Ibs.
660 gals/7000 Ibs.
Compressed Gases
Subpart F
49 CFR 173
Additional
requirements
173.301
Compressed gases are normally shipped in cylinders. One
general requirement for these cylinders is that they be
tested and inspected periodically. This re-test date is
stamped on the cylinder along with other markings
covered earlier.
Here are some additional requirements:
The gas content must not be capable of
attacking the cylinder walls.
The owner of the container must consent to its
being charged and shipped.
If cylinders are manifolded together, there must
be a mechanical structure to hold the cylinders
together. The piping is not to be used for this
purpose.
10-S-18
-------
LESSON- Handling, Storage and Transportation
of Hazardous Materials
Safety devices on flammable gases shall
be arranged to discharge upward to the
open air.
Each container shall be equipped with a
shut-off valve that is tightly shut-off
during transit.
The container pressure must not exceed that
stamped on the container with the contents at
70° F. It shall not exceed five-fourths of that
pressure at 130° F.
The container valves shall be protected by:
Attached metal caps.
Boxing or crating.
Recessed valves.
By loading and securely bracing the
containers in an upright position.
By assuring that the valve structure
is strong enough to avoid injury.
The container must be built to a DOT specifica-
tion.
Poisonous material Poisonous materials are divided into two categories,
Subpart G Poison A and Poison B.
49 CFR 173
Poison A gases and liquids cannot be shipped by
railway express.
Poison A containers cannot be connected together
during shipment.
A list of Poison A material is shown in this table.
(1) Bromacetone.
(2) Cyanogen.
(3) Cyanogen chloride containing less
than 0.9 percent water.
(4) Diphosgene.
(5) Ethyldichlorarsine.
(6) Hydrocyanic acid
(7) Lewisite.
(8) Methyldichlorarsine.
(9) Mustard gas.
(10) Nitrogen peroxide (tetroxide).
10-S-19
-------
LESSON- Handlin8» Storage and Transportation
of Hazardous Materials
Poison A Packing
173.327
(.11) Phenylcarbylamine chloride.
(12) Phosgene (diphosgene).
(13) Nitrogen tetroxide-nitric oxide
mixtures containing up to 33.2 percent
weight nitric oxide.
Here are the general requirements for packing
Poison A materials.
Specifications
for Poison A
containers
173.328
Poison B
Liquids packing
173.344
Valve must connect directly into the container
with a taper thread connection.
Pressure of poison gas at 130° p must not ex-
ceed the service pressure of the container.
The protection for the valve must be capable of
withstanding a 6 foot drop to a cement floor.
The cylinders must be tightly secured together.
Specifications for Poison A gas and liquid containers
are as follows:
Metal cylinders of not over 125 pounds water
capacity.
DOT SPECIFICATION 33 or 3D.
Metal cylinders of not over 125 pounds water
capacity packed in strong wooden boxes.
DOT SPECIFICATION 3A, 3AA, 3E1800.
Poison B liquids packing requirements are as
follows:
Containers must be tightly and securely
closed.
Exemptions
173.345
Inside containers must be cushioned to
prevent breakage.
Sufficient outage shall be provided.
The following exemptions for marking and labelling
are permitted.
10-S-20
-------
LESSON: Handling, Storage and Transportation
of Hazardous Materials
Outside
Container
Strong wooden ^^
boxes or — '
barrels -^
Fiberboard_____- — -
Boxes — .
" — - —
Inside
Container
Earthenware
.— ^ Glass
^^^ .
^* Polyethylene
Earthenware
-^ Glass
"~-^ Polyethylene
Maximum
Amount
1 quart
1 gallon
1 pint
1 quart
Poison Liquids B
Specifications
173.346
In metal barrels
or drums
In wooden barrels
or kegs
In fiberboard
boxes
Poison B liquids shall be packaged as follows:
In metal barrels or drums.
With openings not exceeding 2.3 inches.
DOT SPECIFICATION 5, 5A, 5B, 5C, 17C, 17E.
With openings not exceeding 2.3 inches,
welded side seams and capacity of not
over 10 gallons.
DOT SPECIFICATION 37B.
With welded side seams and not over 5 gallon
capacity.
DOT SPECIFICATION 37A, 37B.
In wooden barrels or kegs.
DOT SPECIFICATION 10A, 10B, IOC.
With glass inside containers of not over
1 gallon capacity each or inside metal
containers of not over 2 gallons capacity
each.
DOT SPECIFICATION 11A, 11B.
In fiberboard boxes.
Glass or earthenware inside containers
not over 1 quart capacity each or metal
containers not over 1 gallon capacity.
Gross weight must not be over 65 pounds.
DOT SPECIFICATION 12B.
10-S-21
-------
LESSON- Handlin§» Storage and Transportation
of Hazardous Materials
Glass or earthenware inside containers
not over 1 gallon capacity each. Gross
weight not over 75 pounds. Total content
not over 2-1/2 gallons.
DOT SPECIFICATION 12D.
One glass inside container of not over
1 gallon capacity suitably cushioned to
withstand 6 four-foot drops onto concrete.
DOT SPECIFICATION 12B.
Inside containers of polyethylene of
not more than 5 gallons capacity. Wire
staples are not allowed on fasteners.
DOT SPECIFICATION 12P.
Inside polyethylene bottles with not over
1 gallon capacity with screw cap closure.
Each bottle shall be enclosed in a box of
at least 200 Ib. test corrugated fiber-
board. Only 4 bottles per outside
container.
DOT SPECIFICATION 12B or 12A.
In wooden boxes In wooden boxes.
In glass or earthenware inside containers
of no more than 1 gallon capacity or 3
gallons capacity if there is only one
inside container per outside container in
metal containers of no more than 10 gallons
capacity.
DOT SPECIFICATION 15A, 15B, 15C, 16A, 19A.
Glass Carboys.
DOT SPECIFICATION 1A, ID or IE.
In drums In drums as follows:
Fiber drums with only one inside glass
container of no more than 1 gallon
capacity.
DOT SPECIFICATION 21C.
In aluminum drums.
DOT SPECIFICATION 42B, 42C, 42D.
In glued plywood drums with an inside poly-
ethylene container.
DOT SPECIFICATION 15P or 22C.
10-S-22
-------
LESSON- Handling» Storage and Transportation
of Hazardous Materials
In steel drums of no more than 5 gallons
capacity with a polyethylene liner.
DOT SPECIFICATION 6D.
Mailing tubes In mailing tubes with inside polyethylene bottles
of no more capacity than 2 quarts each.
DOT SPECIFICATION 29.
Packing for Class B Packing for solid Class B poisons must be tightly seal-
poisons, solids ed with inside containers cushioned against breakage.
173.363 The inside containers (except glass) shall be sub-
jected to a drop test of 4 feet to solid concrete.
For bags containing 25 pounds a drop test of 2 feet
is required.
Exemptions Poisonous solids, Class B, except cyanides,
cyanogen bromide, hexaethyl tetraphosphate mixture,
methyl parcethion mixtures, organic phosphate com-
pound mixtures, tetraethyl dithro pyrophosphate
mixtures and tetraethyl pyrophosphate mixture, in
tightly closed metal containers, shall be exempt
from packaging marking and labelling requirements.
In inside glass, earthenware or composition
bottles or jars of not over 5 pounds capacity,
or chipboard, pasteboard or fiber cartons,
cans, boxes or tightly closed plastic bags or
bottles of not over 1 pound capacity each
packed in wooden or fiberboard boxes, barrels
or kegs with net weight of contents per outside
container of not over 100 pounds, or if not
more than 6 five-pound packages, one in an
outside container.
Poison B solid Poison B solids shall be packed as follows:
packaging speci-
fications In metal barrels or drums.
173.365 DOT SPECIFICATION 5, 5A, 5B, 6A, 6B, 6C.
Gross weight not over 375 pounds or not over
880 pounds if the material is fused solid
or not over 550 pounds for waste material
containing arsenic trioxide.
DOT SPECIFICATION 17E, 17H, 37A, 37B.
Wooden barrels In wooden barrels or kegs as follows:
or kegs
Lined with crepe paper.
DOT SPECIFICATION 10A, 10B, IOC.
10-S-23
-------
LESSON: Handling, Storage and Transportation
of Hazardous Materials
Tongue and groved, not over 115 pounds
per unit.
DOT SPECIFICATION 11A.
Fiberboard boxes In fiberboard boxes as follows:
Inside containers or metal cans of not over
25 pounds capacity each or glass bottles of
not over 1 gallon each, or sliding top
wooden boxes of not over 25 pounds each, or
paper bags. Packages containing glass or
earthenware containers must not weigh over
65 pounds gross nor contain more than 2.5
gallons. Outside containers shall not be
over 5,000 cubic inches volume.
DOT SPECIFICATION 12B or 12C.
Inside containers of fiberboard or chip-
board of no more than 6 pounds capacity
each. Outside package must contain no more
than 36 pounds.
DOT SPECIFICATION 12B.
Product contained in a tightly closed
polyethylene container of not more than
25 pounds capacity.
DOT SPECIFICATION 12B.
Inside containers are glass bottles, no
more than 4, of 5 pounds capacity each.
Wooden boxes In wooden boxes as follows:
Inside containers are tightly sealed paper
bags within a waterproof double bag.
Maximum amount per outside container is
100 pounds.
DOT SPECIFICATION 15A.
Inside containers are metal cans of not over
25 pounds capacity each; glass or earthen-
ware containers of not over 5 gallons each
and containing no more than 25 pounds; fiber
cans or boxes of not over 25 pounds
capacity each. Maximum weight per outside
container is 100 pounds.
The packaging requirements for radioactive materials are
quite complex and should be undertaken only by a trained
individual. Even so, the individual should refer to
the standards promulgated by the DOT in section 49 CFR
173.390 through 49 CFR 173.396.
10-S-24
-------
ARTICLE
CLASS
MAXIMUM QUANTITY
PASSENGER AIRCRAFT
MAXIMUM QUANTITY BY AIR FREIGHT
RAIL EXPRESS OR TRUCK
Acetone
Arsenic compounds
Benzene
Carbon disulfide
(No exemptions)
Carbon monoxide
Carbon tetrachloride
Chlordane
Chlorine
o Chloroform
en
M Cyanides
Cyclohexane
Dieldrin
Diisobutyl ketone
Ethyl alcohol
Ethyl ether
Fluorides
Formaldehyde
Heptane
Hexane
Flammable liquid
Poison B
Flammable liquid
Flammable liquid
Flammable gas
Poison gas A
Slight toxic
Poison A
Poison B
Poison A
Flammable liquid
Slight toxic
Slight toxic
combustible liquid
Flammable liquid
Flammable liquid
Corrosive and toxic
Combustible liquid
Flammable liquid
Flammable liquid
1 quart
I quart
1 quart
Not accepted
Not accepted
1 quart
No limit
Not accepted
10 gallons
Liquid - 1 quart
Solid - 25 pounds
1 quart
No limit
10 gallons
1 quart
1 quart
None
10 gallons
1 quart
1 quart
10 gallons
Solids— 200 Ibs.
Liquids — 50 gals.
10 gallons
Not accepted
150 pounds
50 gallons
No limit
150 pounds
50 gallons
55 gallons
200 pounds
10 gallons
No limit
50 gallons
10 gallons
10 gallons
5 quarts
No limit
10 gallons
10 gallons
Table 10-1
-------
ARTICLE
CLASS
MAXIMUM QUANTITY
PASSENGER AIRCRAFT
MAXIMUM QUANTITY BY AIR FREIGHT
RAIL EXPRESS OR TRUCK
Hydrogen bromide
Hydrogen chloride
Hydrogen cyanide
Hydrogen fluoride
Hydrogen sulfide
Methanol
Methyl bromide
(No exemptions)
Methylene chloride
M Methyl ethyl ketone
C/3
i Nitrobenzene
to
Phosgene
(No exemptions)
Pyridine
Sulfur dioxide
Sulfuric acid
Toluene
Vinyl chloride
Xylene
Non-flammable gas
Non-flammable gas
Poison B
Corrosive liquid
Flammable gas
Flammable liquid
Poison B
Flammable gas
Flammable liquid
Poison B
Poison A
Flammable liquid
Poison A
Corrosive liquid
Flammable liquid
•Flammable gas
Flammable liquid
Not accepted
Not accepted
Not accepted
Not accepted
Not accepted
1 quart
Not accepted
10 gallons
1 quart
1 quart
Not accepted
1 quart
Not accepted
1 quart
1 quart
Not accepted
1 quart
300 pounds
300 pounds
Not accepted
5 quarts
300 pounds
10 gallons
55 gallons
55 gallons
10 gallons
55 gallons
Not accepted
10 gallons
300 pounds
5 quarts
10 gallons
300 pounds
10 gallons
Table 10-1
-------
Lesson 11
-------
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
SAFETY MANAGEMENT TRAINING PROGRAM
LESSON: Instruments for Measuring Workplace Air
Contaminants
No. 11 Time: 1 hour
Obj ective; Completion of this lesson will acquaint the trainee with the
instruments commonly used for monitoring workplace air contaminants
and for evaluating the performance of local exhaust systems.
Content; In this lesson, various types of air sampling instruments are
discussed—gas and vapor samplers; dust and fume samplers;
mist and fog samplers; and anemometers for evaluating local
exhaust system performance. The description of each instrument
is accompanied by a list of manufacturers who produce the
instruments. A final section discusses procedures to follow in
an air contaminant monitoring program.
Methods; Lecture, questions.
References; American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists,
Air Sampling Instruments.
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, The
Industrial Environment—Its Evaluation and Control.
Materials; Slide .Projector (35mm) and screen. Slides 11-1 through 11-$.
11-S-l
-------
LESSON: Instruments for Measuring Workplace Air
Contaminants
Instruments that measure on-the-job exposures to air con-
taminants are essential for monitoring the occupational
environment and maintaining a safe and healthful workplace.
Equally as important as having the right instruments is the
ability to use them properly.
This lesson will concentrate on the types of instruments
available, rather than on instrument theory. If you are
interested in further information, you should refer to
Air Sampling Instruments, a book published by the
American Conference of Governmental Industrial
Hygienists.
Instruments fall into three broad classes, based on the types
of air contaminants to be sampled.
(1) Gas and vapor samplers
(2) Dust and fume samplers
(3) Mist and fog samplers
Factors, other than proper instrument selection, which con-
tribute to reliable contaminant monitoring are:
(1) Correctly designed sampling procedures
(2) Proper use of instruments
(3) Correct calibration of instruments
(4) Proper handling of collected samples
(5) Avoiding contamination of samples
(6) Assuring proper methods for analysis of samples.
Reliable testing for air contamination is a complex process.
Direct-reading instruments with sufficient accuracy to do
the job properly and which are simple to use are not available
for all situations. For the majority of contaminants, samples
must be taken and sent to a laboratory.
ll-S-2
-------
LESSON: Instruments for Measuring Workplace Air
Contaminants
MANUFACTURERS OF INSTRUMENTS
The National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
(NIOSH) certifies sampling instruments by type and manufac-
turer. Although the approval program currently does not
include all instruments, it is wise to refer to the NIOSH
list before purchasing any new instruments. The latest list
may be obtained from: NIOSH, Office of Technical Publica-
tions, Post Office Building, Cincinnati, Ohio 45202!.
The following is a partial list of manufacturers of indus-
trial hygiene equipment and instruments. These are keyed
by number to the instruments described later in this lesson.
1. Bacharach Industrial Instrument Co., 200 N. Braddock
Ave., Pittsburgh, PA 15208.
2. Beckman Instruments, 2500 Harbor Blvd., Fullerton, CA
92634.
3. Bendix-Representative, National Environmental Instru-
ments, P.O. Box 590, Warwick, RI 02888.
4. Brinkman Instruments, Catiague Rd., Westbury, NY 11590.
5. Central Scientific Co., 2600 So. Kastner Ave., Chicago,
IL 60623.
6. C. F. Cassella, Inc., London.
7. Gelman Instrument Co., 600 So. Wagner Rd., Ann Arbor,
MI.
8. Mine Safety Appliance Company, 201 N. Braddock Ave.,
Pittsburgh, PA 15208.
9. ICN Instruments Division, 630 20th St., Oakland, CA
94612.
10. Research Appliance Co., Route 8 at Craighead Rd.,
Allison Park, PA 15101.
11. Scott Aviation Co., Representative—National Mine
Service Co., 220 Koppers Bldg., Pittsburgh, PA 15219.
12. SKC Inc., P.O. Box 8538, Pittsburgh, PA 15220.
13. The Staplex Co., 777 5th Ave., Brooklyn, NY 11232.
ll-S-3
-------
LESSON: Instruments for Measuring Workplace Air
Contaminants
14. Sunshine Scientific Instrument Co., 1810 Grant Ave. ,
Philadelphia, PA 19115.
15. U.S. Safety Service Co., 1535 Walnut St., Kansas City,
MO 64108.
16. Willson Products, P.O. Box 622, Reading, PA 19603.
17. UNICO Environmental Instruments, P.O. Box 590, Falls
River, MA 02722.
18. Alnor Instrument Co., 402 N. LaSalle St., Chicago, IL
60610
19. Hastings-Raydist Co., P.O. Box 1275, Hampton, VA 22361.
20. Anemostat Products, P.O. Box 1083, Scranton, PA 18501.
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTIONS
This section briefly describes some of the instruments
normally required to evaluate air contaminant concentrations.
It does not include special purpose instruments or those
needed for rarely encountered contaminants. The instruments
are of five basic types.
Direct-reading instruments:
(1) Colorimetric Indicator Tubes
(2) Electronic Instruments
Samplers:
(3) Dust and Fume Samplers
(4) Gas and Vapor Samplers
Ventilation instruments:
(5) Air Movement Indicators (Anemometers)
ll-S-4
-------
LESSON: Instruments for Measuring Workplace Air
Contaminants
Colorimetric Indicator Tubes
Slide 11-1
Colorimetric Tubes
These instruments use a manually operated pump to draw a
sample of air through a glass tube. The interior of the
tube is coated with a treated material, such as silica gel.
The material reacts with the gas or vapor being sampled and
produces a stain. The length of the stain indicates the
concentration of the contaminant.
Each contaminant requires a specially treated tube
bearing a standardized number. Each set of tubes has a
calibrated scale that shows the contaminant concentra-
tion based on the length of the stain and the volume of
air drawn through the tube.
Currently, concentrations for over 100 gases and vapors can
be determined with Colorimetric tubes. Their primary
advantage lies in the fact that they give instantaneous
results. Their disadvantages include the following:
(1) The OSHA standards require 8-hour time-weighted
average determinations. Colorimetric tubes give
only instantaneous samples.
(2) Accuracy is in the range of plus-or-minus 25%.
ll-S-5
-------
LESSON: Instruments for Measuring Workplace Air
Contaminants
(3) The presence of other contaminants in the atmos-
phere may invalidate the results. Each tube set
identifies only known contaminants, with no pro-
vision for identifying contaminants for which no
tubes have been developed.
(4) Colorimetric tubes have a limited shelf life.
Despite these disadvantages, colorimetric indicator tubes
are an essential measuring device for establishments with
exposures to gases and vapors. A full discussion can be
found in Section S of Air Sampling Instruments. NIOSH
also certifies colorimetric indicator tubes. See the latest
issue of NIOSH Certified Personal Protective Equipment.
Manufacturers: 1, 3, 5, 8, 11, 14.
Direct-Reading Electronic Instruments
The following portable direct-reading instruments measure
contaminant concentrations electronically. If properly
maintained and calibrated, portable direct-reading
instruments have a high degree of accuracy.
ll-S-6
-------
LESSON: Instruments for Measuring Workplace Air
Contaminants
Carbon Monoxide Indicators
Slide 11-2
s M 5
--S-:
Carbon
Monoxide
Indicator
ll-S-7
-------
LESSON: Instruments for Measuring Workplace Air
Contaminants
All CO indicators draw air over a catalyst which oxidizes
CO to CO-. The heat of oxidation changes the resistance in
an electrical circuit. The resistance is indicated on a
scale that is calibrated in ppm. The range of these instru-
ments is 0 to 500 ppm.
Manufacturers: 8
Explosive Meters
Slide 11-3
t
Explosive Meter
The explosive meter indicates the explosive range of a
combustible gas or vapor. Results are given in terms of the
percentage of the lower explosive limit (LEL). Explosive
meters work like CO indicators. Air is drawn over a heated
platinum wire. If the contaminated air burns, the heat of
combustion changes the resistance in the circuit. This is
measured on a scale calibrated in percentage of the LEL.
Manufacturers: 1, 8, 11, 17.
ll-S-8
-------
LESSON: Instruments for Measuring Workplace Air
Contaminants
Mercury Vapor Indicators
Slide 11-4
Mercury Vapor Indicator
These detectors are essential for environments where mercury
vapor is present. The meter is quite accurate. All mercury
vapor indicators have a small, self-contained fan that draws
air between a light and a photo-electric cell. The mercury
vapor absorbs the light and causes a deflection of the meter.
The extent of deflection is a measure of the mercury vapor
concentration.
Manufacturers: 1, 2.
ll-S-9
-------
LESSON: Instruments for Measuring Workplace Air
Contaminants
Dust and Fume Samplers
Slide 11-5
I VALVE
DISTANCE BETWEEN
PROBE AND FILTER FILTER
MUST BE MINIMAL uf\l r>ED
AND FREE OF HULUtK
OBSTRUCTIONS
x—n-'
FLOWMETER
i SAMPLING
i PROBE
! SAMPLING PROBE REQUIRED ONLY FOR
SAMPLING FROM MOVING STREAM
ANY TYPE OF FLOWMETER
MAY BE USED IF PROPERLY
CALIBRATED AND CORREC-
TIONS ARE MADE FOR UP-
STREAM PRESSURE LOSS
Elements of a Filter Sampling System
Filter instruments are used almost exclusively for sampling
dusts and fumes. For sampling an individual employee, a
pump is attached to the person's waist, and the sampling
device is attached to the lapel or collar near the breathing
zone. The pump draws air into the sampling device and
forces it through a filter. After completion of the sampling
period, the filter is removed, placed in a sealed plastic
container, and sent to a laboratory for weighing and analysis.
The volume of air sampled is a function of the flow rate
and the time of sampling. Except in very heavy dust
concentrations, the sampler should be operated for a full
8-hour work shift. The filter is weighed before and
after sampling on a highly sensitive balance. The
weight difference is equal to the weight of particulate
matter that was in the sampled air.
Manufacturers: 3, 8, 9, 10, 13, 16, 17.
ll-S-10
-------
LESSON: Instruments for Measuring Workplace Air
Contaminants
Gas and Vapor Samplers
Static Method for Gases and Vapors
A frequently used method for determining gas and vapor con-
centrations is to trap a known volume of the contaminated
air with an evacuated flask. This may be done by water
displacement or by passing the air through a container of
known volume with stop cocks on each end. The containers
are then sent to a laboratory for analysis by chromato-
graphic methods.
Plastic bags of various compositions and configurations
have been used for the collection of atmospheres from
contaminated workrooms. The plastic bag is collapsed
and filled by an air mover to insure complete replace-
ment of the air in the bag. Flow rates are not
important, as the gas will be analyzed in the laboratory
on a volumetric basis.
Charcoal Tubes
Slide 11-6
Charcoal Sampling Tubes
Organic vapor concentrations for a number of substances can
be determined by using charcoal tubes. Sealed charcoal tuoes
may be purchased from various manufacturers. NIOSH can
supply a list of approved tubes.
11-S-ll
-------
LESSON: Instruments for Measuring Workplace Air
Contaminants
In sampling for organic vapor, a definite volume of air
is drawn through the tube with a pump. The sample may
be continuously collected over an entire shift, or only
at intervals during the shift. After a sample has been
taken, the tube is sealed with rubber caps and sent to
a laboratory for analysis by chromatographic methods.
The charcoal tube method is the only method acceptable to
OSHA for the following organic vapors:
Benzene Styrene
Carbon tetrachloride Tetrachloroethylene
Chloroform Toluene
Dioxane 1,1,2, Trichloroethane
Ethylene dichloride Trichloroethylene
Methyl chloroform Xylene
Methyl ethyl ketone (2,butanone)
NIOSH is currently conducting research to determine other
vapors whose concentrations can be accurately measured with
charcoal tubes.
Manufacturers: NIOSH will supply a list.
Bubblers or Impinger Tubes (Gas Washers)
Gas washing techniques have been used extensively in the
past for sampling gases and vapors. Charcoal tubes have
generally replaced gas washers, especially for organic
vapors. However, gas washing is a preferred technique for
acid and alkaline gases, nitrogen dioxide, nitric oxide,
and sulfur dioxide.
ll-S-12
-------
LESSON: Instruments for Measuring Workplace Air
Contaminants
Slide 11-7
Midget Impinger
The midget impinger tube is an example of a simple gas
washer. Air is drawn through a tube immersed in an
absorbing medium into which the contaminant is dissolved.
The sampler should be used for about 15 minutes each
hour. It can also be used for a full 8-hour work cycle.
Manufacturers:
Ace Glass Incorporated, P.O. Box 688, Vineland, NJ 08360.
Corning Glass Works, Corning, NY 14830.
Scientific Glass Apparatus Co., 755 Broad Street,
Bloomfield, NJ 07003.
Scientific Glass Blowing Co., P.O. Box 18353, Houston,
TX 77023.
Mist and Fog Samplers
Mists and fogs are sampled with gas washers.
ll-S-13
-------
LESSON: Instruments for Measuring Workplace Air
Contaminants
Air Movement Indicators (Anemometers)
Anemometers are used primarily to determine air velocities
and estimate air flow for the purpose of evaluating the
performance of ventilation and local exhaust systems. When
using any of the anemometers listed below, you should take
multiple measurements of a given hood, duct, slot, or
grille to assure good estimates of air flow and velocity.
Only by making an even, uniform traverse of the opening
being evaluated will you get a satisfactory average velocity
to use in calculating air flow.
Rotating Vane Anemometers
These instruments have a vane or propeller on a shaft
connected to gears. Air movement makes the vane rotate.
This, in turn, rotates the gears which show on a dial
the revolutions in linear feet. Readings are usually
taken during one-minute intervals, giving the velocity
in linear feet per minute.
Manufacturers: 3,(Also, E. Vernon Hill Co.).
ll-S-14
-------
LESSON: Instruments for Measuring Workplace Air
Contaminants
Swinging Vane Anemometers
Slide 11-8
Applications of a Swinging Vane Anemometer
These anemometers show velocity as a function of the
pressure exerted by an air stream against a spring-
loaded swinging vane.
Manufacturers: 1, 18 (Also, E. Vernon Hill Co.).
ll-S-15
-------
LESSON: Instruments for Measuring Workplace Air
Contaminants
Heated Thermocouple Anemometers
Air moving past a heated object removes heat. This is
the principle of the heated thermocouple anemometer.
The amount of heat removed is proportional to the
quantity of air passing by, which is a function of
velocity.
Manufacturers: 18, 19.
Heated Wire Anemometers
These devices depend on a change in the resistance of a
wire due to a change in temperature. The degree; of
temperature change is proportional to the velocity of
air passing over the wire. Velocity is read directly
on a meter which is actuated by voltage change.
Manufacturers: 20
Heated Thermometer Anemometers
The principle of operation here is the same as for
heated thermocouple anemometers, except that thermometers
are used instead of thermocouples.
Manufacturers: 18, 19.
Air Contaminant Monitoring Procedures
When planning an air contaminant monitoring program, the
following factors must be considered:
(1) An appropriate sample must be selected.
If the contaminant is equally dispersed throughout the
work area, a general area sample would show the exposure
of all workers. On the other hand, if the work area
includes several different operations and a number of con-
taminant sources, then each worker should have his own
breathing zone and immediate environment sampled for
determining individual exposure.
ll-S-16
-------
LESSON: Instruments for Measuring Workplace Air
Contaminants
(2) The necessary degree of accuracy must be determined.
Instruments have varying degrees of accuracy. For example,
under ideal circumstances, colorimetric indicator tubes have
an accuracy range of plus-or-minus 20-25%. If it is obvious
that the permissible concentration is being significantly
exceeded, the colorimetric indicator tube would be quite
satisfactory. However, if the concentrations were in the
range of 0.5 to 1.5 of the permissible concentration, a more
accurate instrument would be needed.
(3) Necessary frequencies of sampling must be determined.
Will an eight-hour integrated sample meet the requirements?
Will interval samples be necessary? Or will instantaneous
samples suffice? Each of these types of samples has a
specific purpose. Each requires a different kind of instru-
ment .
Instantaneous sampling is made at a particular time,
either by a direct-reading instrument or by trapping a
definite volume of air for analysis. Samples of this
type can be used to determine the magnitude of the
contaminant concentration. Assuming that a sufficient
mass of the substance is present, an instantaneous sample
can be used for a qualitative analysis. A large number
of instantaneous samples taken over a certain time
period provides a good measure of average, maximum, and
minimum concentrations. For example, instantaneous
samples taken at five-minute intervals for one hour would
have a high probability of representing conditions during
that hour.
Integrated sampling is done continuously over a long
period of time, such as a full work cycle. Integrated
samples provide the greatest degree of accuracy in
evaluating an exposure, as maximum and minimum values
are included, and a time-weighted exposure is established.
The primary objection to integrated sampling is that it
fails to identify maximum and minimum values. It is,
however, an especially useful method for evaluating
exposures to pneumoconiosis-producing dusts.
Interval sampling is performed for a definite
time period each hour or for the entire work shift.
Interval sampling is the procedure most widely used.
Shorter and more frequent sampling permits a more
accurate determination of maximum and minimum concentra-
tions . Longer duration of sampling allows for greater
analytical accuracy. Interval sampling also permits the
ll-S-17
-------
LESSON: Instruments for Measuring Workplace Air
Contaminants.
determination of time-weighted averages. Where a worker
performs multiple tasks, this procedure should be used
to measure exposures for each task.
(4) The possibility of other contaminants in the
atmosphere that might invalidate the effectiveness
of the instrument must be considered.
Direct-reading instruments are often invalidated when
multiple contaminants are present in the atmosphere. For
example, if an explosive meter is calibrated specifically
for benzol, the presence of other combustible gases or
vapors will cause an erroneous reading. The same is true
for colorimetric indicator tubes.
11-S- 18
-------
LESSON: Instruments for Measuring Workplace Air
Contamitianta
QUESTIONS
1. Under certain circumstances, the results obtained from
sampling with a colorimetric indicator tube may be
erroneous. What causes such error?
2. Why must the filter on a dust sampler be weighed both
before and after sampling?
3. Name the three direct-reading electronic instruments
discussed in this article.
4. What kinds of vapors are charcoal tubes primarily
designed to detect?
5. What is the purpose of an anemometer?
6. What are the three sampling methods discussed in this
lesson and how do they differ from one another?
ll-S-19
-------
Lesson 12
-------
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
SAFETY MANAGEMENT TRAINING PROGRAM
LESSON: Ventilation
No. 12 Time: 1-1/2 hours
Objectives; Completion of this lesson will enable the trainee to apply
the principles of good ventilation to specific processes
carried out in Agency laboratories and other facilities.
Content; This lesson covers the basic principles of ventilation in
laboratories where toxic or pathogenic contaminants create
a hazard for employees. Exhaust systems, enclosures, and
spot ventilation are discussed. Ventilation requirements
for open surface tanks and for grinding, polishing, and
buffing also are discussed.
Methods:
Lecture, questions, discussion.
References; The Chemical Rubber Co., Handbook of Laboratory Safety.
Second Edition.
American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists,
Industrial Ventilation.
29 CFR 1910.94—Occupational Safety and Health Standards.
Materials; Slide projector (35 mm) and screen
Slides: 12-1 through 12-3
12-S-l
-------
LESSON: Ventilation
THE NEED FOR LABORATORY VENTILATION
Certain processes contaminate the air, creating hazards for
workers. People in the laboratory may absorb, ingest, or
inhale chemicals, micro-organisms, or other materials which
are poisonous or which can cause diseases. In some instances,
the potential harmful effects of a material are not known.
Processes in which gases, vapors, fumes, smokes, or dusts are
given off and contaminate the air must be carefully controlled.
The contaminants must be contained or captured by hoodsi,
enclosures, or spot ventilation. This lesson will discuss
ventilation requirements for laboratory operations.
EXHAUST VENTILATION
Exhaust ventilation removes contaminated air from a space.
An exhaust ventilation system may consist of as many as
five elements:
Hood or enclosure
Duct work
Dust/contaminant collecting equipment or air cleaner
Exhauster or fan
Discharge stack or exhaust
A basic exhaust ventilation system and how it works is shown
in the following slides.
HOOD
DUCT
Basic Local Exhaust System
X
^
c:
Slide 12-1
12-S-2
-------
LESSON: Ventilation
The effectiveness of the ventilation system is dependent upon
the quantity of air that enters the hood per unit of time.
This quantity of air is equal to the quantity of air that
flows through the duct. If you multiply the velocity of the
air in the duct by the cross-sectional ar6a of the duct, you
will obtain the approximate volume of air flowing through
the duct. If the cross-sectional area is in square feet,
and the velocity is in feet per minute, the volume will be
in cubic feet per minute.
The volume of air flowing through the duct then, divided
by the cross-sectional area of the hood opening would be
equal to the average velocity of the air entering the hood.
A method of checking the air flow through the ducts or
hoods should be provided. It may be a direct reading instru-
ment or a set of manometer tubes. The maintenance engineer
should post instructions for interpreting the readings on
the manometer tubes.
If neither of the above are provided, then you may use a
velometer which measures air flow into the hood directly.
You would measure it at several points in the hood opening
area and calculate an average. This measurement should be
made by trained personnel.
CAPTURE VELOCITY
If the hood does not completely enclose the contaminant
source, a factor called the "capture velocity" has to be
taken into consideration.
The capture velocity is the air velocity toward the hood
opening at any point in front of the hood that is necessary
to overcome opposing air currents and to cause the contam-
inated air at that point to flow into the hood. The ventila-
tion system, to be effective, must be capable of generating
an air flow rate at the contaminant source equal to or greater
than the capture velocity.
12-S-3
-------
LESSON: Ventilation
PLAIN OPENING
FLANGED OPENING
0 50 100
% OF DIAMETER
50 100
OF DIAMETER
Slide 12-2
This chart shows the relationships between capture velocities,
size and shape of hood openings, distance of the contaminant
source from the hood face, and quantity of air moved. For
example, moving the contaminant source 6" away from a 1 foot
diameter flanged hood will reduce the air velocity from 100
fpm to 30 fpm.
American Conference of Laboratory Hoods
Governmental Industrial
Hygienists, Industrial
Ventilation, Page 5-22
A minimum face velocity of 100 fpm (30 m/min.) for
laboratory hoods is recommended. This minimum is
adequate only for contaminants that have permissible
exposure limits above 10 ppm or .1 mg/m^. If the per-
missible exposure limit is equal to or less than 10 ppm
or .1 mg/m3, then the face velocity should be at least
150 fpm.
Higher capture velocities can be achieved in
ordinary hoods by reducing the open face area.
You should check the hoods in your laboratory to
assure that they are capable of causing the re-
quired face velocity for the contaminants that
will be processed.
It may be necessary to use glove boxes and total
enclosures if high enough face velocities cannot
be achieved.
12-S-4
-------
LESSON: Ventilation
FACTORS AFFECTING VENTILATION SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
Specific environmental factors affect the effective opera-
tion of a ventilation system. For example, cross-currents
outside a hood can divert the flow of air into a hood.
Therefore, it is important to locate hoods to minimize air
currents from doors, windows, and air supply grilles.
Pedestrian traffic past a hood also should be kept to a
minimum. A walking rate of just one mile an hour causes a
cross-current velocity of 88 ft/min.
Wind direction and outside atmospheric conditions also
affect the velocity of a laboratory exhaust system.
For example, a test of a hood on a day the wind was
blowing away from the horizontal discharge vent on the roof
could show adequate face velocities, while the face veloc-
ities could be very low or negative the next day when the
wind was gusting against the discharge vent.
Regular maintenance also is essential. Check for obstruc-
tions in slots and ducts, air leaks into the ducts, clogged
filters or a malfunctioning motor or fan. Faults in any of
these parts of the system can cause a drop in velocity.
The Chemical Rubber
Co., Handbook of
Laboratory Safety,
Sec. 3.1.
Apparent loss of velocity or of.overall effectiveness of
the system must be reported immediately and the contaminant-
producing process may need to be stopped until corrective
action is taken.
OTHER TYPES OF ENCLOSURES
The amount of ventilation needed can be greatly reduced if
the laboratory operation can be partly or completely enclosed.
Glove boxes and dry boxes require little ventilation, while
vacuum boxes and inert gas boxes require almost none.
A dry box or glove box can be safely ventilated with an air-
flow of only 50 cfm for each square foot of open door area.
A face velocity of 50 fpm or 15 m/min. is an effective capture
velocity when face openings are small.
12-S-5
-------
LESSON: Ventilation
The Chemical Rubber
Co., Handbook of
Laboratory Safety,
Sec. 3.1.
SPOT VENTILATION
Spot ventilation, that is, exhausting contaminants near their
point of origin, may be needed if the laboratory operations
are not suitable for enclosure because of bulk, access needs,
or brief use.
GRINDING. POLISHING. AND BUFFING
Grinding, polishing, and buffing processes are carried out
with abrasive wheels or belts mounted on stationary supports
or with a portable device. Hoods connected to exhaust system
ducts must enclose the devices to capture and carry off the
dust or particles resulting from the operation. The exhaust
system must be operating whenever the process is in progress.
The enclosure must be designed so that the dust
particles are directed into the hoods and not
into the operator's breathing zone.
The exhaust system must be provided with dust
collectors and the collectors cleaned on a
regular schedule.
There are a variety of machines for grinding, polishing, and
buffing. OSHA has issued standards that prescribe the vol-
ume of air in cubic feet per minute that must be carried away
in the exhaust system for each type of machine. The volume
is related to the size of the wheel. For specific infor-
mation regarding the required minimum exhaust volume for
various types of machines, refer to 29 CFR 1910.94—
Occupational Safety and Health Standards, Tables G-A through
G-9.
OPEN SURFACE TANKS
There may be some processes in your laboratory for which
open surface tanks are used. If the liquids in these tanks
are flammable or toxic, it is necessary to provide a venti-
lation system to carry off the hazardous vapors that are
released.
12-S-6
-------
LESSON: Ventilation
An important aspect of the ventilation system design is that
the operators must not be exposed to harmful vapors when
loading or unloading the tanks. Slide 12-3 shows a well-
designed ventilation system and a poorly-designed ventilation
system.
Slot
Good Bod
DIRECTION OF AIR FL OW
Slide 12-3
If you need to determine the required air flow across l:he
top of a tank, refer to OSHA standards, 29 CFR 1910.94—
Occupational Safety and Health Standards, Tables G-12
through G-15.
AIR CLEANING DEVICES
Air cleaning devices are an important part of a ventilation
system. Obviously, the air leaving a laboratory must not
contaminate the atmosphere in the neighborhood. Air cleaning
devices, therefore, must be provided to remove contaminants
before the air from local exhaust ventilation systems is
exhausted.
There are two basic classes of air cleaning devices—those
that remove fume, dust or fiber contaminants, and those that
remove gases, mists, or vapors. Here are some of the more
common types that remove the particulates.
• Electrostatic Precipitators. An electrostatic charge
is induced on the particles in the gas stream. The
stream then passes over a series of plates or elec-
trodes with an opposite charge and the particles adhere
to the charged surfaces.
12-S-7
-------
LESSON: Ventilation
• Fabric Collectors. The air stream passes through
a fabric screen and the particles collect on the
screen. The screens or filters must be cleaned
periodically to retain their effectiveness. The
collectors may have automatic devices for cleaning
the screens.
• Wet Collectors. In these collectors water is sprayed
into the air stream or the air stream may pass through
a sort of waterfall, or it may be directed at a wet
surface. The particles are retained in the water.
These collectors are most desirable if the par-
ticulates are flammable.
• Dry Centrifugal Collectors. The air stream is
directed through a centrifuge and the particles
are removed from the stream by centrifugal force.
Here are some of the more common types of air cleaning
devices that remove gases, mists, or vapors.
• Absorbers. The contaminants in the air stream are
brought into contact with a liquid. They are. ab-
sorbed by going into solution with the liquid or
by chemical reaction with the liquid.
• Adsorbers. The contaminants in the air stream are
brought into contact with a solid and cling to the
surface of the solid.
• Thermal Oxidizers. If the contaminants are com-
bustible, they are burned off by directing the air
stream into a combustion chamber with an open flame
or heating device. Carbon dioxide and water vapor
are the usual residues.
• Direct combustors. Here, the contaminated air
stream is used as a fuel and burned. It may be
necessary to augment the combustible contaminants
with additional combustibles.
• Catalytic Oxidizers. The air stream passes over a
catalyst and the contaminants oxidize.
All air cleaning devices must be serviced periodically to
remove wastes, replace the absorbing or adsorbent material
or make other necessary adjustments to assure that they are
functioning properly.
12-S-8
-------
LESSON: Ventilation
DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
A ventilation engineer will design the ventilation system
for your facility. The volume of air that must be moved
will depend upon the required capture velocities which, as
noted earlier, depend upon the characteristics of the mate-
rials to be processed. The engineer will have to take into
account such things as the shape of the hood, the distance
of the hood from the contaminant source, the number and
sharpness of bends in the ducts, the length of the ducts,
and the resistance of the filters to air flow. After he
has finished his calculations, he will be able to select a
motor and fan that will provide the required air velocity.
He should provide instructions for using and operating the
system, cleaning the filters, adjusting hood openings and
other factors that affect the rate of air flow. It will be
your responsibility to see that his instructions are carried
out.
This lesson covers a wide variety of processes which may be
used in your laboratory and for which ventilation is essen-
tial. The following references are given as sources of
additional information:
The Chemical Rubber Co., Handbook of Laboratory
Safety, 2nd Edition.
American Conference of Governmental Industrial
Hygienists, Industrial Ventilation.
American National Standards Institute standards:
ANSI Z43.1—1966, Ventilation Control
of Grinding, Polishing, and Buffing
Operations.
ANSI Z9.1—1969, Safety Code for the
Ventilation and Operation of Open
Surface Tanks.
National Fire Protection Association standards:
NFPA #34—1966, Standard for Dip
Tanks Containing Flammable or
Combustible Materials.
12-S-9
-------
LESSON: Ventilation
QUESTIONS
1. List the five basic parts of an exhaust ventilation system.
a) d)
b) e)
c)
2. A velometer measures
3. When the ventilation system fails, the process should be
4. Air volume requirements for grinding, buffing, and polishing are related to
5. The use of glove boxes or dry boxes is preferred if the face velocity must
exceed cfm.
6. How can the face velocity at the hood opening be increased?
12-S-10
-------
Lesson 13
-------
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
SAFETY MANAGEMENT TRAINING PROGRAM
LESSON: Air Contaminants
No. 13 Time: 1/2 hour
Objectives: Completion of this lesson will enable the trainee to understand
the methods of calculating contaminant concentrations in the
laboratory air; to use the OSHA standards for determining whether
or not contaminant concentrations are within acceptable limits;
to identify methods for abating hazards related to air contami-
nants in the laboratory.
Content; This lesson covers the OSHA standards for permissible concentrations
of air contaminants in the workplace. Various methods for calcu-
lating exposure to airborne contaminants are explained. Also
discussed are methods of abating air contaminants, the effects
of air contaminants on the human body, and first aid for acute
exposures.
Methodst Lecture, discussion, questions.
References^; 29 CFR 1910.1000—Occupational Safety and Health Standards.
National Safety Council, Fundamentals of Industrial Hygiene.
American National Red Cross, Standard First Aid and Personal
Safety.
The Chemical Rubber Co., Handbook of Laboratory Safety.
Materials; Slide projector (35 mm) and screen.
Slides: 13-1, 13-2.
13-S-l
-------
LESSON: Air Contaminants
OCCUPATIONAL DISEASE
Occupational diseases, in contrast to occupational acci-
dents , can result from high-dose incidents or extended
exposure to certain substances and materials in the work-
place environment. The exposure time required for occu-
pational disease development may range from a very short
to an extended period.
FACTORS INFLUENCING DISEASE DEVELOPMENT
Factors that influence the rate of development and the
severity of the disease are: (1) the concentration of the
substance (contaminant) in the atmosphere; and (2) the
duration of exposure. For example, exposure to high
concentrations of carbon monoxide (CO) for only a few
minutes may result in death. But a person may be exposed
to low concentrations of CO for several years before any
recognizable effects appear.
Another factor that influences the rate of occupational
disease development is a person's susceptibility. Due to
genetic and other biologic factors, susceptibility to an
environmental agent varies greatly between individuals.
It has often been observed that in a working population
exposed in the same manner to the same contaminant, some
workers develop a disease reaction in a much shorter time
than others; while some workers never even develop recog-
nizable symptoms .
National Safety
Council, Fundamsntals
of Industrial Hygiene,
Chap. 1.
CHARACTERISTICS OF AIR CONTAMINANTS
Air contaminants that affect health may be either particu-
late or gaseous in nature.
Dusts and fumes are examples of particulates. Dusts are
solid particles suspended in the atmosphere that range
in size from about 0.1 micron to 25 microns. (A micron
is one millionth of a meter, or 1 x 10~6 m.) Insoluble
dust particles larger than 10 microns usually have no
hygienic significance since they do not penetrate the
defensive mechanisms of the respiratory system. There-
fore, they do not reach the lungs where toxic actions are
initiated.
Fumes are very small particles resulting from condensation
of volatilized metal, such as iron, zinc, or lead. Fumes
are less than 1 micron in size, most being around 0.1 micron.
13-S-2
-------
LESSON: Air Contaminants
Gaseous contaminants may be true gases (such as carbon mon-
oxide, sulfur dioxide, and ozone), or they may be vapors.
A vapor is the gaseous state of a substance that is liquid
or solid in its normal state. Examples of vapors found in
the workplace are naptha, benzene, and methyl or ethyl alcohol.
STANDARDS FOR EXPOSURE TO AIR CONTAMINANTS
As stated earlier, individual susceptibility to a contaminant
cannot be measured or determined. Therefore, standards for
exposure are based on the contaminant concentration and the
duration of exposure.
Duration of exposure is calculated on the basis of an 8-hour
work day of a 40-hour work week.
The permissible concentration is the value which will permit
a worker to be exposed for a working lifetime, 8 hours a day,
40 hours a week, without developing a disease or disability.
Permissible concentrations are expressed as milligrams
per cubic meter of air (mg/m^) . For contaminants that have
very low concentrations, this value may be expressed as
micrograms per cubic meter of air (yg/m-*). A milligram is
one thousandth of a gram (1 x 10~3). A microgram is one
millionth of a gram (1 x 10~").
For gases, permissible concentrations may also be expressed
as parts of the contaminant per million parts of air
(or ppm).
For dusts, permissible concentrations may also be expressed
as millions of particles per cubic foot of air (mppcf).
This term always refers to air-suspended dusts that have
a particle size of less than 10 microns. Particles greater
than 10 microns in size usually do not enter the lungs.
National Safety
Council, Fundamentals
of Industrial Hygiene,
Chap. 17.
EFFECTS OF AIR CONTAMINANTS ON THE HUMAN SYSTEM
Chemical substances taken into the respiratory system
ultimately reach the alveoli of the lungs. In the alveoli,
there is an interchange of oxygen and carbon dioxide between
the blood and the lungs. The oxygen goes into the blood
to supply the body with fuel, and carbon dioxide is removed
as waste.
Gas/vapor inhalation. Gases and vapors that are present in
the laboratory air get taken into the lungs along with oxygen
and may be absorbed by the blood. Once in the bloodstream,
they are deposited in various body tissues and organs and
ultimately cause a toxic action.
13-S-3
-------
LESSON: Air Contaminants
The type of action raay be acute or chronic. An acute action
occurs when the concentration of gas is so great that
some biologic system of the body is overwhelmed and can no
longer perform its function. A chronic action results
from exposure to lower contaminant concentrations over long
time periods. Such continuous exposure may ultimately lead
to disability or death. Some vapors, such as certain chlori-
nated hydrocarbons, may result in occupational cancer.
Corrosive gases and vapors. Some gases and vapors are so
corrosive that they injure the tissues of the respiratory
system and lungs. The injured tissue then becomes subject
to bacterial invasion and pneumonia.
Dust inhalation. Dusts taken into the lungs can cause a
condition called pneumoconiosis. The work pneumoconiosis
is derived from the Greek and means "lung dust disease."
Pneumoconiosis may be disabling or non-disabling. The dis-
abling type results from inhaling certain dusts that react
on the lung tissue to cause fibrosis (a hardening of the
tissue). In its late stages it can cause extreme disability.
Examples of dusts associated with this type of pneumoconiosis
are silica, asbestos, beryllium, coal, and others.
Non-disabling pneumoconiosis results from inhaling dusts that
do not react on the lung tissue but are simply deposited
there. It does not cause the lung function to be impaired.
OSHA EXPOSURE LIMIT VALUES
29 CFR 1910.1000— The Occupational Safety and Health Standards list various
Occupational Safety types of air contaminants and the maximum concentration of
and Health Standards contaminant to which workers may be exposed. (Tables Z-l,
Z-2, and Z-3) Permissible concentrations are expressed in
various ways, depending on the nature of the contaminant
and its effect on the human system. Terms related to per-
missible concentrations include the following:
Eight-hour time-weighted average (Tables Z-l, Z-2, and Z-3) .
This means that the average concentration of a particular
contaminant to which a worker is exposed during any 8-hour
shift of a 40-hour work week must not exceed the value shown
in the table. This value is the permissible concentration.
Ceiling value—C (Table Z-l only). If the name of a contamin-
ant is preceded by the letter C, it has a ceiling value. This
means that employees must never, at any time during the working
day, be exposed to a concentration in excess of the value shown
in the table.
13-S-4
-------
LESSON: Air Contaminants
Acceptable ceiling concentration (Table Z-2 only) . This
means that during any 8-hour shift, the highest concentration
should not exceed the value shown except for brief periods.
Acceptable maximum peak. This designates the greatest peak
concentration of the contaminant to which an employee may be
exposed for the indicated time period.
Pneumoconiosis-producing dusts. The concentration of dusts
that produce pneumoconiosis are usually expressed in rag/in^
or mppcf. The size range of the airborne dust particles must
be stated. For this purpose, the following terms are used.
Total dust refers to all airborne dust. Respirable dust
refers to airborne dust of particles less than 10 microns
in size.
CALCULATING AN 8-HOUR TIME-WEIGHTED AVERAGE
Single Contaminant
You can calculate an 8-hour time-weighted average exposure
for a single contaminant by using this formula.
C T + C.T. + C T
a a b b n n
E = _
E = Exposure.
C = Concentration of contaminant.
T = Time period of exposure at a particular concentration.
The exposure (E) must never exceed the time-weighted average
limits designated in Tables Z-l, Z-2, and Z-3 of the OSHA
standards.
Sample problem. Suppose that a group of workers is exposed
to naphtha (coal tar) in the following concentrations over
an 8-hour period:
3 hours exposure at 80 ppm
2 hours exposure at 70 ppm
3 hours exposure at 120 ppm
Use the formula given to calculate the time-weighted average
exposure as follows:
TT _ 3(80) + 2(70) + 3(120)
E _
E = 92.5 ppm.
13-S-5
-------
LESSON: Air Contaminants
The time-weighted average limit for naphtha is 100 ppm,, as
given in Table Z-l, OSHA standards. Therefore, the exposure
calculated above is within the permissible limits.
Excursion Factor
The concept of a time-weighted average assumes that the; con-
centration of contaminant fluctuates during the 8-hour period.
The concentration may be above the TWA for parts of the: time
period and below the TWA for other parts of the time period.
However, the extent of fluctuation above the TWA must be
limited, since excessively high concentrations, even for short
periods, may be harmful. The maximum extent to which the TWA
can be exceeded is called the excursion factor.
In most instances, excursion factors are based on the magni-
tude of the time-weighted average. The table below gives the
allowable excursion factors for various time-weighted averages,
TWA
Dr me
Greater than Less than Excursion Factor
o
(ppm or mg/m )
0 1 3
1 10 2
10 100 1.5
100 1000 1.25
Thus, if the permissible 8-hour TWA is 12 ppm the excursion
factor is 12 x 1.5 = 18 ppm.
13-S-6
-------
LESSON: Air Contaminants
Time-Weighted Average and the Excursion Factor
18
.B
e
c
'6
§ 9
o
o
'-13
cti
-fcl
O>
u
Excursion Factor
1
1
1
2
1
3
i
4
Time (hours)
1
5
1
6
I
7
I
8
Slide 13-1.
This slide illustrates both a time-weighted average and the
excursion factor. The time-weighted average for the con-
taminant formic acid is 9 mg/m3. This average has not been
exceeded, since the area of the curve above the TWA is less
than the area below the TWA. The excursion factor is 2 (from
the preceding table). Therefore, the maximum allowable ex-
cursion is 18.
13-S-7
-------
LESSON: Air Contaminants
Contaminant Mixtures
In some instances, workers may be exposed to a mixture of
contaminants. To determine the permissible exposure, you
must assume that the mixture of contaminants has an additive
effect. Also, the concentration of any one of the components
must be less than the TWA for that component if it existed
as a single contaminant.
Use the following formula to determine whether or not the
exposure to a mixture of contaminants is within acceptable
limits :
i o n
_ J. , ^ . • • • • n - -
Em = 17 + L7 + IT =1°r 16SS
12 n
Em = Exposure (for a mixture) .
C = Concentration of contaminant .
L = Permissible concentration for the
contaminant as stipulated in Tables
Z-l, Z-2, and Z-3 of the OSHA standards.
If the exposure (Em) is equal to or, less than 1, then the
exposure to the contaminant mixture is within acceptable
limits. If Em is greater than 1, the exposure exceeds
acceptable limits.
Sample problem. Suppose that the air in the breathing zone
of a worker contains 5 ppm of carbon tetrachloride (TWA =
10 ppm) , 20 ppm of ethylene dichloride (TWA = 50 ppm) , and
10 ppm of ethylene dibromide (TWA = 20 ppm) .
Atmospheric concentration of the mixture is 35 ppm (5 + 20 +
10).
By applying the above formula the following values are obtained;
_1 4. 20. 10 = 25 + 20 + 25 _ ,
10 50 20 50 ~
Since this value is not equal to or less than 1, the thresh-
old limit has been exceeded. The TWA for this mixture may
be calculated by reducing the total fraction to 1.0.
35
TWA of the mixture = -j- r = 25 ppm.
For this mixture the concentration would have to be reduced
to 25 ppm while maintaining the same ratio of the three
components .
13-S-8
-------
LESSON: Air Contaminants
CEILING VALUES
29 CFR 1910.1000—
Occupational Safety
and Health Standards,
Table G-l.
There are some substances for which a time-weighted average
concentration is not appropriate. Included in this category
are fast-acting substances, which are best controlled by
ceiling limits. These limits should not be exceeded at any
time. If the name of a contaminant is preceded by the letter
"C" in the table of permissible concentrations, it means that
a worker must never be exposed to a concentration in excess
of value given in the table.
oo
.6
"Sc
n
O
a
a
g
0
O
u
If employees are exposed to a contaminant that has a ceiling
value (C), then exposure must be determined by repeatedly
measuring the contaminant concentration over the 8-hour work
shift. If any of these measurements exceed the ceiling value,
then the situation is not in compliance with the standards.
The following slide illustrates the ceiling value. At: no
time may the concentration of contaminant exceed the ceiling
value, represented by the dotted line.
Ceiling Value
Ceiling Value
1
345
Time (hours)
Slide 13-2.
13-S-9
-------
LESSON: Air Contaminants
Conversion Formulas
Exposure values may be converted to ppm or mg/m by using
these formulas:
3
mg/m x 24.45
molecular weight
of the contaminant
, 3 _ ppm x molecular weight
mg/m ~ of the contaminant
24.45
ESTABLISHING A MONITORING SCHEDULE
Measurement of the concentration of air contaminants in the
laboratory should be made in accordance with a regular sched-
ule. This should be done by a professional industrial hygien-
ist or other qualified person on the staff.
ABATEMENT OF AIR CONTAMINANT HAZARDS
National Safety In addition to monitoring the contaminant concentration,
Council, Fundamen- methods must be devised for abating these hazards. As a
tals of Industrial supervisor, you are responsible for assuring that the estab-
Hygiene, Chap. 3. lished control procedures, equipment, etc. are being utilized,
The hazards are best controlled at their source. Given here
are some approved methods for air contaminant abatement, in
order of preference.
Substitute a less hazardous material or process.
For example, in abrasive cleaning, steel shot could
replace silica sand.
Enclose the operation and provide local exhaust
ventilation to carry away the contaminant.
Isolate the operation by performing it in
another building or in an isolated area of
the same building.
Use water to reduce air borne dust. In some
instances, aisles may be wetted. Water can
also be used in drilling to prevent dust from
escaping into the air.
13-S-10
-------
LESSON: Air Contaminants
Reduce the concentration of the contaminant by increas-
ing the air supply of the general ventilation system.
This method may not be very efficient and usually is
expensive.
Perform operations at night or on weekends when fewer
employees will be exposed. Workers probably will need
to be supplied with respirators.
Reduce the number of working hours at the particular
exposure.
29 CFR 1910.134— Use approved respiratory equipment. Respiratory pro-
Occupational Safety tective equipment should be used as a primary control
and Health Standards. method only when control of the hazard is not feasible
or adequate by engineering or administrative controls.
All respirators must comply with OSHA standards.
Lesson 18 of this course covers this subject.
FIRST AID FOR ACUTE EXPOSURES
The first aid procedures required for instances in which a
worker has been subjected to an air contaminant in concen-
trations greater than the maximum permissible exposure may
vary somewhat, depending upon the nature of the contaminant
and its effect on the human body.
Inhalation Poisoning
In many instances, the contaminant reacts with the body
in such a way as to reduce the available oxygen supply
for vital body functions. The victim may show any of the
following symptoms: dizziness, headache, weakness, breath-
ing difficulty, heart palpitation, loss of consciousness.
American National Red In general, follow the steps given below:
Cross, First Aid and
Personal Safety, Chap. Remove the victim to fresh air, without exposing
7. the rescuer to poisoning.
Remove any contaminated clothing from the victim
and keep him warm.
Maintain an open airway.
If breathing has stopped, apply artificial
respiration.
13-S-u
-------
LESSON: Air Contaminants
Supply oxygen, or an oxygen-carbon dioxide mixture for
inhalation, if necessary.
Seek medical assistance as quickly as possible.,
Poisoning by Mouth
If the victim has swallowed a poison, take the following
steps:
Dilute or neutralize the poison, if victim is conscious,
Do not give fluids to an unconscious person.
Induce vomiting, unless the victim has swallowed a
corrosive poison, is unconscious, or is having convul-
sions.
Give artificial respiration, if needed.
Seek medical assistance immediately.
Contact Poisons
The general procedure for skin contact with poisons is as
follows:
Remove contaminated clothing.
Immediately drench and flush the affected skin with
large quantities of water as you remove the clothing.
If the poisoning is from a pesticide or corrosive
substance, send for an ambulance immediately.
Continue washing all contaminated skin with soap and
water for at least 5 minutes.
Keep the victim's airway open. Give artificial
respiration if needed. Do not leave the victim
alone.
Eye Contamination
Emergency treatment for instances in which chemicals enter
the eye is as follows:
Immediately wash the injured eye thoroughly with plain
water. Delay of a few seconds greatly increases the
extent of injury.
l.VS-12
-------
LESSON: Air Contaminants
Continue washing for at least 15 minutes. Then take
the victim to a physician for treatment.
Make sure contact lenses are removed. Contact: lenses
prevent thorough irrigation and can cause further
injury.
13-S-13
-------
LESSON: Air Contaminants
QUESTIONS
1. Define the term "8-hour time-weighted average."
2. You are looking up a substance in the table of permissible concentrations
in the OSHA standards, and you notice a "C" in front of the name of the
substance. What does this mean?
3. Define "acceptable ceiling concentration."
4. What is meant by an excursion factor?
5. The TWA of isopropyl alcohol is 400 ppm. What is the excursion factor?
What is the maximum concentration of isopropyl alcohol to which a worker
may be exposed?
13-S-H
-------
Lesson 14
-------
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
SAFETY MANAGEMENT TRAINING PROGRAM
LESSON: Hand and Portable Power Tools
No. 14
Time:
hour
Objectives; This lesson will enable the trainee to recognize
properly guarded hand and portable power tools; to
inspect and select hand and portable power tools;
to initiate accident prevention techniques with
respect to hand and portable power tools; and to
participate in a tool control program.
Content; This lesson discusses the hazards associated with
tools that are improperly guarded, used and main-
tained. It briefly covers the OSHA standards for
guarding, using, and maintaining hand and portable
power tools and outlines the essential elements of
a good in-house tool control program.
Methods:
Lecture, discussion, questions.
References; 29 CFR 1910.241-2A4—Occupational Safety and Health Standards.
National Safety Council, Accident Prevention Manual, Chapter 32.
Department of Labor, Bulletin 293, Safe Use of Hand and
Portable Power Tools.
Materials; Slide Projector (35 mm) and screen
Slide: 14-1
14-S-l
-------
LESSON: Hand and Portable Power Tools
TOOL HAZARDS
Because of the widespread use of hand tools and powered
portable tools and the severity of many tool injuries, it
is important that control of tool accidents be made a part
of every safety program. Hand tools are the source of
about 7 to 8 percent of all compensable injuries per year.
Disabilities resulting from misuse of tools or the use of
defective tools include:
• Eye injury and loss of vision.
• Puncture wounds from flying chips.
• Slivers from concussion tools.
• Severed tendons and arteries from cutting tools.
• Broken bones and contusions from slipping wrenches.
• Projectile wounds (similar to bullet wounds) from
explosive-actuated fasteners.
• Electric shock from improper/inadequate grounding
of tools.
• Numerous cuts, bruises, burns, abrasions, pinches,
etc.
Most accidents associated with the use of hand and powered
tools result from workers' failures to observe one or more
of the following rules:
Slide 14-1
1. SELECT THE RIGHT TOOL FOR THE JOB.
2. KEEP TOOLS IN GOOD CONDITION.
3. USE TOOLS THE RIGHT WAY.
4. KEEP TOOLS IN A SAFE PLACE.
OSHA STANDARDS
29 CFR 1910.242— The OSHA standards stipulate that employers are responsible
Occupational Safety for the safe condition of all tools and equipment used by
and Health Standards employees. This includes all tools and equipment jfurnished
by employees.
As a supervisor, you are the person in closest contact with
employees on the job. Therefore, it becomes your responsi-
bility to see that the employees under your supervision are:
14-S-2
-------
LESSON: Hand and Portable Power Tools
1. Provided with safe, well guarded tools.
2. Trained and knowledgeable in the safe and
proper use and handling of tools.
3. Given tools that are well maintained.
4. Provided with safe storage facilities for tools.
29 CFR 1910.212(a) Another OSHA standard, 29 CFR 1910.212(a)(1) places the
Occupational Safety overall burden on the employer as regards tools and
and Health Standards equipment. This standard is in Subpart 0 - Machinery
and Machine Guarding. It states:
>.
One or more methods of machine guarding shall be
provided to protect the operator and other employees
in the machine area from hazards such as those
created by points of operation, in-going nip points,
rotating parts, flying chips, and sparks.
The point of operation is the area where
material is actually positioned and work
is performed during any process such as
shearing, punching, forming, or assembling.
In-going nip points are the in-running points
of contact between belts and pulleys, two
parallel shafts or wheels rotating in opposite
directions, rack and pinion, and similar
mechanisms.
Tools should, therefore, be equipped with safeguards
that will prevent the operator or other employees
from being inadvertently injured.
The tools and the safeguard devices must be
maintained in good condition.
29 CFR 1910.243-244— The OSHA standards prescribe safeguards for all machines
Occupational Safety and for the following types of portable power tools.
and Health Standards
Portable circular saws
Switches and controls on all power tools
Grounding of electrically powered tools
14-S-3
-------
LESSON: Hand and Portable Power Tools
Pneumatic power tools and hoses
Portable abrasive wheels
Explosive-actuated fastening tools
Power lawnmowers
Jacks
Specific Types of Here are some of the specific types of guards that are
Guards required on the portable tools that are listed above:
• Portable circular saws shall have a guard that
encloses the periphery of the saw blade except the
lower part that is in contact with the work. The
saw shall be equipped with a guard for the lower
part of the blade that automatically covers that:
part of the blade when it is removed from the work.
• Switches and controls for all portable power tools
shall be of the "dead man" type. This means that
the power must turn off automatically when the opera-
tor takes pressure off of the start/run control.,
• All electrical portable tools must be suitably
grounded or be of the double insulated type.
• Pneumatic power tools and hoses. A tool retainer
shall be fitted to these tools so that the actual
tool will not be able to escape from the tool holder.
Air hoses and their connections shall be designed for
the pressures and usage to which they are put.
• Portable abrasive wheels have these restrictions.
For most wheels, at least 180° of the periphery
shall be enclosed.
The wheel shall be stamped with its maximum
operating speed. That speed shall not be
exceeded.
Before mounting the wheel shall be given a
ring test.
• Explosive actuated fastening tools are particularly
dangerous. They actually shoot fasteners, like nails,
into the work. Unless the tool is aimed right, or the
material has enough depth, the fastener can ricochet
or go completely through the work. Precautions in
their use include:
14-S-4
-------
LESSON: Hand and Portable Power Tools
Treat them as if they were guns (actually they
are guns) .
Do not fire into a cracked or broken surface.
Be sure that the fastener will be held in the
work.
Do not leave the tools unattended.
Do not point them at anyone, or use them if
they have a known or obvious defect.
If you have a misfire check the standard for
instructions and follow them to the letter.
When the charge does not fire immediately
you will not know if the firing is simply
delayed or if it failed. The standards
require you to delay for 30 seconds, try
again, wait another 30 seconds, then
unload the charge and quickly put it in
water.
Wear eye and face protection when using these
tools.
Power lawn mowers, particulary the rotary type, can
be dangerous.
If self-propelled, always see that the drive
is in neutral before trying to start the engine.
Keep hands, feet, etc. out from under the blade
cover.
Do not use the mower where it can pick up rocks
or other small objects.
Keep the guards in place over the mower blades.
Jacks, used for lifing heavy loads, must be inspected
frequently—at least every 6 months.
Care must be taken to not overload the jacks. Do
not use a handle longer than the one that came
with the jack.
Along this line,most manually operated
hoisting equipment is designed to lift
14-S-5
-------
LESSON: Hand and Portable Power Tools
rated load with only one man operating it.
If you use two men or if you give the opera-
tor a mechanical advantage by using a longer
handle, as on a jack, you can easily over-
load the equipment.
After raising a load with a jack, block it up or
crib it before allowing anyone to work under the
load.
Be sure that jacks are placed on a firm surface.
An effective tool control program is a must in order to
assure that tools are maintained in good operating condition
and stored safely. The essentials of a tool control program
are:
• Employee training in tool safety.
• Centralized tool control.
• Regular tool maintenance and repair.
These essentials are described below:
Employee Training
Employee training in tool safety should cover the
following subjects:
• Selecting the right tools for each type of job.
• The safe and proper use and handling of each type
of tool.
• Types of personal protective equipment and guards
for various tools and how to use them.
• How to detect unsafe, worn, defective, or badly
deteriorated tools.
• Good tool storage practices.
• The procedures for your establishment's tool
control program.
Positive Tool Control
A centralized tool control facility is the best means
of assuring positive tool control. It has these
advantages:
14-S-6
-------
LESSON: Hand and Portable Power Tools
• Uniform tool inspection by trained personnel.
• Good tool accountability.
• Effective record keeping of accidents caused
by faulty tools.
• Uniform tiool maintenance.
• Control over new purchases, inspection of new
tools.
If the work areas are spread out, however, a centralized
tool control facility may not be practicable. The super-
visor must then set up a schedule of operation for fre-
quent inspection and maintenance of his employees'
tools. It would include:
• Periodic inspection based on experience.
• A supply of replacement tools while maintenance
is being performed.
• A means of performing maintenance; perhaps con-
tracting it out.
• Maintenance of records of the condition of tools
at inspection.
• A procedure for inspecting tools that are issued
to the employee, after purchase, maintenance, or
repair.
Tool Maintenance and Repair
This process is an essential part of the tool control
program. There is only one way to maintain tools
and that is the right way. The essentials of the pro-
cess are:
• Inspection of the incoming tools for defects.
This may be a visual examination of a sledge
hammer to see that the handle is not cracked or
split, that the head is firmly attached to the
handle and that the head is not burred, mushroomed,
cracked or chipped. On the other hand, in the
case of a chain saw, for example, a complete dis-
assembly of the tool and inspection of the clutch,
throttle, etc. may be necessary.
14-S-7
-------
LESSON: Hand and Portable Power Tools
• A record of defects found should be made and
attached to the tool. This listing should
accompany the tool while it is in the shop.
• The necessary repair work is performed and a
notation made on the correction of each defect.
• On completion of the repairs, the tool is
examined to assure that the needed repairs were
actually performed and that the tool can be
expected to hold up in good condition until
the next maintenance period.
14-S-8
-------
LESSON: Hand and Portable Power Tools
QUESTIONS
1. Accidents associated with hand tools amount to about percent of
all compensable injuries.
2. Most tool-associated accidents can be prevented by which four basic
practices?
Keeping efficient accident records.
Having employees use establishment-owned tools.
Using tools properly.
Keeping tools in good condition.
Hiring a trained tool room attendant.
Establishing a regular inventory schedule.
Storing tools properly.
Using the proper tool for each job.
3. Employee training in tool safety should include:
Tool control program procedures.
How to order proper tools.
How to recondition tools.
How to organize a tool room.
How to repair tools.
How to use guards.
How to store tools.
How to use various tools.
How to recognize unsafe tools.
How to inspect tool operations.
How to pick the right tool for the job.
How to determine if there are enough tools on hand.
4. The entire periphery of a portable circular saw blade is guarded
when \ .
5. A dead man control when the
start/run button is released.
6. Electrical tools must be or
7. The tool retainer for pneumatic tools
8. Portable abrasive wheels must be given a before mounting.
9. An explosive actuated tool is similar to a and should be
treated as one.
10. Self-propelled power lawn mowers should be in when
starting the engine.
14-S-9
-------
LESSON: Hand and Portable Power Tools
QUESTIONS
11. If you cannot raise a load with a jack with the handle that was
furnished with it, get a longer handle.
True False
12. What are the three basic elements of a good tool control program?
14-S-10
-------
Lesson 15
-------
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
SAFETY MANAGEMENT TRAINING PROGRAM
LESSON: Hazardous Materials
No. 15
Time:
2 hours
Objectives: Completion of this lesson will enable the trainee to identify
the hazards that may be created in the laboratory in handling,
storing, and processing the more frequently used chemicals,
carcinogens, and asbestos, and to determine procedures for
abating these hazards.
Content: This lesson contains basic information about 47 stubstances
commonly used in the laboratory, with an analysis of the
possible hazards of each substance. The OSHA standards for the
handling of carcinogens and asbestos also are covered.
Methods:
Lecture, discussion, questions.
References; 29 CFR 1910.1000-1016—Occupational Safety and Health Standards.
National Safety Council, Fundamentals of Industrial Hygiene,
Appendices B and C.
Sax, N. Irving, Dangerous Properties of Industrial Materials,
3rd Edition.
National Fire Protection Association, Fire Protection Guide
on Hazardous Materials.
Manufacturing Chemists Association, Laboratory Waste Disposal
Manual.
15-S-l
-------
LESSON: Hazardous Materials
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS IN THE LABORATORY
Many of the chemicals used in the laboratory possess pro-
perties which can be hazardous to the health and safety of
workers.
The hazards vary greatly in type and severity. Some sub-
stances are flammable or explosive, some are toxic, some
are highly reactive, and some exhibit a combination of
these characteristics.
Hazard Analysis and Control
As a supervisor, you are required to make judgments on the
degree of hazards associated with the use of a given chemi-
cal in your laboratory. Each chemical must be evaluated
for the following hazards:
• Flammable and/or explosive properties
• Toxic effects, if any. These may vary from a
mild skin or respiratory irritation to acute and
fatal poisoning or chronic, irreversible damage
to the body.
• Reactivity with water or with other chemicals.
• Means of waste disposal to avoid personal injury
or contamination of ground, air or water.
After you have made an analysis of chemical hazards, you
must determine the measures necessary to control exposures.
For example, you may decide that a highly flammable solvent
can be replaced with a less flammable solvent. Whenever
feasible, substituting a less hazardous substance in place
of a highly hazardous substance is the preferred method of
control.
Where substitution is not possible, you must be able to
determine procedures for use and handling of the chemical
within safe limits. Enclosing and ventilating the process
may be required, for example, or workers may need to wear
protective clothing or use respirators.
15-S-2
-------
LESSON: Hazardous Materials
HAZARDS CREATED BY FREQUENTLY USED CHEMICALS
This lesson gives basic information about 47 commonly-used
chemicals to aid you in evaluating the hazards presented by
their use in the laboratory.
A brief statement of the major hazards presented by each
of these 47 chemicals is given in Table 15-1 which is
attached to this lesson.
TABLE OF HAZARDOUS CHARACTERISTICS OF FREQUENTLY USED
CHEMICALS
Table 15-2 shows the hazardous characteristics of the 47
frequently used chemicals. It is appended to this lesson.
Column headings of the table are defined as follows:
Substance/formula. Substances are listed alphabetically
by common names. The chemical formula for the substance
also is given.
Permissible exposure, ppm (rng/M-^). This column lists the
permissible exposures as given in OSHA standards, 29CFR
1910.100Q-Occupational Safety and Health Standards. The
permissible exposure refers to the concentrations of air-
borne contaminants to which it is believed that workers
may be exposed for an 8-hour day, 40-hour week, for a
working lifetime without adverse effect. Permissible
exposures are given in parts of vapor or gas per million
parts of air by volume at 25° C. and.760 mm. Hg. pressure,
or (in parentheses) in milligrams of particulate per cubic
meter or air. For a further discussion of permissible
exposures, refer to Lesson 13 of this training course,
entitled "Air Contaminants."
Flash point. The flash point is the lowest temperature at
which the liquid gives off sufficient vapor to form an igni-
table mixture with air and produce a flame when an ignition
source is brought near the surface of the liquid.
Ignition temperature. The ignition temperature of a sub-
stance is the minimum temperature required to initiate or
cause self-sustained combustion independent of the source
of heat. The substance may be solid, liquid or gaseous.
15-S-3
-------
LESSON: Hazardous Materials
Flam, limits. Flammable or explosive limits are those con-
centrations of a vapor or gas in air below or above which
propagation of a flame does not occur on contact with a
source of ignition. The concentrations are given in the
table of terms in percentage by volume of gas or vapor in
air.
Health hazards. This column indicates the degree of toxicity
of the substance and the nature of the poisoning or irritation
caused.
Fire hazards. This column indicates the degree of flammable
or explosive hazard presented by the substance.
Other hazards. This column gives other specific hazards of
the substance, such as reactivity with water, heat, other
chemicals, oxidizers, etc.
Storage and handling. This column gives recommended proce-
dures for the storage and handling of the substance.
Waste Disposal Method. This column contains a number which
is keyed to the recommended procedure for disposing of
wastes of the chemical. The waste disposal procedures are
discussed in Lesson 16.
CARCINOGENS IN THE LABORATORY
Special attention must be given to the handling of carcino-
gens in the laboratory.
All of the substances listed in Table 15-3 below can cause,
or are suspected of causing, cancer in humans. The concen-
trations listed are work practice standards taken from the
American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists'
listing of Threshold Limit Values for Chemical Substances
and Physical Agents in the Workroom Environment. Except for
the value given for coal tar pitch volatiles, there are no
permissible exposures listed as such in the OSHA standards.
15-S-4
-------
LESSON: Hazardous Materials
Substance
Table 15-3
CARCINOGENS
Permissible Exposure
Coal Tar Pitch Volatiles 200yg/m3
4-Nitrobiphenyl Zero
alpha-Naphthylamine Zero
4,4'-Methylene bis
(2-chloroaniline) Minimum
Methyl Chloromethyl Ether Minimum
3,3'-Dichlorobenzine (and its salts) Minimum
bis-Chloromethyl Ether 1 ppb
beta-Naphthylamine Zero
Benzidine Zero
4-Aminodiphenyl Zero
Ethyleneimine Minimum
beta-Propiolactone Minimum
2-Acetylaminofluorene Zero
4-Dimethylaminoazobenzene Zero
N-Nitrosodimethylamine Minimum
Permissible Exposures
Among the substances without an assigned permissible..con-
centration, some are known human carcinogens while others
are suspected human carcinogens—that is, they are of high
potency in inducing tumors in animals under experimental
conditions.
15-S-5
-------
LESSON: Hazardous Materials
Zero exposure is required for known carcinogens without
assigned exposure limits. This means that no exposure or
contact by any route—respiratory, oral, or skin—as detected
by the most sensitive instruments is permitted.
Controls involve isolating the process or operation
by the best practicable engineering methods and pro-
tecting the worker by proper equipment and clothing
that will assure virtually no contact or entry of
the carcinogen by any route.
Minimum exposure is required for experimental carcinogens
in light of their potency in inducing cancerous tumors in
animals.
Controls involve extraordinary care in both manufac-
ture and handling of the substance so that workers'
exposure by all routes is kept below the limit of
sensitivity of the analytic method of determining
the exposure concentration.
Control Measures for Carcinogens
29 CFR 1910.1002-1016 The OSHA standards require specific control measures for the
(c)—Occupational carcinogens shown in the chart as follows:
Safety and Health
Standards • Maintenance of a regulated area where the car-
cinogen is used, handled, stored, manufactured,
processed, or packaged. These regulated areas
must meet certain requirements regarding employee
identification, emergency measures, medical sur-
veillance, hygiene facilities and special prac-
tices, and contamination control measures.
• Strict maintenance of employee cleanliness and
use of protective clothing in isolated or closed
system operations. (Open-vessel systems are not
permitted.) All means must be taken to prevent
work area contamination.
• Special controls for laboratory activities.
• Special maintenance and decontamination activities.
• Warning signs.
15-S-6
-------
LESSON: Hazardous Materials
For entrances to regulated areas:
CANCER-SUSPECT AGENT
AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY
For entrances to regulated areas where
decontamination activities take place:
CANCER-SUSPECT AGENT EXPOSED
IN THIS AREA
IMPERVIOUS SUIT, INCLUDING
GLOVES, BOOTS, AND
AIR-SUPPLIED HOOD REQUIRED
AT ALL TIMES
AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY
For containers of carcinogenic material;
CANCER-SUSPECT AGENT
• Special training and indoctrination for employees
authorized to enter regulated areas.
• Program of medical surveillance for all employees
who enter regulated areas.
• Reports/Recordkeeping:
Reports to OSHA of operations within
regulated areas.
Reports to OSHA within 24 hours of any
exposure to carcinogenic agents.
Records of medical surveillance to be kept
for duration of a worker's employment. Upon
termination of employment, records are sent
to NIOSH. Copies of these records may be
supplied to an employee's or former employee's
physician.
15-S-7
-------
LESSON: Hazardous Materials
29CFR 1910.1001—
Occupational Safety
and Health Standards
ASBESTOS
The inhalation of asbestos fibers can produce a fibrosis
of the lungs called asbestosis. The condition develops and
advances slowly and is resistant to treatment. Evidence also
exists to show that inhaled asbestos causes lung cancer.
Permissible Exposure
The permissible exposures to asbestos fibers given in the
OSHA standards are as follows:
The 8-hour time-weighted average for any employee
must never exceed:
5 fibers longer than 5 micrometers per cubic
centimeter of air.
Effective 1 July 1976, the 8-hour time-weighted average
exposure must never exceed:
2 fibers longer than 5 micrometers per cubic
centimeter of air.
Ceiling concentration: No employee shall ever be
exposed over any 15-minute period to concentrations
greater than:
10 fibers longer than 5 micrometers per cubic
centimeter of air.
Controlling Exposure to Asbestos
The following control methods may be used to meet exposure
limits for processes involving the handling of asbestos:
• Engineering controls—isolation, enclosure,
exhaust ventilation, dust collection, wet
methods.
• Personal protective equipment.
Respirators (for emergencies, while engineering
controls are installed, or when engineering con-
trols are not feasible or adequate).
• Special clothing (including change rooms, lockers,
and laundering facilities) for employees exposed
to airborne asbestos fibers in excess of the
ceiling level.
15-S-8
-------
LESSON: Hazardous Materials
• Area and personal monitoring.
• Caution signs and labels.
Caution signs (posted in all areas where
airborne asbestos concentrations may be in
excess of the permissible limits):
ASBESTOS
DUST HAZARD
AVOID BREATHING DUST
WEAR ASSIGNED PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
DO NOT REMAIN IN AREA UNLESS
YOUR WORK REQUIRES IT
BREATHING ASBESTOS DUST MAY BE
HAZARDOUS TO YOUR HEALTH
Caution labels (affixed to all products con-
taining asbestos fibers, except on asbestos
products where no airborne concentrations in
excess of the permissible limits will be
released):
CAUTION
CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS
AVOID CREATING DUST
BREATHING ASBESTOS DUST MAY CAUSE
SERIOUS BODILY HARM
Strict housekeeping procedures and waste disposal
methods.
15-S-9
-------
LESSON: Hazardous Materials
• Recordkeeping
Exposure records, including both environ-
mental and personal monitoring records,
must be kept for 3 years.
Each employee must be given access to his
own records.
An employee must be given written notice of
exposures in excess of permissible limits
within 5 days of the finding.
• Medical control.
Preplacement, annual, and termination-of-
employment exams, which must include at
least a chest roentgengram, medical history,
and pulmonary function tests.
Medical records kept for 20 years.
Access to medical records by individual
employees, the OSHA Assistant Secretary of
Labor, the Director of NIOSH, or medical
consultants for any of them.
The diamond-shaped symbol for each chemical listed iri
Table 15-2 (page 15-B-l) shows the inherent hazards of the
chemical and the order of their severity. The left square
is blue and represents health hazards; the top square is
red and represents flammability; the right square is
yellow and represents reactivity. The bottom square is
colorless and is used to identify a number of special
hazards, such as reactivity with water, radiation hassard,
etc.
Each colored square contains a number representing the
severity of the hazard. The five numerical gradings
extend from 4 (indicating severe hazard or extreme danger)
to zero (indicating no special hazard).
15-S-10
-------
LESSON: Hazardous Materials
QUESTIONS
1. List 4 factors which you must consider in determining the type and
severity of hazards associated with the storage and handling of a given
chemical in the laboratory.
2. Define the following terms:
Flash point:
Flammable limits:
Ignition temperature:
3. Name 3 hazardous chemicals used in your laboratory and give the
following information for each: (1) toxic effects, (2) flammable or
explosive characteristics, (3) other hazards, and (4) storage and
handling procedures.
15-S-ll
-------
LESSON: Hazardous Materials
4. Define "zero exposure" for carcinogenic substances.
5. According to OSHA standards, what is the 8-hour time-weighted average
for exposures to asbestos fibers?
15-S-12
-------
Table 15-1
HAZARDS CREATED BY FREQUENTLY USED CHEMICALS
Acetone. Extremely flammable. Reacts with oxidizers.
Arsenic compounds. Fumes highly toxic. Finely divided particles of arsenic
compounds may react with finely divided particles of other compounds
such as oxidizers.
Benzene. Chronic poisoning by inhalation of small amounts over a long
period of time. One of the most dangerous organic solvents in com-
mercial use. Flammable.
Carbon Disulfide. Highly toxic. Extremely flammable. Completely enclose
operations using carbon disulfide.
Carbon Monoxide. Poisoning by inhalation.
Carbon Tetrachlortde. Poisoning by inhalation, skin contact.
Chlordane. Toxic, primarily through ingestion.
Chlorine. Highly reactive, poisoning by inhalation.
Chloroform. Highly toxic, poisoning by inhalation.
Cyanides. Toxic and flammable vapors formed on contact with acids, moisture,
heat.
Cyclohexane. Fire hazard when exposed to heat or flame. Reacts with
oxidizers.
Dieldrin. Poisoning by skin contact, inhalation.
DiJSObutyl Ketone. Low hazards. Minor eye, skin irritation.
Ethyl Alcohol. Flammable. Reacts with oxidizers. Low toxicity.
Ethyl Ether. Extremely flammable and explosive.
Fluorides. Certain fluorides are highly irritating to skin, others cause
chronic inhalation poisoning.
Fluorine. Powerful caustic irritant. Very reactive.
15-A-l
-------
Formaldehyde. Extremely irritating to respiratory system and skin.
Heptane. Irritating to respiratory tract. Flammable.
Hexane. Highly flammable. Mild irritant.
Hydrogen Bromide. Respiratory irritant. Reacts with moisture.
Hydrogen Chloride. Eye, skin, respiratory irritant. Single massive doses
can cause fatal lung injuries.
Hydrogen Cyanide. Extremely poisonous. Flammable.
Hydrogen Fluoride. Extremely irritating and corrosive to the skin and
respiratory system, particularly in presence of moisture.
Hydrogen Sulfide. Highly toxic. High concentrations cause immediate death.
Flammable.
Iodine. Oxidizing agent. Vapors irritate mucous membranes, lungs.
Lead compounds. Chronic poisoning by dust inhalation or ingestion. Affect
red blood cells.
Mercury. Toxic vapors emanate from spilled mercury. Affect central nervous
system.
Mercury compounds, (organic). Toxicity varies. Can be absorbed through
skin or by inhalation.
Methanol. Cumulative poisoning by inhalation or ingestion. Optic nerve
damage. Flammable.
Methyl Bromide. Inhalation poisoning. Dangerous concentrations can be
present with no odor or irritating effect. Onset of symptoms delayed.
Extreme skin irritant.
Methyl Butyl Ketone. Fire and explosive hazard. Low toxicity.
Methylene Chloride. Highly volatile. Narcotic effect in high concentrations.
Methyl Ethyl Ketone. Flammable. Reacts with oxidizers.
Methyl ISODUtyl Ketone. Flammable. Reacts with reducing materials.
Nitrobenzene. Highly toxic. Absorbed through skin. Oxidizing agent.
Ozone. Highly reactive. Injures lungs.
Phosgene. Reacts with moisture to produce toxic and corrosive fumes. Severe
lung damage.
15-A-2
-------
Pyn'dine. Skin and eye damage on contact. Reacts vigorously with
oxidizers.
Sulfur Dioxide. Pungent gas affects upper respiratory system, eyes.
SulfurJC Acid. Highly reactive. Very corrosive. Causes deep tissue
damage.
Tellurium compounds. Relatively low toxicity. Produces garlic odor in
breath and sweat.
Toluene. Flammable. Strong odor. Irritates eyes and respiratory system.
Trichloroethane. Low toxicity.
Trichloroethylene. Low toxicity. Causes dermatitis.
Vinyl Chloride. Fire and explosive hazards great. Anesthetic in high
concentrations, causes skin burns.
Xylenes. Flammable. Narcotic in high concentrations. Dermatitis from
repeated skin contact.
15-A-3
-------
Table 15-2
HAZARDOUS CHARACTERISTICS OF FREQUENTLY USED CHEMICALS
Permissible Flash Ignlt.
Substance/ Exposure • point temp.
Formula ppm op op
(mg/M3)
Flam.
limits
% Health Hazards
Fire Hazards
Other Hazards
Waste
Disposal
Storage & Handling Method
Acetone
1000
(0.5)
1000 3-13 Low toxicity; skin,
eye irritant. Narco-
tic in high concen-
trations .
Highly toxic fumes;
causes gastro-intes-
tinal upset, liver &
kidney damage, skin
abnormalities, per-
foration of nasal
system.
12 1044 1.4-8 Highly toxic. Inhala-
tion poisoning;
repeated low doses
cause blood disorders,
anemia. Skin & eye
irritant.
-22 212 1-44 Highly toxic. Poisons
by skin contact,
ingestion, inhalation.
Repeated low doses
affect nervous system.
Extremely flammable;
Ignites at normal
temperatures.
Moderate hazard when
dusts exposed to heat
or flame.
Extremely flammable;
ignites at normal
temperatures.
Reacts vigorously
with oxidizing
materials.
Reacts with fluorine
at ordinary tempera-
tures. Certain finely
divided arsenic com-
pounds may react
vigorously with cer-
tain finely divided
oxidizers.
Reacts vigorously
with oxidizing
materials.
Extremely flammable.
Forms explosive mix-
tures with air over a
wide range. Vapors can
ignite on contact with
ordinary light bulb.
Reacts vigorously
with oxidizing
materials. Ignites
at ordinary tempera-
ture when mixed with
fluorine.
Store in cool venti-
lated, fire-proof area
away from oxidizing
agents.
Store in sealed con-
tainers, away from oxi-
dizers, in well-venti-
lated area.
Protect against physi-
cal damage. Outside
or detached storage
preferred. Store in-
side in flam, liquids
storage room or cabinet.
Use self-contained
breathing apparatus.
Completely enclose
operations using C$2 •
Protect against physi-
cal damage. Isolated
storage area with no
electrical installa-
tions or, heating faci-
lities. Avoid direct
sunlight. During hot
weather spray drums w/
water. Protect against
lightning, static elec.
No spark-producing
tools.
18
27d
18
-------
Carbon
monoxide ,'
CO , *J
\
Carbon
tetrachloride
CCtt,
P Chlorine
\/
Chloroform 'N 50C
CHC£3 ..•'
Cyanides
CU
50 1128 12.5-74 Inhalation poisoning.
Headache, nausea,
dizziness, muscular
depression, death.
Highly toxic. Poisons
by inhalation, skin
toxic. Chronic expo-
sure causes liver,
kidney damage. Acute
poisoning from heavy
exposure.
133 Highly toxic. Absorbedl
through skin, also by
ingestion. Acute poi-
soning can cause deathi
Chronic exposure
affects control of
nervous system, liver
kidneys.
Extremely irritating
to eyes and respira-
tory tract. High con-
centrations affect
lungs, may be fatal.
Skin irritant.
Highly toxic. Inhala-
tion poisoning. Power-
ful anesthetic action;
possible damage to
liver, heart.
(5) Extremely toxic.
Acute exposures cause
death by asphyxia.
Chronic exposure may
cause headache,
nausea, weakness, lo
loss of appetite,
respiratory and eye
1rritation.
Dangerous when
exposed to heat or
flame.
Not flammable.
Low hazard.
Non-combustible in
air, but most combus-
tible materials will
burn in chlorine as
in oxygen.
Slight, when exposed
to high heat; other-
wise practically non-
flammable.
Moderate, by chemical
reaction with heat,
moisture, acid.
Store in flammable
liquids storage room
or cabinet.
Protect against physi-
cal damage. Avoid skin
contact. Store and use
in well-ventilated area.
Protect against physi-
cal damage. Avoid skin
contact. Use in well-
ventilated area.
18
Reacts explosively or Protect against physi-
forms explosive com- cal damage. Store sepa-
pounds with many com- rately outdoors or in
mon chemicals. Flamma- well-ventilated, dry,
Kit. oaooo K. ..^nn^c -
ble gases & vapors
will form explosive
mixtures with chlorine.
Reacts with heat or
moisture to form toxic
fumes.
Produces toxic and
flammable vapors on
contact with acid,
acid fumes, water,
steam.
non-combustible area.
Enclose and ventilate
process. Store in cool
well-ventilated area.
Store in cool, dry,
well-ventilated area.
Avoid contact with
acids, moisture. Use
self-contained
breathing apparatus.
Avoid skin contact.
12a
27 j
14
-------
Cyclohexana/ \ 300
C6Hl2 A3 A
\
-4 500 1.3-8.4 Moderate. May act as Dangerous when exposed
simple asphyxiant. Pos- to heat or flame.
sible liver, kidney
damage.
Reacts with oxidizing
materials.
Store in cool, well-
ventilated area. Keep
away from heat sources,
flame, oxidizers.
18
Diisobutyl 50 n .140
Ketone
[(CH3)2CHCH2]2CO . '>_ ^ ^
Ethyl Alcoho/ ' 1000 \ /54
CH3CH2OH 3 /' V| -•'
•o;&
793 3.3-19
1.85-46
(2.5)
0.1
Not a serious hazard;
irritating to eyes,
respiratory tract.
Nasal irritation.
Large doses depress
central nervous system
& can produce intoxi-
cation, drowsiness,
stupor., unconscious-
ness .
Soluble inorganic
salts can hydrolyze
to form hydrogen
fluoride; can produce
severe skin b.urns. Less
soluble inorganic
salts can produce
chronic poisoning by
inhalation, affect
bones and teeth.
Extremely hazardous.
Causes severe irrita-
tion, burns to eyes,
skin, respiratory
tract.
Dangerous when exposed
to heat or flame.
Extremely flammable.
Low hazard.
Store in cool, well-
ventilated area, away
from oxidizers.
Store in cool, well-
ventilated area, away
from oxidizers.
Protect against physi-
cal damage. Store in
cool area, no sources
of ignition. Ground
containers to avoid
sparks. Store away
from oxidizers.
Toxic fumes when heated Protect against physi-
to decomposition, or on cal damage. Avoid skin
contact with acids. contact. Store in cool
area, away from acids.
Dangerous by chemical
reaction with reducing
agents.
Reacts with oxidizing
materials.
Reacts vigorously with
oxidizing materials.
Reacts vigorously with
oxidizing materials.
Oxidizing agent. Dan-
gerously reactive.
Reacts with many
materials at room tem-
perature. Reacts with
water to produce heat,
toxic, and corrosive
fumes.
Protect against physi-
cal damage. Isolate
from other storage.
Keep away from sources
of heat and ignition.
Wear full protective
clothing.
18
18
15
24b
12 a
-------
Formaldehyde /^ 3
HCHO /«\ *5C
806
Heptane
CH3(CH2)5CH
Hexane /\ 500
CH3(CH2)4CH/4
y Hydrogen
* Bromide
*• HBr
Hydrogen
Chloride
nee
Hydrogen
Cyanide
HCN
7.0-73 Extremely irritating
to respiratory system,
skin, eyes. Chronic
exposure can cause
hypersensitivity.
25
-7
433
502
10
1000
Moderate. Gas vapor- Can react with oxidi-
izes readily from solu- zing materials.
tion and is flammable
in air.
1.2-6.7 Irritating to respira- Dangerous when exposed Reacts with oxidizing
tory tract. High con- to heat or flame. materials.
centrations narcotic.
1.1-7.5 Anesthetic, no sys-
tematic toxicity.
Respiratory, skin
irritation; .gastro-
intestinal disturbance
Fumes corrosive to
tissues on contact.
Eye, skin, respiratory
irritation. Single
massive exposures
fatal.
6-41 Extremely poisonous.
Few breaths can cause
death. Absorbed
through skin.
Highly flammable,
volatile.
Non-flammable.
Non-flammable.
Flammable. Vapor forms
explosive mixtures w/
air over wide ranges.
Reacts with oxidizing
materials.
Reacts with moisture
to produce toxic and
corrosive fumes.
Reacts with moisture
to produce toxic and
corrosive fumes.
Reacts with moisture,
acids, oxidizing
materials.
Enclose and ventilate 2
processes. Avoid skin
contact. Wear goggles
and self-contained
breathing apparatus.
Protect against physi-
cal damage. Store away
from fire hazards, oxi-
dizing and alkaline
materials.
Store in cool, well- 18
ventilated area, away
from oxidizers.
Store in cool, well- 18
ventilated area, away
from oxidizers. Keep
away from sources of
ignition.
Protect against physi- 24b
cal damage. Store in
cool, dry, well-venti-
lated area.
Protect against physi- 24b
cal damage. Store in
cool, dry, well-venti-
lated area. Wear full
protective clothing.
Protect against physi- 14
cal damage. Outside or
detached storage pre-
ferred. Inside storage
in flammable liquid
storage room or cabi-
net. Isolate from other
storage; sources of
ignition. May become
unstable after extended
time. Wear full pro-
tective clothing.
-------
Hydrogen
Fluoride
HF
**20
Iodine
0.1C
<-" I
Lead compounds (0.2)
Mercury
** Img/
10M3
Highly toxic, irrita-
ting to eyes, skin,
respiratory tract.
Burns skin on contact.
Chronic exposure may
cause bone damage.
Non-flammable but
difficult to contain
as very corrosive.
Highly reactive.
Extremely corrosive
in presence of mois-
ture .
Protect against physi-
cal damage. Store in
dry well-ventilated
area, away from other
storage. Wear full
protective clothing.
500 4.3-46 Highly toxic. High con- Flammable. Forms Dangerously reactive Protect against physi-
centrations cause imme- explosive mixtures with with oxidizers; emits cal damage. Store in
diate death. Lower con- air over wide range. toxic fumes when heated isolated, detached,
centrations irritate to decomposition. ventilated, fire-
eyes and respiratory resistive area. Store
tract. away from nitric acid,
oxidizers, ignition
sources. Protect
against static electri-
city. Wear goggles,
self-contained breath-
ing apparatus.
Skin irritation and
inflammation. Vapors
irritate mucous mem-
branes' and lungs.
Chronic exposure can
cause nervousness,
irritation.
Poisoning by dust
inhalation, affects
red blood cells. Ab-
dominal cramps,
nausea, weakness,
dizziness, loss of
appetite.
Chronic exposure can
cause psychic and emo-
tional disturbances.
Affects control of
nervous system, mouth
and gums.
Non-flammable.
Oxidizing agent.
Some hazard when dusts
exposed to heat or
flame .
None.
Toxic fumes produced
when heated.
Toxic vapors can ema-
nate from spilled
mercury.
Protect against physi-
cal damage.
Store in sealed con-
tainers. Control dusts
and vapors. No food or
drinks where lead is
handled.
Store in sealed con-
tainers, in well-ven-
tilated area. Handle
over impervious sur-
faces; avoid floor
spills. Enclose and
exhaust processes.
24b
23
12 a
27 f
27b
-------
Mercury
compounds
(organic)
**lmg/
10M3
Vary in toxicity. Some Fulminates. Pose poten- Highly toxic fumes
Methanol
CH3OH
(methyl
alcohol)
Methyl
Bromide
CH3Br
200
867
20C
999
Methyl Butyl 100 . 95
Ketone
CH3OC(CH2)3CH3
:IXZN
Methylene *500
Chloride l.OOOC
991
1224
tial fire hazard.
when heated to decom-
position. Fulminates.
Can explode on impact.
cause skin burns and
dermatitis. Can be
absorbed through the
skin. Inhalation can
result in mercury in-
toxication. Some are
highly toxic; cause
brain damage, fatal
poisoning.
6-36.5 Poisoning by inhala- Dangerous when exposed Reacts vigorously with Store in cool, well-
Store in sealed con-
tainers in well-venti-
lated area. Enclose
processes and control
dusts. Supplied-air
respirators may be
required.
27b
tion or ingestion.
Narcotic. Affects ner-
vous system, especial-
ly optic nerves. Cumu-
lative poisoning. Skin
irritant.
10-16 High hazard. Inhala-
tion poisoning.
Delayed onset of symp-
toms. High 'concentra-
tions fatal. Low con-
centrations damage
lungs, central nervous
system, kidneys. Has
no odor or irritating
effect of dangerous
concentrations.
Extreme skin irritant.
1.2-8 Low toxicity. Eye and
nasal irritation. High
concentrations narco-
tic.
15.5-66 High concentrations
'in (>2 narcotic, can produce
liver damage. Dan-
gerous to eyes.
to heat or flame.
None under ordinary
conditions.
Dangerous fire and
explosion hazard.
None under ordinary
conditions. Explosive
mixtures formed in
atmospheres with high
oxygen content.
bxidizers.
Highly toxic fumes
when heated to decom-
position.
Can react with oxidi-
zing materials.
Irritating and toxic
fumes when heated to
decomposition.
ventilated area, away
from oxidizing
materials.
Protect against physi-
cal damage. Enclose and
ventilate processes.
Avoid skin contact.
Protect against physi-
cal damage. Outside
storage or in flammable
liquids storage cabinet.
Separate from oxidizing
materials.
Protect from physical
damage. Enclose and
ventilate operations.
Wear gas mask for or-
ganic vapors and fumes.
18
18
26
-------
Methyl Ethyl
Ketone
CH3COCH2CH
200
20
960
2-10 Irritates eyes, nose, Highly dangerous when Can react with oxidi- Protect against physi-
Methyl Isobutyl 100
Ketone
CH3COCH2CH(CH3)2
Nitrobenzene
C6H5N02
73
860
190
900
1.8
@ 200°F
0.1
0.1
throat in concentra-
tions not systemati-
cally dangerous. Nar-
cotic in high concen-
trations.
exposed to heat or
flame.
zing materials.
1.4-7.5 Irritates eyes, nose Dangerous when exposed Can react vigorously
& throat. Narcotic in to heat or flame. with reducing
high concentrations. materials.
Prolonged skin contact
causes dryness, irrita-
tion.
Pyridine
C5H5N
68
900
1.8-12.4
Highly toxic. Fatal Combustible liquid; Oxidizing agent.
amounts may be absorbed vapors form explosive
through skin, by inha- mixtures with air.
lation or ingestion.
Affects blood and ner-
vous systems, marked
cyanosis.
Dangerous by chemical Reacts with reducing
action with reducing agents.
agents or combustibles.
Explosive hazard severe
when shocked, exposed"
to heat or flame.
None.
Irritates mucous mem-
branes. Injures lungs.
High concentrations
can be lethal.
Severe lung damage due
to hydrolysis. May be
no immediate warning
symptoms at dangerous
concentrations. Small
doses may be lethal.
Skin and eye damage on Dangerous when exposed
contact. Large concen- to heat or flame.
trations narcotic.
Possible liver,kidney
damage.
cal damage. Outside
storage or in flammable
liquids storage room or
cabinet.
Protect against physi- 18
cal damage. Outside or
detached storage pre-
ferred. Inside storage
in flammable liquids
storage room or cabinet
Use in well-ventilated
area.
Protect against physi- 6
cal damage, freezing,
intense heat. Separate
detached storage pre-
ferred. Inside storage
in flammable liquids
room or cabinet. Wear
complete protective
clothing.
Protect against physi- 26
cal damage, heat,
shock. Separate,
detached storage pre-
ferred.
Produces toxic and cor- Protect against physi-
rosive fumes on contact cal damage. Store in
with moisture or when cool, dry, well venti-
heated to decomposition, lated area.
Decomposes in water to
carbon dioxide and hy-
drogen chloride.
Reacts vigorously with Protect against physi-
oxidizing materials. cal damage. Outside or
Produces highly toxic detached storage pre-
cyanide fumes when ferred. Inside storage
heated to decomposition in flam, liquids room
or cabinet. Isolate
from oxidizing materials.
21
-------
Sulfur Dioxide
S02
Sulfuric acid (1)
H2S04
Tellurium " (0.1)
compounds
°° Toluene
C6H5CH3
997
Vinyl Chlorid
CH2CHC£
770
882
Affects upper respira- Non-combustible. Will
tory tract. Dangerous extinguish fire.
to eyes. Pungent & ir-
ritating gas provides
own warning of toxic
concentrations. High
concentrations can be
fatal.
Very corrosive. Causes Can ignite finely
severe deep burns to divided combustible
tissue. Mist inhalation materials on contact.
causes respiratory ir-
ritation, may lead to
chronic bronchitis.
Relatively low toxici- Only as finely pow-
Reacts with moisture
to produce toxic and
corrosive fumes.
Protect against physi-
cal damage. Store in
cool, dry, well-venti-
lated area.
I2b
Power oxidizer. Highly Protect against physi-
reactive in contact w/ cal damage and water.
many materials. Attacks Separate storage. Avoid
many metals, releasing skin contact.
hydrogen. Reacts with
moistures to produce
heat.
ty. Produces garlic
odor in breath and
sweat. Heavy exposures
may result in drowsi-
ness , headache , appe-
tite loss, nausea.
dered dusts.
Toxic fumes when
heated or on contact
with acid or acid
fumes.
Protect against physi-
cal damage. Store in
cool, well-ventilated
area away from acids.
cotic in high concen-
trations . Impaired
coordination & reac-
tion time. Possible
liver damage & anemia.
Low toxicity. Narcotic None
in high concentrations .
heat or flame.
fumes when heated.
Dermatitis. Narcotic
in high concentration
Slight'hazard. Vapors
can explode at high
detached storage pre-
ferred. Inside storage
in flammable liquids
room or cabinet.
•May yield toxic fumes Protect against physi-
when heated to decom- cal damage. Store in
position or on contact cool, well-ventilated
with acid or acid fumes area, away from acids.
May yield toxic fumes Protect against physi-
when heated to decom- cal damage. Store in
ir on contact cool, well-ventilated
Addition is possible. temperatures with high position or on contact cool, well-ventilated
energy ignition source, with acid or acid fumes area, away from acids.
4-22 Anesthetic in high con- Flammable gas at ordi- Reacts vigorously with
centrations. Causes
skin burns by rapid
evaporation and subse-
quent freezing.
oxidizers. Releases
highly toxic phosgene
nary temperatures .
Forms explosive mix-
tures with air. Large fumes when heated to
fires practically inex- decomposition.
tinguishable.
Obtain instructions
from supplier before
handling or storing.
Protect against physi-
cal damage. Outside or
detached storage pre-
ferred. Inside storage
in fire-resistive, well
ventilated storage room
with no sources of heat
or ignition.
24b
27 e
1.4-6.7 Irritating to eyes and Flammable liquid. Dan- Reacts vigorously with Protect against physi- 18
respiratory tract. Nar- gerous when exposed to oxidizers. Emits toxic cal damage. Outside or
27j
27j
46
-------
Xylenes
C6H4(CH3)2
100 84 982 1.1-7.0 Dermatitis on repeated
skin contact. Narcotic
in high concentrations.
Irritates upper respi-
ratory system.
Flammable liquid. Dan-
gerous when exposed to
heat or flame. Vapors
form explosive mixture
with air.
Reacts with oxidizing
materials.
Protect against physi-
cal damage. Outside or
detached storage pre-
ferred. Inside storage
in flammable liquids
room or cabinet.
18
*Celling concentration not to be exceeded during 8-hr, shift except for
durations and concentrations specified in OSHA standards.
**No 8-hr, time weighted average. Exposure is ceiling concentration not to
be exceeded during 8-hr, shift except for durations and concentrations
specified in OSHA standards.
***The specific waste disposal methods for flourine compounds vary. You will
need to select a method from a text such as the MCA, Laboratory Waste
Disposal Manual for that specific compound.
-------
Lesson 16
-------
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
SAFETY MANAGEMENT TRAINING PROGRAM
LESSON: Waste Disposal No. 16 Time: 1 hour
Objectives: Completion of this lesson will enable the trainee to identify the
hazards associated with the disposal of chemical wastes from the
laboratory and to prescribe safe procedures for waste disposal.
Content; This lesson covers the basic principles for reducing the hazards
of waste disposal in the laboratory. Specific waste disposal
procedures for 47 commonly used chemicals are given, categorized
by chemical classes.
Methods: Lecture, discussion, questions.
References; Manufacturing Chemists Association, Laboratory Waste Disposal
Manual.
16-S-l
-------
LESSON: WASTE DISPOSAL
HAZARDS OF WASTE DISPOSAL
Careful procedures are required to eliminate or minimize
the hazards associated with the disposal of chemical wastes
from the laboratory. Hazards which must be considered
include the following:
Fire and explosion
Release of toxic materials
Violent reactions with water or other chemicals
Damage to drains and sewage disposal systems
Contamination of ground, air, or water.
As a supervisor, you must anticipate the adverse effects
which may be associated with the disposal of wastes of any
given substance in your laboratory. You must then prescribe
safe procedures for waste disposal and ensure that laboratory
personnel follow the prescribed procedures.
DISPOSAL PROCEDURES
This lesson gives disposal procedures for the 47 substances
commonly used in the laboratory that were covered in the
previous lesson. These procedures are categorized by
chemical classes to offer some guidance as to the safe means
of disposal of chemicals not specifically listed.
Reducing the Hazard
Manufacturing The recommendations for treatment of hazardous chemical
Chemists Association, wastes are directed toward the elimination or reduction of
Laboratory Waste the hazard potential. The following methods may be used
Disposal Manual, as appropriate:
p. 4.
• Some organic wastes can be converted to the non-
toxic, naturally occurring forms.
• Toxic cyanides can be converted to less toxic
cyanates or into complex iron cyanides.
• Very active chemicals can be made less active by
mixing with inert materials such as sand, kaolin,
or vermiculite, and then converted to less harmful
forms which can be safely discharged to the drain.
16-S-2
-------
LESSON: WASTE DISPOSAL
Manufacturing
Chemists Association,
Laboratory Waste
Disposal Manual,
p. 2.
• Certain materials can be safely destroyed by
burning. For slow-burning compounds, this process
may be speeded up by dissolving in flammable
solvents. Due consideration must be given to
possible air pollution. Some incinerators are
equipped with afterburners to reduce carbon and
carbon monoxide and with scrubbers to remove by-
products.
• Some inorganic elements and their compounds are
highly toxic in any soluble form and therefore
should be recovered for re-use. Examples are
mercury, arsenic, and lead. Recovered material can
be shipped to the supplier for reprocessing.
Down-the-Drain Disposal
Chemicals poured down the drain should be non-toxic or in
concentrations below the threshold limit and non-corrosive
to drainage piping.
Water pollution standards in your locality regulate the
concentrations which may be transferred to the drain. You
can obtain copies of such standards from the water pollution
control agency in your state or interstate region.
Disposal of Materials in Hard-to-Open Containers
Sometimes you may need to dispose of materials in containers
that are difficult or impossible to open in the usual way.
A chemical in a metal or glass container should be returned
to the vendor if it has not been opened and can be safely
packed for shipment. More often, however, the difficulty
in opening occurs after a portion has been used or after
transfer to another vessel. In this case the vendor cannot
be responsible for disposal.
For a highly hazardous material, the container may be
removed to a safe location and broken or punctured with a
22 caliber rifle. The spilled material then can be ignited
if combustible, covered with neutralizing solid, or greatly
diluted with a strong stream of water.
16-S-3
-------
LESSON: WASTE DISPOSAL
A gas cylinder with a defective valve should be returned to
the vendor if at all possible. The valve cap should be in
place; if this is not possible, the cylinder should be.
placed in a heavy crate to prevent damage in shipment. If
someone in the laboratory is experienced in handling ex-
plosives, this method can be used to open cylinders. How-
ever, caution is required.
DISPOSAL PROCEDURE METHODS
The Manufacturing Chemists Association Laboratory Waste
Disposal Manual is an excellent reference text for safe
waste disposal. It contains an index of over 1100 chemi-
cals/substances and gives characteristics that relate to
the fire and health hazards of each one. It also describes
46 disposal procedures. Each procedure is numbered. The
number of the appropriate procedure is given in the charac-
teristics for each chemical/substance in the index.
The disposal procedure states:
• The personal protective equipment to wear
• How to dispose of spills
• How to dispose of package lots.
There is an index of the frequently used chemicals that
were discussed in Lesson 15, with the number of the
appropriate disposal procedure in the MCA Laboratory
Waste Disposal Manual on the next page. Five of the
procedures are attached on the following pages.
You should have the Manual or a similar document im-
mediately available to you in the laboratory. When
handling these chemicals, you should know the safe waste
disposal procedures. When you have spilled the chemical
it is probably too late to look them up.
16-S-4
-------
LESSON: WASTE DISPOSAL
INDEX TO DISPOSAL PROCEDURES FOR CHEMICAL WASTES
Disposal Procedure Chemical Class
2
4b
5
6
12 a
12b
14
15
18
21
23
24b
26
27f
27b
27d
27e
27j
Aldehydes
Organic Halogen &
Related Compounds
Aromatic Amines
Aromatic
Halogenated Amines
& Nitro Compounds
Carbon Disulfide
Oxidizing Agents
Reducing Substances
Cyanides and
Nitriles
Ethers
Hydrocarbons,
Alcohols, Ketones,
& Esters
Inter Non-Metallic
Compounds
Sulfides,
Inorganic
Acids, Inorganic
Wastes to be dumped
into landfills or
released to air
Recovery:
Recovery:
Recovery:
Recovery:
Recovery:
Halogenated
Solvents
Examples
Formaldehyde
Chlordane, Dieldrin>
Methyl Bromide,
Vinyl Chloride
Pyridine
Nitrobenzene
Chlorine, Flourine,
Iodine
Sulfur Dioxide
Cyanides, Hydrogen
Cyanide
Ethyl Ether
Acetone, Benzene,
Carbon Monoxide,
Cyclohexane,
Diisobutyl Ketone,
Ethyl Alcohol,
Heptane, Hexane,
Methanol, Methyl
Butyl Ketone,
Methly Ethyl Ketone,
Methyl Isobutyl
Ketone, Toluene,
Xylenes
Phosgene
Hydrogen Sulfide
Hydrogen Bromide,
Hydrogen Chloride,
Hydrogen Flouride,
Sulfuric Acid
Methylene Chloride
Ozone
Lead and Cadmium
Compounds
Mercury and Mercury
Organic Compounds
Ars eni c, Ant imony,
and Bismuth
Selenium and
Tellurium
Carbon Tetra-
chloride, Chloroform,
Trichloroethane,
Trichloroethylene
16-S-5
-------
LESSON: WASTE DISPOSAL
DISPOSAL PROCEDURE 18 — Hydrocarbons, Alcohols, Ketones,
and Esters
(Acetone, Benzene, Carbon Monoxide, Cyclohexane, Diisobutyl
Ketone, Ethyl Alcohol, Heptane, Hexane, Methanol, Methyl
Butyl Ketone, Methyl Ethyl Ketone, Methyl Isobutyl Ketone,
Toluene, Xylenes)
Wear: Rubber gloves, face shield, laboratory coat. Have
all-purpose canister mask available.
Spills; Eliminate all sources of ignition and flammables.
• A gas leak from a faulty tank: Keep concentration of
gas below the explosive mixture range by forced ventila-
tion. Remove tank to an open area and allow dissipation
to the atmosphere. Attempt to cap the valve outlet
and return tank to the supplier.
• A liquid: Absorb on paper. Evaporate on an iron pan
in a hood. Burn the paper.
• A solid: Sweep onto paper and place in an iron pan in
the hood. Burn the paper and compound.
Package Lots;
1. A gas: Pipe the gas into the incinerator. Or
lower into a pit and allow it to burn away.
2. A liquid: Atomize into an incinerator. Combustion
may be improved by mixing with a more flammable
solvent.
3. A solid: Make up packages in paper or other
flammable material. Burn in the incinerator. Or
the solid may be dissolved in a flammable solvent
and sprayed into the fire chamber.
16-S-6
-------
LESSON: WASTE DISPOSAL
DISPOSAL PROCEDURE 24b— Acids, Inorganic (Hydrogen Bromide,
Hydrogen Chloride, Hydrogen Fluoride, Sulfuric Acid)
Wear; Rubber gloves, self-contained breathing apparatus,
laboratory coat. Have body shield available.
Spills.: Cover the contaminated surface with sodium bi-
carbonate or a soda ash—slaked lime mixture (50-50). Mix
and add water if necessary to form a slurry. Scoop up slurry
and wash down the drain with excess water. Wash site with
soda ash solution.
Package Lots; Add slowly to large volume of agitated solu-
tion of soda ash and slaked lime. Add neutralized solution
to excess running water. As an added precaution, the sink
can be lined with protective matting and filled with coarse
chipped marble.
16-S-7
-------
LESSON: WASTE DISPOSAL
DISPOSAL PROCEDURE 26 — Wastes to be Dumped into Landfills
or Released to Air (Methylene Chloride, Ozone)
Wear; Heavy work gloves, safety glasses.
Properly assembled waste ready for pick-up trucks may be
used as fill in reclaiming low areas or may be dumped into
a landfill.
16-S-8
-------
LESSON: WASTE DISPOSAL
DISPOSAL PROCEDURE 27b— Recovery: Mercury and Organic
Mercury Compounds
Wear: Rubber gloves, self-contained breathing apparatus,
laboratory coat.
CAUTION: The toxicity of mercury is such that the element
and its compounds should not be allowed to contaminate air
or water.
Spills and Package Lots;
• Metal: Collect all droplets and pools at once by
means of suction pump and aspirator bottle with a
long capillary tube. Cover fine droplets in non-
accessible cracks with calcium polysulfide and excess
sulfur. Combine all contaminated mercury in a tightly
stoppered bottle. Hold it for purification or sale.
• Compounds: Dissolve all water soluble contaminated
compounds. Convert other contaminated compounds to
the soluble nitrates. Adjust the acidity and pre-
cipitate as mercuric sulfide. Wash and dry the pre-
cipitate. Ship to the supplier.
16-S-9
-------
LESSON: WASTE DISPOSAL
DISPOSAL PROCEDURE 27j— Recovery: Halogenated Solvents
(Carbon Tetrachloride, Chloroform, Trichloroethane, Tri-
chloroethylene)
Wear: Rubber gloves, self-contained respirator (or work in
hood), laboratory coat.
Spills: Absorb on paper towels and allow to evaporate in
the fume hood. Burn the paper. Wash site with soap solu-
tion.
Package Lots; The toxic liquid compounds concerned here
are insoluble in water and cannot be burned. Purify the
contaminated liquids by distillation and place the pure
distillate back on the shelf.
OR
Return to the supplier.
16-S-10
-------
LESSON: WASTE DISPOSAL
QUESTIONS
1. What regulations must you follow regarding the disposal
of chemical wastes down-the-drain?
2. Name three elements for which recovery is the required
method of waste control.
3. How should you dispose of spilled acetone in the
laboratory?
4. How should you treat a spill of sulfuric acid in the
laboratory?
5. How should you dispose of a package lot of carbon
tetrachloride?
16-S-ll
-------
Lesson 17
-------
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
SAFETY MANAGEMENT TRAINING PROGRAM
LESSON: First Aid and Medical
No. 17 Time:
hour
Objectives: This lesson will enable trainees to:
(1) understand and apply the OSHA medical and first
aid requirements;
(2) become acquainted with various first aid procedures
recommended by the American National Red Cross; and
(3) program the participation of employees in medical
surveillance programs required by OSHA.
Content: This lesson covers the OSHA standards for medical
services and first aid. It also includes a discussion
of specific first aid procedures which might be needed
in EPA field work. The OSHA medical surveillance
requirements for certain types of exposures are outlined
briefly.
Methods:
Lecture, discussion, questions.
References: 29 CFR 1910.151--0ccupational Safety and Health Standards.
29 CFR 1926.23 and 1926.50—Construction Safety and Health
Regulations.
29 CFR 1910.1001-1017—Occupational Safety and Health Standards^,
29 CFR 1910.95—Occupational Safety and Health Standards.
American National Red Cross, Standard First Aid and Personal
Safety.
17-S-l
-------
LESSON: First Aid and Medical
INTRODUCTION
Inadequate first aid personnel and facilities or lack of
trained personnel at an establishment may result in deaths
and permanent disabilities which could have been prevented.
Improper rescue and transport of an injured person may
result in further injury. Costs to the establishment may
be high in terms of medical care, insurance, and lost
earning ability.
OSHA STANDARDS
29 CFR 1910.151 The OSHA standards in 1910.151 for medical and first aid
(Medical and First services/facilities are very brief, but very important.
Aid) They are as follows:
(a) The employer must insure that medical personnel
are readily available for advice and consultation.
(b) In the absence of an infirmary, clinic, or nearby
hospital for treatment, at least one person
trained in first aid must be available. All
first aid facilities and supplies must be approved
by the establishment's consulting physician.
(c) Where the eyes or body of any person may be
exposed to injurious corrosive materials, suit-
able facilities must be provided in the work area
for quick drenching or flushing of the eyes or
body in emergencies.
29 CFR 1926.23 and Although the OSHA standards for the construction industry
50 (Medical Services are not directly applicable to the EPA, these regulations
and First Aid) are worth noting as guidelines. The construction standards
for medical and first aid are similar to those in 1910.151,
but a bit more detailed. These regulations should be
especially noted by EPA personnel who do field work.
(a) The person(s) available at the work site to
render first aid must have a valid first aid
training certificate from the U.S. Bureau of
Mines, the Red Cross, of the equivalent.
(b) First aid supplies approved by the consulting
physician must be easily accessible when needed.
The first aid kit must be weatherproof with
individual sealed packages for each type of item.
17-S-2
-------
LESSON: First Aid and Medical
(c) The contents of the kit must be checked by the
employer to make sure that used-up items are
replaced before the kit is taken out on any job.
(d) Proper equipment must be provided for transporting
injured persons to a doctor or hospital. If this
kind'of transportation cannot be provided, then
a communication system for contacting an ambulance
must be established.
(e) The telephone numbers of physicians, hospitals,
and ambulances must be conspicuously posted.
EPA field workers, who may have to travel far from populated
areas where medical help is not readily available, should
take first aid training and carry first aid kits. The help
that can be given to an injured person "on the spot" could
save a life (and at the very least reduce suffering).
FIRST AID
First aid is immediate and temporary aid given before
trained medical help arrives. The primary goal in any
attempt to give emergency first aid is to avoid further
in j ury.
General Procedures
Follow these general procedures when first aid is needed:
• Do not move the victim unless absolutely necessary;
that is, unless the victim's life is endangered if
he or she is left where the accident occurred. If
you must move an injured person out of danger, use
a method that causes the least possible body movement.
• Attend to "hurry cases." (See below.)
• Keep the victim lying down.
• Conserve body heat.
• Call for professional medical aid.
• Stay with the victim until qualified medical help
arrives.
17-S-3
-------
LESSON: First Aid and Medical
Traumatic Shock
Watch for traumatic shock with a severe injury of any type.
Shock is a depression of body functions and can threaten
life. The victim's skin may be pale and cold, his pulse
rapid, and his breathing rate fast. His eyes may also be
dilated.
To prevent shock:
• Keep the victim lying down.
• Cover the victim only enough to conserve his body heat.
• Get medical help quickly.
"Hurry" Cases
"Hurry cases" are those where immediate action is needed
to save life. These are:
Severe bleeding
Stopped breathing
Poisoning
Severe Bleeding
Action in a case of severe bleeding should be taken
to stop the bleeding, keep the wound clean, and treat
the victim for shock.
To stop bleeding, apply direct pressure against
the wound with a heavy bandage, towel, or cloth.
Elevate the bleeding body part above the level
of the heart if you are sure there are no broken
bones.
If direct pressure and elevation do not stop the
bleeding, use pressure on the supply artery.
A tourniquet should not be used except as a last
resort; that is, only for life-threatening hemor-
rhage that cannot be controlled by other means.
Remember: when you apply a tourniquet, you risk
sacrificing a limb in order to save a life.
17-S-4
-------
LESSON: First Aid and Medical
Respiratory Failure
Breathing may stop in cases of drowning., severe
electric shock, inhalation of poisons, smothering,
strangulation, and objects caught in the throat.
Symptoms of such respiratory emergencies are:
• The victim's tongue, lips, and fingernails
turn blue.
• The victim loses consciousness.
• The victim's pupils become dilated.
Mouth-to-mouth or mouth-to-nose artificial respira-
tion is the most effective method for emergency resus-
citation. Whichever method is used, it should be
started as quickly as possible. When the victim
revives, he should be treated for shock.
Bone and Joint Injuries
Suspect a fracture, dislocation, or sprain if there is
pain, tenderness, swelling, discoloration, or obvious
deformity. Above all, do not move the victim unless he
or she is in immediate danger.
Keep broken bones and adjacent joints from moving.
Apply a splint or immobilize the victim if there is
a delay in transportation or when ambulance service
is not available.
Do not try to set a fracture or push a protruding
bone end back into place.
Burns
Chemical burns to the body or eyes should be drenched with
water immediately. Continue for at least 15 minutes.
Action in treating heat burns should be taken to relieve
pain, prevent contamination, and treat for shock.
For first- and second-degree burns:
Submerge the burned area in cold water. Apply
a protective bandage of sterile gauze or clean
cloth, if needed, to prevent contamination.
17-S-5
-------
LESSON: First Aid and Medical
For third-degree burns with deep tissue destruction:
Cover the burned area with a thick, clean
dressing. Do not remove clothing that is stuck
to the burn. Do not apply water, grease, or
any other preparation. Get medical help quickly.
The first-aid information given above is very general. In
all cases, you should consult the Red Cross First Aid manual
for specific instructions. You should never try to give
first aid unless you are trained to do so, or unless you
are able to follow the directions in the first aid manual.
Badly or ignorantly administered first aid can kill rather
than help a person.
ON-THE-JOB MEDICAL SURVEILLANCE
The OSHA standards require medical monitoring and surveil-
lance of employees exposed to particular chemical and phy-
sical agents. Such surveillance generally includes pre-
employment and periodic physical examinations!, special
medical tests and laboratory analyses, and medical moni-
toring and analysis of exposures in the workplace environ-
ment.
The following exposures require medical monitoring. The
necessary surveillance procedures are discussed in the
standards sections and lessons from this course listed
below.
Noise exposures 1910.95 Lesson 8
Exposures to various 1910.1001- Lesson 13
air contaminants and 1017
carcinogenic substances
Ionizing radiation 1910.96 Lesson 10
exposures
Exposures requiring 1910.134 Lesson 18
regular use of
respiratory protection
17-S-6
-------
LESSON: First Aid and Medical
QUESTIONS
1. What should be done with the telephone numbers of a doctor and
ambulance service?
2. Any person qualified to give first aid can determine the first aid
facilities needed in an installation.
True False
3. When should an accident victim be moved?
4. What are the three "hurry cases?"
5. What condition must you watch out for with any severe injury?
6. If an accident victim has stopped breathing, what would you do?
7. What should be your objective when you must move a patient?
17-S-7
-------
LESSON: First Aid and Medical
8. Number the four ways of stopping severe bleeding in the order in
which you would use them.
Pressure on an arterial pressure point
Elevation of the wound above the heart
Use of a tourniquet
Direct pressure on the wound
17-S-8
-------
Lesson 18
-------
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
SAFETY MANAGEMENT TRAINING PROGRAM
LESSON: Personal Protective Equipment
No. 18 Time: 2 hours
Objectives; Completion of this lesson will enable the trainee to
identify the personal protective equipment required
for employees under his supervision and to follow a
program to ensure the proper use and maintenance of
such equipment.
Content; This lesson covers the OSHA standards for personal
protective equipment and gives additional information
on the selection, use, and maintenance of various types
of personal protective equipment. Topics covered are:
head protection, foot protection, body and hand pro-
tection, eye and face protection, respiratory protection,
electrical protective devices, and safety belts, life-
lines, and nets.
Methods:
Lecture, discussion, questions.
References; 29 CFR 1910.132-137—Occupational Safety and Health
Standards.
29 CRF 1926.104, 105—Construction Safety and Health
Regulations.
National Safety Council, Accident Prevention Manual,
Chapter 38.
Materials; Slide projector (35 mm)
Slides: 18-1 - 18-5.
18-S-i
-------
LESSON: Personal Protective Equipment
Personal protective equipment is required for both labora-
tory and field personnel to prevent injuries from a variety
of hazards.
Hazards within the laboratory may include contact with hot
or corrosive liquids, the inhalation of toxic gases or
fumes, and exposure to radiation. Workers in the field
must be protected against being struck by falling objects
or flying projectiles, being crushed by heavy materials
or equipment, and being injured by sharp objects. Where
conditions warrant, protection against electrical shock
must be provided. Additional safety devices are required
for workers in high places or over water.
OSHA STANDARDS FOR PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
29 CFR 1910.132— The general requirements for personal protective equip-
Occupational Safety ment are given in 29 CFR 1910.132—Occupational Safety
and Health Standards and Health Standards. These requirements are quoted
below.
"(A) Application. Protective equipment, including
personal protective equipment for eyes, face, head,
and extremities, protective clothing, respiratory
devices, and protective shields and barriers, shall
be provided, used, and maintained in a sanitary and
reliable condition wherever it is necessary by
reason of hazards of processes or environment,
chemical hazards, radiological hazards, or mechani-
cal irritants encountered in a manner capable of
causing injury or impairment in the function of any
part of the body through absorption, inhalation, or
physical contact.
(b) Employee-owned equipment. Where employees pro-
vide their own protective equipment, the employer
shall be responsible to assure its adequacy, in-
cluding proper maintenance, and sanitation of such
equipment.
(c) Design. All personal protective equipment shall
be of safe design and construction for the work to be
performed."
SUPERVISOR'S RESPONSIBILITY
In some situations which require the use of personal pro-
tective equipment, workers may resist using the equipment
because it is uncomfortable to wear or inconvenient to
use. As a supervisor, you are responsible for ensuring
that workers use the prescribed equipment and in an
18-S-2
-------
LESSON: Personal Protective Equipment
appropriate manner.
Procedures that may help to gain worker acceptance of per-
sonal protective equipment:
An educational program pointing out the necessity
for such equipment.
Appropriate rules to influence worker's attitudes.
Selection of equipment that provides adequate
protection with minimal interference of normal work
procedures.
It is also your responsibility to make sure that all
personal protective equipment is periodically checked to
assure that it is properly maintained.
WHO PAYS FOR EQUIPMENT
Policies vary in regard to whether the employer furnishes
personal protective equipment or whether workers must buy
their own. For some types of equipment, the costs may be
shared.
HEAD PROTECTION
1910.135—Occupational OSHA standards do not contain a specific statement re-
Safety and Health garding conditions under which helmets must be worn.
Standards However, it is a generally accepted practice that helmets
should be worn when materials are handled and stored above
shoulder height.
There are two types of helmets. Those with a full brim
provide the most complete protection for head, face, and
back of the neck. Where a brim may interfere with the
job, a brimless type may be used.
CLASSES OF HELMETS
Helmets are divided into four classes, as shown in the
table on the following page.
18-S-3
-------
LESSON: Personal Protective Equipment
Classes of Helmets
Class Electric Weight Materials
Protection Used
A Limited 15 oz. Water resistant,
Resistance Slow burning
B High 15-1/2 oz. Slow burning,
Resistance Water resistant
C No Protection 15 oz.
D High Fire resistant,
Resistance Nonconductor of
electricity
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR HELMETS
The following general requirements for the selection, use,
maintenance, and inspection of helmets should be observed:
All helmets must be water-resistant.
The support straps inside the helmet must
keep it at least 1/2 inch above the
wearer's head. This suspension gives
a helmet the ability to distribute
impact.
Chin straps must be kept in place and
adjusted so the helmet stays on the
worker's head.
In very cold weather, helmet liners
may be used.
Workers should not drill or punch holes
in the helmet shell in an attempt to get
additional ventilation. This weakens the
helmet's ability to sustain impact.
Helmets should be inspected for defects
before each use.
Safety hats should be thoroughly washed
at least every 30 days.
18-S-4
-------
LESSON: Personal Protective Equipment
Bump caps are a lightweight form of
protection for use where helmets with
brims would be in the way. However,
these must not be substituted for
helmets.
PROTECTION FOR WORKERS WITH LONG HAIR
Workers with long hair should wear coverings that:
meet the following requirements:
Cover all the hair.
Prevent the hair from getting
caught in machinery.
Protect hair from sparks, hot
metals, and chemicals.
Resist flame.
FOOT PROTECTION
29 CFR 1910.136— OSHA standards state that occupational footwear must meet
Occupational Safety the specifications of ANSI Standard Z41.1—1967, for
and Health Standards safety toe footwear. The following paragraphs highlight
some of these requirements.
TYPES OF PROTECTIVE FOOTWEAR
Safety toe footwear is divided into three classes based
on the ability to withstand compression and impact: as
shown in the table below.
Classes of Safety Shoes
Class Compression Impact Clearance
(pounds) (pounds) (inches
75
50
30
2,500
1,750
1,000
75
50
30
16/32
16/32
16/32
18-S-5
-------
LESSON: Personal Protective Equipment
SPECIAL TYPES OF SHOES
Special types of shoes are available to protect against
various other hazards, as shown in the following chart.
Hazard
Wet conditions
Wet conditions,
e.g., dairies,
breweries
Shoe Characteristics
Rubber boots/shoes with
steel toe box
Wood-soled sandals or
shoes
Handling heavy materials Safety toe shoe
Splashes of molten
metal
Protruding nails
Electrical
Hot surfaces
Heavy metals
"Congress" or gaiter
type
Reinforced/flexible
metal innersoles
Non-metallic shoes
Wood-soled shoes
Built-in instep protec-
tion
BODY AND HAND PROTECTION
There are no specific OSHA or ANSI standards for body and
hand protection. However, the general requirements of
OSHA Standard 1910.132 state that personal protective
equipment must be provided where conditions warrant.
Many types of specialized clothing are available to
provide protection against a variety of hazards. In
general, make sure that the design, construction, and
material used give appropriate protection for the hazard
involved. The manufacturer often gives guidelines
regarding appropriate usage.
Materials for Body and Hand Protection
Materials used for body and hand protectors differ,
depending on the type of protection needed.
18-S-6
-------
LESSON: Personal Protective Equipment
Leather protects against heat, hot metal
splashes, limited impact, and infrared and
ultraviolet radiant energy.
Asbestos and wool are used for heat protection
at higher temperatures.
Aluminized clothing is used at extremely high
temperatures. The aluminized coating reflects
much of the radiant heat.
Impervious clothing is required for protection
against dusts, vapors, moisture, and corrosive
liquids. Such garments run the gamut from
sheet plastic bibs to total body suits with
an.air supply.
Impervious materials include natural rubber,
synthetic rubber, neoprene, vinyl, polypropylene,
and polyethylene films. Natural rubber is not
suitable for use with oils, greases, and many
organic solvents and chemicals.
Padded clothing and hard fiber or metal shields
will protect against bruises, cuts, and blows.
Gloves
Gloves, hand leathers, and arm protectors are available
for various types of protection against heat, chemicals,
abrasions, and slippery surfaces.
Hand leathers may be more comfortable than gloves for
heavy materials handling but should not be used around
moving machinery.
Gloves should be snug but comfortable and come above
the wrist so that no gap is left between glove and coat
or shirt sleeve.
Clothing for Use Around Specific Hazards
Clothing available for use around specific hazards
includes the following:
High visibility clothing for use around
traffic hazards.
Disposable plastic clothing for use around
low-level nuclear radiation or where con-
tamination is a problem.
18-S-7
-------
LESSON: Personal Protective Equipment
Leaded clothing for use around X-ray or gamma
radiation.
Electromagnetic radiation suits for use around
high-level radar fields.
Conductive clothing for use during bare-hand
work on extra-high voltage conductors.
Construction of Protective Clothing
Protective clothing must be of good quality and well-
constructed. The following features should be considered:
Fasteners must prevent gaps during body
movement.
Fasteners must be designed so that the
wearer can remove the garment rapidly and
easily.
Clothing used around hot liquids, molten metals, acids,
and caustics must not have turned-up cuffs or other
projections. Pockets should have flaps that fasten shut.
No loose clothing of any type shall be worn around
moving machinery.
Climate is a factor to consider in choosing protective
clothing.
EYE AND FACE PROTECTION
29 CFR 1910.133— OSHA standards state that employers must make conveniently
Occupational Safety available and employees must use suitable eye and face
and Health Standards protective equipment where there is reasonable probability
of injury that can be prevented by use of such equipment.
No unprotected person shall knowingly be subjected to eye
hazards from flying objects, glare, liquids, injurious
radiation, or other environmental condition.
General Requirements
The OSHA general requirements for eye and face protection
are as follows:
Protectors must be adequate for the hazard; be
reasonably comfortable; fit snugly; not interfere
18-S-8
-------
LESSON: Personal Protective Equipment
unduly with the wearer's movements; be durable,
easy to clean, and capable of being disinfected;
and be kept clean and in good repair.
Every protector must be distinctly marked to facilitate
identification of the manufacturer.
The user must be instructed regarding any limitations or
precautions indicated by the manufacturer. Care must be
taken that limitations and precautions are strictly
observed.
Eye Protective Devices
Eye protective devices are optical instruments. They
must be carefully selected, fitted, and used.
It is recommended that the program be supervised
by an industrial ophthalmologist.
Factors to consider in selection of eye protective
devices include the degree of protection afforded,
comfort, ease of cleaning and repair.
Design Considerations. The following factors
should be considered in selecting eye protection
appropriate for the hazard.
Frames and cup goggles must be flame-resistant,
corrosion-resistant, non-irritating to the
skin, and easy to clean.
Frames must be rigid enough to hold the lenses
in proper position.
Lenses must not have appreciable distortion
or prism effect.
In general, glass lenses give better protection
against sharp objects than plastic lenses and are
more resistant to abrasion.
Plastic lenses protect better against small objects
traveling at high speeds and against hot metal
splashes. Plastic takes longer to fog, but may
be adversely affected by some chemicals.
Protection Required with Corrective Lenses
Ordinary spectacles with corrective lenses are nol: con-
sidered adequate for safety protection.
18-S-9
-------
LESSON: Personal Protective Equipment
It is preferable to grind the correction into the
lenses of safety goggles or spectacles.
Goggles may be worn over corrective spectacles if
they do not disturb the adjustment of the spectacles.
Goggles may incorporate corrective lenses behind the
protective lenses.
Persons wearing contact lenses require the same
safety protection as persons not wearing corrective
lenses.
Nowadays, all eye glasses are required to be made of
shatter-proof glass or plastic.
Impact Protection. Types of goggles that may be
used to protect the eyes from flying particles are:
(1) Spectacles with impact-resistant lenses.
Those without sideshields give frontal
protection against limited hazards.
Those with sideshields give some side
protection.
(2) Flexible goggles, with a wholly flexible
frame forming the lens holder.
(3) Cushion-fitting goggles, with a rigid
plastic frame and a separate cushioned-
fitting surface in contact with the face.
(4) Chipping goggles, which give maximum
protection. These are contour-shaped,
with rigid plastic eyecups. One style
is available that fits over corrective
spectacles.
Face shields alone do not adequately protect the
eyes against impact. Where face shields are
needed, goggles or spectacles should also be worn.
Types of Eye Protection. Two representative types of
eye protection are shown in the following slides.
18-S-10
-------
LESSON: Personal Protective Equipment
Slide 18-1
Slide 18-1 shows plastic-frame safety spectacles with
screened sideshields.
Slide 18-2
Slide 18-2 shows an all-plastic, soft-sided chemical
splash goggle with indirect and filtered ventilation for
protection against heavy splash and driven mist.
Face Protection
Face shields, acid hoods, or chemical goggles may be
needed to protect workers from splashes of acids,
alkalis, or other liquids and chemicals.
18-S-ll
-------
LESSON: Personal Protective Equipment
For maximum protection, a hood of a chemical-
resistant material with a glass or plastic window
is recommended. However,
hoods are very hot to wear.
be needed for comfort.
An air line may
A face shield or flexible fitting chemical goggles
may provide adequate protection against limited
direct splashes.
Slide 18-3
\
\
29 CFR 1910.134—
Occupational Safety
and Health Standards
Slide 18-3 shows a chemical resistant full-face shield.
For severe exposures, both a face shield and chemical
goggles may be needed.
Design considerations. Protector materials should
be strong, lightweight, non-irritating to the skin,
and easy to disinfect.
Metals should be non-corrosive.
Plastics should be slow-burning.
RESPIRATORY PROTECTION
OSHA standards state that the primary objective in the
control of occupational diseases caused by breathing air
contaminated with harmful dusts, fogs, fumes, mists, gases,
smokes, sprays, or vapors shall be to prevent atmospheric
contamination.
18-S-12
-------
LESSON: Personal Protective Equipment
This shall be done as far as feasible by accepted
engineering control measures, such as enclosure or con-
finement of the operation, general and local ventilation,
and substitution of less toxic materials.
When effective engineering controls are not feasible,
or while they are being instituted, appropriate respira-
tors must be used.
OSHA General Requirements for Respiratory Protection
The employer is responsible for providing appropriate
respirators and formulating written standard operating
procedures for selection and use of respirators.
Users must be instructed and trained in the proper use of
respirators and their limitations.
Where practicable, respirators should be assigned to
individual workers for their exclusive use.
The employer is responsible for proper cleaning, dis-
infection, and storage of respirators.
Respirators used routinely must be inspected during
cleaning and worn parts replaced. Respirators for emer-
gency use must be inspected at least once a month and after
each use. Frequent random inspections should be conducted
to see that respirators are properly selected, used, and
maintained.
Before a person is assigned to a task requiring the use of
a respirator, it must be determined that he is physically
able to perform the work and use the equipment. The
user's medical status should be reviewed periodically.
In areas where the wearer could be overcome by a toxic or
oxygen deficient atmosphere should a respirator fail, at
least one additional person must be present with no
duties other than to observe the man in the hazardous
atmosphere, tend the life line, and rescue the first man
if necessary. Some form of communication must be main-
tained between both or all persons present. Provision
should be made that one person will be unaffected by any
likely incident and will have the proper rescue equipment
to assist the others if required.
Persons using respirators in atmospheres immediately
hazardous to life or health must be equipped with safety
harnesses and safety lines, unless other equivalent means
are provided for their rescue.
18-S-13
-------
LESSON: Personal Protective Equipment
Types of Hazards
Respirators are needed where there is an oxygen deficiency
or where the air is contaminated with high concentrations
of gases, vapors, aerosols, or participates. These
situations were covered in Lesson 13.
The diagram in Figure 18-1 below outlines the types
of respiratory protection appropriate for various
types of hazards.
TYPES OF RESPIRATORS
Hazard
Gaseous Contaminant
Oxygen Deficiency
Particulate Contaminant
Respirator
Gas Mask—Chemical
cartridge respirator
Self-contained oxygen
or air-supplied breath-
ing apparatus
.Fume or Dust filter
respirator
Air-Supplied Respirators. Air-supplied respirators are
required in oxygen deficient atmospheres. They may also
be used where concentrations of toxic gases or vapors
exceed the permissible concentration.
There are several types of air-supplied respirators.
18-S-14
-------
LESSON: Personal Protective Equipment
Slide 18-4
Slide 18-4 shows a diagram of a hose mask with air
supplied by a hand-operated blower. It consists of
a full face mask, a large diameter flexible air hose,
and a blower. The blower forces air through the hose
to the facepiece. The blower may be hand- or power-
operated.
The hose mask without blower works on the same
principle, except that air is drawn into the face-
piece by the wearer's breathing effort.
18-S-15
-------
LESSON: Personal Protective Equipment
Slide 18-5
Eiholotlon Volv«
Air Supply Holt
From Opining
ZIppinD
Ploilic Bootin
(Inligrol Peril
Slide 18-5 shows an air-supplied suit which would be used
for emergency repair work or rescue in atmospheres ex-
tremely corrosive to the skin and mucous membranes.
Breathing air may be supplied from cylinders or compres-
sors. The cylinder may be a part of the protective
equipment. An air receiver must be of sufficient size
to give the worker time to get to a safe area in the
event of compressor failure. Alarms must be provided
for overheating and for compressor failure.
Supplied air should be of high quality, free from
contaminants. Because of the hazard of fire,
neither pure oxygen nor air containing more than
21 percent oxygen should be used.
The fittings on air line respirators and the air
lines must be incompatible with fittings on other
gas systems.
The time limitations of self-contained breathing
devices must be strictly observed. The rated time
is a guide only; rate of use varies with different
individuals and with the wearer's activity. Also,
an adequate margin of time must be allowed for the
wearer to return to fresh air.
18-S-16
-------
LESSON: Personal Protective Equipment
Air-purifying Respirators. Air-purifying respirators are
used to remove gaseous and particulate contaminants. They
do not protect against oxygen deficiency. Types of air-
purifying respirators include filter respirators, chemical
cartridge respirators, and gas masks.
Filter Respirators are used to remove low concentrations
of particles by drawing air through a filter medium. As
the contaminant is deposited on the filter, the filtration
efficiency increases, but resistance to air flow also
increases.
Filter-type respirators are practical only for situations
in which the concentration does not exceed the exposure
limitation by a factor of 10. For higher concentrations,
the filters become clogged and breathing resistance
increases.
Low concentrations of gases and vapors can be removed by
drawing the air through activated charcoal or some other
adsorbent that will adsorb gases and vapors. The respira-
tor loses effectiveness when the sorbent becomes saturated.
Chemical Cartridge Respirators consist of a half-mask
facepiece connected directly to one or two small containers
of chemicals. The chemicals used are similar to those
found in gas masks. However, cartridge respirators are
for use only in non-emergency situations; that is,
atmospheres which are harmful only after prolonged or
repeated exposures.
Gas masks provide emergency protection during entry into
and escape from hazardous atmospheres containing adequate
oxygen to support life. Where gas masks are used, the
air must contain at least 18 percent oxygen.
A gas mask consists of a full pacepiece, hose, and
canister. Chemicals in the canister purify the con-
taminated air. Because no one chemical will remove
all types of gaseous contaminants, the canister must
be carefully chosen to fit the specific need.
Canisters are color-coded according to the con-
taminant against which they provide protection, as
given in Table 18-1.
Because the gas mask is ordinarily used in emer-
gencies, those who may use it must be carefully
trained. They should know how to ensure a good fit
and test its- facepiece-to-face seal.
18-S-17
-------
TABLE 18-1
COLOR CODE FOR GAS MASK CANISTERS
ATMOSPHERIC CONTAMINANTS TO BE
PROTECTED AGAINST
COLORS ASSIGNED
Acid Gases White.
Hydrocyanic acid gas White with 1/2-inch green stripe completely around
the canister near the bottom.
Chlorine gas White with 1/2-inch yellow stripe completely around
the canister near the bottom.
Organic vapors Black.
Ammonia gas Green.
Acid gases and ammonia gas Green with 1/2-inch white stripe completely around
the canister near the bottom.
Carbon monoxide Blue.
Acid gases and organic vapors Yellow.
Hydrocyanic acid gas and chloropicrin vapor Yellow with 1/2-inch blue stripe completely around
the canister near the bottom.
Acid gases, organic vapors, and ammonia gases Brown.
Radioactive materials, excepting tritium and noble
gases Purple (Magenta) .
Particulates (dusts, fumes, mists, fogs, or smokes) Canister color for contaminant, as designated above,
in combination with any of the above gases or with 1/2-inch gray stripe completely around the
vapors. canister near the top.
All of the above atmospheric contaminants Red with 1/2-inch gray stripe completely around
the canister near the top.
Gray shall not be assigned as the main color for a canister designed to remove acids or vapors.
NOTE: Orange shall be used as a complete body, or stripe color to represent gases not included
in this table. The user will need to refer to the canister label to determine the degree of
protection the canister will afford.
-------
LESSON: Personal Protective Equipment
29 CFR 1910.137—
Occupational Safety
and Health Standards
ELECTRICAL PROTECTIVE DEVICES
OSHA standards require certain types of rubber pro-
tective equipment for electrical workers. This equipment
must conform to ANSI standards as specified in the
following chart:
ELECTRICAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
Item
Rubber insulating gloves
Rubber matting for use around
electric apparatus
Rubber insulating blankets
Rubber insulating hoods
Rubber insulating line hose
Rubber insulating sleeves
Standard
J6.6-1967
J6.7-1935
(R1962)
J6.4-1970
J6.2-1950
(R1962)
J6.1-1950
(R1962)
J6.5-1962
In general, electrical protective devices provide a layer
of insulation between the ground source and the user.
Rubber protective devices should not come into contact
with oil or grease, as these substances can cause serious
deterioration of certain types of rubber.
29 CFR 1926.104—
Construction Safety
and Health
Regulations
SAFETY BELTS. LIFELINES. AND NETS
OSHA standards contain the following specifications in
regard to safety belts, lifelines, and nets:
Lifelines, Safety Belts, arid Lanyards
Lifelines, safety belts, and lanyards must be used only
for employee safeguarding. Once any such device has
actually been used for employee protection, it must be
removed from service immediately and never used for that
purpose again. This requirement applies to actual in-
service loading, not to static load testing.
Lifelines must be secured to an anchorage or structural
member capable of supporting a minimum dead weight of
5,400 pounds.
18-S-19
-------
LESSON: Personal Protective Equipment
Lifelines which may be subjected to cutting or abrasion
must be a minimum of 7/8-inch wire core manila rope.
All other lifelines must be a minimum of 3/4-inch manila
rope or equivalent, with a minimum breaking strength of
5,400 pounds.
Safety belt lanyard must be a minimum of 1/2-inch nylon
or equivalent and with a maximum length to provide for a
fall of no greater than 6 feet. The rope must have a
nominal breaking strength of 5,400 pounds.
Safety belt and lanyard hardware must meet certain Federal
specifications and be able to withstand a tensile loading
of 4,000 pounds without cracking, breaking, or taking a
permanent deformation.
Safety Nets
29 CFR 1926.105— Safety nets are required when workplaces are more than
Construction Safety 25 feet above the ground, water surface, or other surface
and Health where it is impractical to use ladders, scaffold, catch
Regulations platforms, temporary floors, safety lines, or safety belts.
Where safety net protection is required, operations must
not start until the net is in place and has been tested.
Nets must extend 8 feet beyond the edge of the work sur-
face where employees are exposed. The net must be in-
stalled as close under the work surface as practical; in
no case may it be more than 25 feet below the work surface.
Nets must be hung so that the user will not contact the
surfaces or structures below. Such clearances must be
determined by impact load testing.
The mesh size of nets must not exceed 6 inches by 6 inches.
All new nets must be certified by the manufacturer to
meet accepted performance standards of 17,500 foot-pounds
minimum impact resistance. The net must bear a label of
proof test. Edge ropes must provide a minimum breaking
strength of 5,000 pounds.
The net must be fastened to its supports with forged steel
safety hooks or shackles. Connections between net panels
must meet the same strength requirements as the net.
18-S-20
-------
LESSON: Personal Protective Equipment
QUESTIONS
1. Is the employer or employee responsible for the condition of the
personal protective equipment?
2. As a rule hard hats should be worn if materials are handled above
3. Metal helmets should not be used
4. The helmet straps should hold the helmet at least above
the wearer's head.
5. Shoes worn on a construction site should have a insole.
6. The maintenance electrician's shoes should have a sole.
7. What kind of apron should you wear if you handle sulfuric acid in
the lab?
8. What kind of gloves would you wear if you handle monkeys?
9. You handle hot liquids, molten metals, etc. What kind of pockets
should you have?
10. Give two cases where face protection should be plastic rather than
glass.
18-S-21
-------
LESSON: Personal Protective Equipment
11. When is glass superior?
12. If your contact lenses are made of safety glass do you need
safety glasses?
13. There are 3 general types of respirators, each designed for a
specific hazard. Name the 3 hazards.
14. Before a person is assigned to a routine task _that requires use of a
respirator it must be determined that he is
to perform the work. His
must be reviewed periodically.
15. There is a one-man job to be performed in an oxygen deficient
atmosphere. How many people are needed?
16. Electrical protective devices provide between
the ground source and the user.
17. Safety belts that have been used, i.e., saved a worker from a fall,
must be
18. Safety belt lanyards must have no more than feet of slack.
19. Safety nets must be used if the ground level is or more
below the working platform.
20. Nets must extend beyond the work platform.
18-S-22
-------
Lessen 19
-------
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
SAFETY MANAGEMENT TRAINING PROGRAM
LESSON: Field Safety
No. 19
Time: 2 hours
Objectives; This lesson will enable the trainee to conduct boating,
underwater diving, and stack sampling operations in a
safe manner.
Content: This lesson deals with basic safety principles for field
work. Three primary operations are discussed in terms of
safety and health precautions—boating, underwater diving,
and stack sampling.
Methods:
Lecture, discussion, questions.
References; Department of Transportation, Coast Guard publication CG-290,
Federal Requirements for Recreational Boats.
Department of Transportation, Coast Guard publication CG-151,
Emergency Repairs Afloat.
29 CFR 1910.27—Occupational Safety and Health Standards.
.£
Environmental Protection Agency, Safety Management Manual.
* This Manual will be super-ceded
by Handbooks covering air
operations, diving, etc. but
information contained in this
lesson is expected to receive
little change.
19-S-l
-------
LESSON: Field Safety
BOATING OPERATIONS
In any sort of boating operation, the obvious and most
common hazard is drowning. Brownings can occur in 3 pri-
mary ways:
(1) When the boat is handled and operated in a reck-
less or unskilled manner.
(2) When the occupants of the boat are not provided
with the necessary safety devices (i.e. floata-
tion jackets, etc.).
(3) When the boat and its safety equipment are not
kept in good condition.
The EPA Safety Management Manual requires that all motor-
boats owned or leased by EPA be operated with safety as the
prime consideration. Reckless or negligent boat: operations
are subject to the criminal, provisions of the Motorboat Act
of 1940, as amended.
Classes of Motorboats
A motorboat is any vessel 65 feet in length or less which is
propelled by a permanent inboard powerplant or by a temporary
or permanent detachable outboard motor. .Boats are classed
according to length.
Class A — less than 16 feet
Class 1 — 16 feet to less than 2o feet
Class 2 — 26 feet to less than 40 feet
Class 3 — 40 feet to not more than 65 feet
The length of a boat is measured in a straight line from the
foremost to the aftermost part of the vessel, parallel to
the center line. Bowsprits, bumpkins, rudders, outboard
motors, brackets, and similar fittings are not included in
the measurement.
Safety Equipment
The U.S. Coast Guard requres the following minimum safety
equipment on each class of boat:
Class A boats
• Back-fire flame arrester—one approved device on each
carburetor of all gasoline engines (except outboard
motors).
19-S-2
-------
LESSON: Field Safety
• Ventilation—at least 2 ventilator ducts fitted with
cowls (or the equivalent) for ventilating the bilges
of every engine and fuel tank compartment of boats
using gasoline and other fuels having a flashpoint of
110° or less.
There must also be at least one exhaust duct installed
so that it extends to the lower part of the bilge; and
at least one intake duct installed so that it extends
at least midway to the bilge or below the level of the
carburetor air intake.
• Bell/Whistle—none.
• Personal floatation devices—there must be one device
of Type I, II, III, or IV of suitable size available
on board for each person. (See page 19-S-4 for a
description of each type of floatation device.)
• Fire extinguisher—when there is no fixed extinguishing
system in machinery spaces, at least one B-l portable
extinguisher is required. (This does not apply to out-
board motorboats whose construction precludes entrap-
ment of explosive/flammable gases or vapors,,)
When a fixed extinguishing system is installed in
machinery spaces, one less B-l extinguisher is required.
Class 1 boats
• Back-fire flame arrester—same as Class A.
• Ventilation—same as Class A.
• Bell/Whistle—no bell required. One hand, mouth, or
power operated whistle, audible for at least: 1/2 mile,
is required.
• Personal floatation devices—there must be one device
of Type I, II, or III of suitable size available on
board for each person. Also, one throwable Type IV
device is required.
• Fire extinguishers—same as Class A.
Class 2 boats
• Back-fire flame arrester—same as Class A.
• Ventilation—same as Class A.
19-S-3
-------
LESSON: Field Safety
• Bell/Whistle—One bell, which produces a clear tone
when struck, is required. Also, one hand- or power-
operated whistle, audible for at least one mile, is
required.
• Personal floatation devices—same as Class 1.
• Fire extinguisher—at least 2 B-l portable extinguishers
or at least one B-2 portable extinguisher is required.
When a fixed extinguishing system is installed, one
less B-l portable extinguisher is required.
Class 3 boats
• Back-fire flame arrester—same as Class A.
• Ventilation—same as Class A.
• Bell/Whistle—bell requirements same as Class 2. One
power-operated whistle, audible for at least one mile,
is required.
• Personal floatation devices—same as Class 1.
• Fire extinguisher—at least 3 B-l portable extinguishers
or at least one B-l plus one B-2 extinguishers are
required. When a fixed extinguishing system is installed,
one less B-l extinguisher is required.
Personal Floatation Devices
Personal floatation devices (PFDs) are classified by type.
The type and number required on a boat depends on the class
of the vehicle in question.
• Type I PFD — any approved wearable device designed to
turn an unconscious person in the water from a face-
down to a verticle or slightly backward position. It
must have more than 20 pounds of buoyancy.
• Type II PFD — any approved wearable device designed to
turn an unconscious person from a face-down to a verti-
cal or slightly backward position. It must have at
least 15.5 pounds of buoyancy.
• Type III PFD — any approved wearable device designed
to keep a conscious person in a verticle or slightly
backward position. It must have at least 15.5 pounds
of buoyancy. The Type III PFD has a lesser turning
moment than the Type II PFD.
19-S-4
-------
LESSON: Field Safety
• Type IV PFD — any approved device designed to be
thrown to a person in the water, but not designed to
be worn. It must have at least 16.5 pounds of buoyancy.
Buoyant cushions and ring buoys are common examples of
this type.
The Types I, II, and III PFDs must be readily accessible to
all persons on board. The Type IV device must be located so
that it can be used immediately.
There are.Type V PFDs which are designed for specific
and restricted use. The exact specifications and per-
formance of a Type V PFD will vary with each device.
The "work vest" is the only presently approved Type V
PFD. It is designed specifically for use by persons
working around merchant vessels.
All wearable PFDs must be approved by the U.S. Coast Guard,
readily accessible to persons aboard the vessel, in service-
able condition, and of sizes appropriate for the persons
who will wear them.
Fire Extinguishers
Extinguishers approved for motorboats are as follows:
Class
B-l
B-2
Foam
(minimum
gallons)
Us
2*5
Carbon
Dioxide
(minimum
pounds)
4
15
Dry
Chemical
(minimum
pounds)
2
10
Freon
(minimum
pounds)
2h
—
Extinguishers must be carried on all motorboats that have
one or more of the following.
• Closed compartments under thwarts and seats where
fuel tanks may be stored.
• Double bottoms which are not sealed to the hull or
which are not completely filled with floatation
materials.
• Closed living spaces.
• Closed stowage compartments in which flammable/combus-
tible materials are stored.
19-S-5
-------
LESSON: Field Safety
• Permanently installed fuel tanks.
EPA Safety Responsibilities in Boat Operations
Assistant Administrators and Regional Administrators are
responsible through their supervisors for assuring that boats
are equipped, operated, and maintained in compliance with
EPA policy directives and U.S. Coast Guard Standards. The
program to assure compliance should include:
(1) Annual inspection of boats and equipment.
(2) Training of boat operators in:
Safe operation of the craft
Trouble-shooting and emergency reapirs.
(3) Periodic maintenance of boats and equipment.
The motorboat operator is responsible for proper operation
of the vessel, for the equipment and cargo, and the safety
of the crew and passengers. He must know all safety proce-
dures for the class of boat he operates.
Part of the motorboat operator's responsibility is to remain
in control of the vessel at all times. This means that when
the engine breaks down, he should be ^ble to make emergency
repairs, as outlined in the Coast Guard pamphlet entitled
Emergency Repairs Afloat. Topics covered in this pamphlet
include:
(1) What to do if the starter motor or the engine
will not operate or engage for various reasons.
(2) What to do when a diesel engine will not start.
(3) Emergency repairs for fan belts, pipes and hoses,
lost rudders, engine oil leaks, complete electri-
cal failures.
(4) What to do when the boat takes on water.
(5) How to give distress signals.
(6) Recommended hand tools and spare parts for
carrying on board.
(7) How to steer without a rudder.
19-S-6
-------
LESSON: Field Safety
Equipment
All EPA motorboats, whether owned or leased, must carry
the minimum equipment for the particular class of boat.
(See pages 19-S-2 to 19-S-4.) Equipment must be main-
tained to meet U.S. Coast Guard requirements. Any radio
telephone equipment on board must be licensed by the
Federal Communications Commission. A partial list of
required and recommended equipment is as follows:
Anchor and cable
Back-fire flame arrester
Bailing device
Bell
Boat hook
Bucket
Charts
Compass
Course protractor or
parallel rules
Deviation table
Distress signals
Dividers
Fire extinguishers
First aid kit and manual
Flashlight
Lifesaving devices
Light list
Local charts
Mooring lines
Spare oars
Sounding device
Spare parts
Current and tide tables
Tools
Ventilation
Whistle
Training
The Coast Guard Auxiliary offers free courses in:
Outboard Motorboat Handling (1 lesson)
Safe Boating (3 lessons)
Boating Skills and Seamanship (6 lessons plus
7 elective modules)
The EPA recommends that motorboat operators participate in
these courses. All new operators should be required to
take them before solo operation.
Accident Reporting
If an accident or boating occurrence results in death or
the disappearance of a person from a vessel, the operator
must, without delay, notify the nearest U.S. Coast Guard or
State boating authority of: (1) the date, time, and exact
location of the occurrence; (2) the name of each person
who died or disappeared; (3) the number and name of the
vessel; and (4) the names and addresses of the owner and
operator. If the operator cannot give this notification,
each person on board must notify the proper authority, or
determine that proper notification has been given.
19-S-7
-------
LESSON: Field Safety
The operator of a vessel must submit Coast Guard Form
CG-3865 (Boating Accident Report Form) or the proper State
form within 48 hours of an accident in which: (1) a person
dies within 24 hours; (2) a person loses consciousness,
receives medical treatment, or is disabled for more than 24
hours; or (3) a person disappears from the vessel under cir-
cumstances that indicate death or injury.
Accidents must be reported within 5 days if damage to the
vessel and other property totals more than $100.00, or if
an earlier report is not required.
UNDERWATER DIVING OPERATIONS
Safety must be the primary consideration when conducting
underwater pollution control activities. All these under-
water activities must be approved in advance by the Assis-
tant Administrator, the Regional Administrators„ or their
designees. EPA employees may participate in underwater
activities only if they are in good physical condition,
have successfully completed the necessary training, and
are properly equipped.
Diving Safety Responsibilities
Assistant Administrators and Regional Administrators are
responsible for assuring that the supervisors of diving
operations in their areas develop underwater diving pro-
grams in compliance with the regulations contained in
the EPA Safety Management Manual.
The assigned Diving Officers direct actual diving opera-
tions. Their responsibilities include:
(1) Implementing Agency diving policies.
(2) Review of diving operations; accident investi-
gation and reporting; recommending changes in
diving procedures.
(3) Conduct diving training programs.
(4) Diver certification.
(5) Maintenance of records on individual divers.
The EPA diver is responsible for:
(1) Staying in top physical condition and at a
high level of diving proficiency.
19-S-8
-------
LESSON: Field Safety
(2) Conducting diving activities safely.
(3) Refusing to dive if conditions are unsafe or
unfavorable, if he feels unfit mentally or physi-
cally, or if a dive would violate EPA regulations
or good diving practices.
(4) Keeping a log of all diving activities to be
submitted on the fifth of each month to the
Regional or Center Diving Officer.
For specific EPA diving regulations you should read Chapter
3 of the EPA Safety Management Manual. In that chapter you
will find information on:
Certification of divers
Safe procedures for diving operations
Medical criteria for evaluating divers' fitness.
In any diving operation, three considerations are; of para-
mount importance. First is a correct and thorough observation
of all environmental conditions that could affect: the divers'
safety. The second is a complete safety check oi: all diving
equipment before the divers go underwater. The third is
strict adherence to safe decompression practices.
No one is permitted to dive alone, except for emergency
rescue work. Divers must operate in pairs (the "buddy"
system), with each diver responsible for the other's safety.
The divers must be always in sight of each other and at short
range when visibility is good. In conditions of poor visi-
bility, divers must stay in touching contact with one another.
If such contact is lost, divers must immediately come to the
surface.
Each pair of divers must be overseen by the surface
tender. The surface tender is a person who observes
the operation from the surface and who is qualified
to provide emergency help should something go wrong.
He is stationed on shore, on the deck of a vessel,
or on a skiff, whichever is appropriate, but is never
more than 50 feet from the immediate diving area.
STACK SAMPLING
Stack sampling is a grimy business. It is also a dangerous
business due to the heights that must be climbed to get to
the rim of a stack and the nature of the work platform on
the stack. The principal hazard, of course, is that of
19-S-9
-------
LESSON: Field Safety
falling if the proper safety devices are not provided or
proper climbing techniques are not observed.
29 CFR 1910.27-- The OSHA standards contain regulations for the
Occupational Safety design and construction of fixed ladders. As a
and Health Standards. minimum, any fixed ladder must be able to carry a
live load of 200 pounds. The number and position
of additional live-load units of 200 pounds is
determined by anticipated ladder use. Therefore,
before anyone ascends a ladder, he should find out
what its load-bearing capacity is.
If for some reason you need to check on the safety of a
particular fixed ladder, you should read the OSHA design and
clearance requirements for fixed ladders in sections 1910.27
(a), (b), (c), (d), and (e) of the standards. These stan-
dards require that all employers maintain ladders in a safe
condition and inspect them at regular intervals (the inter-
vals being determined by ladder use and exposure).
In terms of safety devices, the OSHA standards set out speci-
fications for the design and construction of ladder cages
and wells. Cages must extend at least 42 inches above the
top of a landing (if other equivalent protection is not pro-
vided) , and not less than 7 feet nor more than 8 feet above
the base of the ladder. Cages must extend no less than 27
nor more than 28 inches from the center-line of the rungs,
and must be at least 27 inches wide with the inside clear
of projections.
Ladder wells must have a clear width of at least 15 inches
each way from the centerline of the rungs. Smooth-walled
wells must have at least a 27-inch distance from the center-
line of the rungs to the well wall.
In place of cage protection, other safety devices may be
used on chimney ladders over 20 feet in length. These
devices may be safety belts or other attachments; which will
provide additional support for the worker. All ladder
safety devices must be compatible with the design of the
ladders which they serve.
Before beginning any stack sampling operation, a determina-
tion should be made to be sure that the smoke isn't toxic or
in some way harmful to the employee who will be doing the
sampling. If the effluent of the stack is suspected of being
harmful, proper respiratory and/or body protection will be
required before the employee climbs to the top of the stack.
19-S-10
-------
LESSON: Field Safety
Stack sampling operations should always be done using the
"buddy" system. The purpose of working in pairs for stack
sampling is the same as for diving operations. If one per-
son becomes incapacitated or endangered in any way, the
other can assist him or get help to the scene right away.
Needless to say, no one should climb a long chimney ladder
unless he or she is in excellent physical condition and
makes use of the appropriate safety devices.
In any sort of field operation where sampling is done, the
person taking the samples should make sure that conditions
are safe for the work to be done. For example, the employee
should see that his footing is secure, that he has a solid
base on which to stand or a sturdy support to prevent him
from falling. If he does not have this, then he should be
provided with some sort of safety support. Safety belts
and lifelines, hanging scaffolds, boatswain's chairs, or
similar devices could be used. Supervisors should keep in
mind that an employee can work much faster and more produc-
tively if he or she feels secure and can use both hands for
the task, instead of requiring one or both hands for support,
Sampling operations should be done during daylight hours
when there is enough light to see safely. If work must be
done at night, adequate artificial illumination must be
provided.
19-S-ll
-------
LESSON: Field Safety
QUESTIONS
1. Distinguish between the three classes of boats used
by EPA.
Class A
Class 1
Class 2
Class 3
2. What two field operations should always be done using
the "buddy" system?
3. How does a Type IV personal floatation device; differ
from Types I, II, and III?
4. Except for radio telephone equipment, with what regula-
tions must all other boating equipment comply?
5. If a boating accident involves a death to one or
more persons, how soon must an accident report be
made?
What does a surface tender do?
7. What is the minimum live load capacity of a fixed
ladder?
8. Before climbing any chimney ladder, what two items
must be checked?
19-S-12
*U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1976 -0- 634-046
------- |